WO2017061579A1 - Screening assistance device, screening assistance method, and screening assistance system - Google Patents

Screening assistance device, screening assistance method, and screening assistance system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017061579A1
WO2017061579A1 PCT/JP2016/079870 JP2016079870W WO2017061579A1 WO 2017061579 A1 WO2017061579 A1 WO 2017061579A1 JP 2016079870 W JP2016079870 W JP 2016079870W WO 2017061579 A1 WO2017061579 A1 WO 2017061579A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
weighing
inspection
unit
medicine
weight
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2016/079870
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
学司 後藤
勇一郎 高木
Original Assignee
株式会社湯山製作所
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社湯山製作所 filed Critical 株式会社湯山製作所
Priority to JP2017544235A priority Critical patent/JP6809475B2/en
Publication of WO2017061579A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017061579A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61JCONTAINERS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR MEDICAL OR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES; DEVICES OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR BRINGING PHARMACEUTICAL PRODUCTS INTO PARTICULAR PHYSICAL OR ADMINISTERING FORMS; DEVICES FOR ADMINISTERING FOOD OR MEDICINES ORALLY; BABY COMFORTERS; DEVICES FOR RECEIVING SPITTLE
    • A61J3/00Devices or methods specially adapted for bringing pharmaceutical products into particular physical or administering forms

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an inspection support apparatus and an inspection support method used for supporting the work of a pharmacist or the like that inspects a medicine dispensed based on prescription data.
  • an inspection support apparatus that is used to support the work of a pharmacist or the like that inspects a medicine dispensed with a medicine based on prescription data.
  • a dispensing inspection system is known in which the suitability of dispensing contents is determined based on the total amount of medicines placed on a plurality of weighing units (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
  • first packaging materials such as PTP sheets or heat seals containing a plurality of medicines are collectively provided to a patient in a second packaging material such as an aluminum packaging material or a medicine box.
  • second packaging material such as an aluminum packaging material or a medicine box.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide an inspection support apparatus capable of supporting an inspection operation for inspecting a medicine in a state where a plurality of first packaging materials containing a plurality of medicines are accommodated in a second packaging material.
  • the purpose is to provide inspection support methods.
  • the inspection support apparatus includes: a weighing unit; a selection processing unit that selects a drug to be weighed by the weighing unit; and a first packaging material that stores a plurality of the drugs selected by the selection processing unit.
  • An acquisition processing unit that acquires the number of the medicines in the plurality of second packaging materials accommodated and the total weight of the second packaging material in which the plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated, and a weighing result by the weighing unit
  • a collation processing unit that collates the prescription data.
  • the verification processing unit is based on the integral weight of the total weight of the second packaging material.
  • the inspection support method according to the present invention is an inspection support method in an inspection support apparatus including a weighing unit, the selection step of selecting a drug to be weighed by the weighing unit, and the drug selected in the selection step.
  • the inspection support system includes a plurality of the inspection support devices and an information processing device capable of communicating with each of the inspection support devices.
  • each said inspection support apparatus transmits the information of the weight of the said 1st packaging material or the said 2nd packaging material used by the collation by the said collation process part to the said information processing apparatus at a predetermined timing.
  • the information processing apparatus includes a weight setting processing unit that sets a reference value of the weight for each medicine based on the weight information acquired from each of the inspection support apparatuses.
  • each said inspection assistance apparatus can acquire the reference value of the said weight from the said information processing apparatus.
  • the inspection support method according to the present invention is an inspection support method in an inspection support apparatus including a weighing unit, the selection step of selecting a drug to be weighed by the weighing unit, and the drug selected in the selection step
  • the number of the medicines in the second packaging material in which a plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated and the total weight of the second packaging material in which the plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated are obtained.
  • An obtaining step, and a collating step for collating the weighing result by the weighing unit and the prescription data, and in the collating step, the number of the medicines obtained by the obtaining step and the total weight of the second packaging material Based on the above, the difference between the approximate weight closest to the weighing value of the weighing part and the weighing value of the weighing part among the integral multiples of the total weight of the second packaging material is within a preset allowable range. Place The total number of the chemicals contained in the second packaging material number corresponding to the integer multiple is inspecting support method are matched to the prescription data resulting weighed.
  • the inspection support apparatus includes a weighing unit, a matching processing unit that compares the amount of medicine calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing section and a target value of the medicine in the prescription data, and the matching A notification processing unit that notifies an error when the verification result by the processing unit is inconsistent.
  • the notification processing unit calculates the amount of the medicine calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing unit and the target value of the medicine in the prescription data. The error is not notified when the difference is within an error range set in advance for each medicine, and the error is notified when the error exceeds the error range.
  • an inspection support apparatus capable of supporting an inspection operation for inspecting a medicine in a state where a plurality of first packaging materials containing a plurality of medicines are accommodated in the second packaging material, and Inspection support methods are provided.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an inspection support apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of inspection support processing executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the weighing inspection process executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a master maintenance screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of master update processing executed by the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a prior inspection control process executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a printing result in the preliminary inspection control process executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a prior inspection application process executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the medical system 1 includes an inspection support device 100, a dispensing support system 200, a reception system 300, and the like.
  • the inspection support device 100, the dispensing support system 200, and the reception system 300 are communicably connected via a network N1 such as a LAN or the Internet. Note that a plurality of inspection support devices 100 can be connected to the medical system 1.
  • the dispensing support system 200 receives prescription data from a host system such as an electronic medical record system or a prescription order system.
  • the prescription data includes, for example, basic information such as patient ID, patient name, gender, age, ward, doctor in charge, pharmacist in charge, and the type of medicine prescribed to the patient (drug name, medicine ID, YJ code, GS1 code, etc. ), Medication information such as dose, usage, start date of taking, duration of taking, and end date of taking.
  • the said dispensing assistance system 200 produces
  • the tablet packaging machine is capable of packaging one or more kinds of tablets into a wrapping paper at each time of taking, and the powder medicine dispensing machine separates one or more kinds of powder at each time of taking. It is possible to wrap it into wrapping paper.
  • the tablet packaging machine or the powder packaging machine capable of packaging tablets and powders in the same wrapping paper is also known. Note that the wrapping paper is formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the medicine contained in the wrapping paper is visible from the outside.
  • the tablet packaging machine or the powder packaging machine also includes a packaging printer that records a patient name, a medication time, a medicine name, and the like on the packaging paper.
  • the dispensing support system 200 stores the prescription data in a sharable state in a preset storage device.
  • the inspection support device 100 can acquire the prescription data from the storage device of the dispensing support system 200.
  • the prescription data is actively transmitted from the dispensing support system 200 to the inspection support device 100.
  • the prescription data acquired from the dispensing support system 200 may be data in an original format edited by the dispensing support system, for example.
  • the prescription data acquired by the inspection support device 100 is not limited to prescription data acquired from the higher-level system by the dispensing support system 200, and the dispensing generated by the dispensing support system 200 based on the prescription data. It may be data.
  • the receipt system 300 receives medical data such as medical contents and prescription data from a host system such as an electronic medical record system or a prescription order system.
  • the receipt system 300 is used to support a reception service such as calculation of medical expenses based on the medical data and issuance of a bill.
  • the reception system 300 stores the prescription data in a sharable state in a preset storage device.
  • the inspection support device 100 can acquire the prescription data from the storage device of the reception system 300.
  • the prescription data may be actively transmitted from the receipt system 300 to the inspection support device 100.
  • the prescription data acquired from the reception system 300 is, for example, a text file format defined by NSIPS specifications.
  • the inspection support device 100 includes a control unit 10, a display unit 20, an operation unit 30, a storage unit 40, a weighing device 50, an information reading unit 60, and a photographing unit 70.
  • the inspection support device 100 is used to support the work of a medical worker such as a pharmacist who performs a final inspection of a medicine dispensed based on the prescription data in a medical institution such as a hospital, a health facility, or a pharmacy.
  • the weighing device 50, the information reading unit 60, and the photographing unit 70 are communicably connected to the control unit 10 in accordance with a communication standard such as USB, RS232C, or Bluetooth (registered trademark).
  • the inspection support device 100 includes a tablet terminal 80 including the control unit 10, the display unit 20, the operation unit 30, and the storage unit 40. Thereby, size reduction of the said inspection assistance apparatus 100 can be achieved.
  • a configuration in which the inspection support device 100 includes the control unit 10, the display unit 20, the operation unit 30, and the storage unit 40 individually is also conceivable as another embodiment.
  • the inspection support device 100 is connected to a commercial AC power source by a power cord (not shown) and is operated by electric power supplied from the commercial AC power source.
  • the tablet terminal 80 has a built-in secondary battery and is charged by the commercial AC power source. Therefore, even when the commercial AC power is cut off, the tablet terminal 80 can be operated for a certain period of time by the secondary battery, and for example, data backup at the time of a power failure is possible.
  • the control unit 10 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an EEPROM (registered trademark), and the like.
  • the CPU is a processor that executes various arithmetic processes according to various control programs.
  • the ROM is a non-volatile memory in which programs such as BIOS executed by the CPU are stored in advance.
  • the RAM and the EEPROM are a volatile memory and a non-volatile memory used for development of various control programs and temporary storage of data by the CPU.
  • the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 are user interfaces that are controlled by the control unit 10 to display information to the user and receive user operations.
  • the display unit 20 includes a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display
  • the operation unit 30 includes a touch panel disposed on the display unit 20.
  • the control unit 10 displays various operation keys on the display unit 20, and detects the operation of the operation keys with the touch panel included in the operation unit 30. Accept the operation.
  • the operation unit 30 may include a mouse or a keyboard.
  • the operation unit 30 may include a voice operation input unit that receives input of various types of information by voice recognition.
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 includes a cover member 90 that can be opened and closed with respect to the inspection support apparatus 100 as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3. Specifically, the cover member 90 can be opened and closed with respect to the inspection support device 100 by being rotatably supported by a rotation support portion 91 at one end of the weighing device 50.
  • the tablet terminal 80 is disposed on the cover member 90.
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 is downsized by arranging the tablet terminal 80 on the cover member 90.
  • the tablet terminal 80 is supported by the cover member 90 such that the display surface of the display unit 20 is exposed to the inner surface side of the cover member 90.
  • the tablet terminal 80 is configured such that when the cover member 90 shown in FIG. 3 is closed, the display surface of the display unit 20 faces the weighing units 51 to 54 described later provided in the weighing device 50. It is supported by the cover member 90.
  • the cover member 90 when the cover member 90 is opened, the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 are in a state of facing the weighing units 51 to 54 of the weighing device 50. . Therefore, the user can perform the inspection work without moving the line of sight in a state where the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 and the weighing units 51 to 54 of the weighing device 50 can be looked over at a time.
  • the storage unit 40 is a storage device such as a solid state drive or a flash memory in which various application programs executed by the control unit 10 and various data are stored.
  • the storage unit 40 may be a hard disk drive externally connected to the control unit 10.
  • the storage unit 40 stores the prescription data acquired from the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300 by the control unit 10.
  • the control unit 10 refers to a shared folder in a storage device such as the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300 at a predetermined timing, and there is unacquired prescription data in the shared folder. Get the prescription data.
  • the storage unit 40 stores various databases such as a pharmaceutical master and a patient master.
  • the medicine master and the patient master can be updated by interlocking with the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300.
  • the medicine master includes medicine code, standard amount, host code, medicine name, medicine general name, JAN code, RSS code, YJ code (individual medicine code), GS1 code, medicine bottle code, dosage form code (powder, tablet) , Liquid medicine, topical medicine, etc.), form code, powerful medicine / managed medicine type (psychotropic drug, narcotic), management (vehicle height, safe, cold place, etc.), and unit (dispensing unit).
  • the pharmaceutical master includes a weight per unit amount (single), a weight per PTP sheet, a weight with ears for one upper PTP tablet, a weight without ears for one upper PTP tablet, Information such as the number per PTP sheet and the file name of a medicine image (naked drug, packaged product) is also included.
  • the PTP sheet is a packaging material in which a plurality of tablets or a plurality of capsules are individually accommodated. In this embodiment, a PTP sheet will be described as an example. For example, a heat seal in which a predetermined amount of tablets or powders are stored in advance is an example of a packaging material.
  • the patient master includes information such as the patient code, patient name, date of birth, and sex of each patient.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a master maintenance screen D13 for referring to or editing the medicine master.
  • the control unit 10 can display the master maintenance screen D13 on the display unit 20 according to a user operation.
  • FIG. 14 shows a state where the drug master is displayed on the master maintenance screen D13.
  • the control unit 10 can change the contents of the pharmaceutical master, the patient master, and the like according to a user operation.
  • the control unit 10 is based on a user ID, a password, and the like input using the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 when the inspection support apparatus 100 is turned on or returned from the power saving mode.
  • the user of the inspection support apparatus 100 can be specified by executing user authentication.
  • the control unit 10 can set a use authority for each user in advance according to a user operation or the like.
  • authority types such as “general”, “manager”, “maintenance manager”, “support”, “training”, and “technician” for each user.
  • the said control part 10 changes the process which can be performed with the said inspection assistance apparatus 100 according to the said authority kind corresponding to the user specified as the said user.
  • master maintenance for editing the pharmaceutical product master, daily update operation, inspection history inquiry operation, etc. can be executed only by “General”, “Administrator”, or “Maintenance Manager” among the above authority types It is.
  • software setting, hardware setting, mother master periodic update, and the like can be executed only by “manager” or “maintenance manager” of the authority types.
  • the mother master is a drug database provided by, for example, the manufacturer of the inspection support apparatus 100. It is also conceivable that only a part of each process can be executed depending on the authority type. For example, regarding the setting of the hardware, it is conceivable that the “manager” of the authority types is set to use only balance calibration. A configuration is also conceivable in which the control unit 10 can set a process that can be executed for each user, not for each authority type.
  • the storage unit 40 stores an inspection support program executed by the control unit 10.
  • the inspection support program is downloaded via the network N1, for example, or read from a recording medium by a disk drive and installed in the storage unit 40.
  • the said control part 10 performs various processes according to the said inspection assistance program,
  • part or all of the control unit 10 may be an electronic circuit such as an ASIC.
  • movement of each process part which the said control part 10 has is demonstrated with a flowchart of a back
  • the weighing device 50 includes four weighing units 51 to 54 and is used for weighing the weight of the medicine. The results of weighing by the weighing units 51 to 54 are input to the control unit 10.
  • the unspecified weighing units 51 to 54 may be referred to as “the weighing unit 5N”.
  • the weighing device 50 will be described by taking as an example a configuration including four weighing units 51 to 54. However, the weighing device 50 may include at least two weighing units. That's fine.
  • the weighing unit 5 ⁇ / b> N includes a weighing pan 55, a load cell 56, and a placement unit 57.
  • 4 is a view showing a state in which the weighing pan 55 has been removed
  • FIG. 5 is a view showing a state in which the weighing pan 55, the placing portion 57, and the upper surface 501 of the weighing apparatus 50 have been removed. .
  • the weighing pan 55 is used by being placed on the placement portion 57, and the weighing target chemical is placed on the weighing pan 55.
  • each of the weighing dishes 55 has a different radius of roundness between a corner portion 551 on one diagonal line and a corner portion 552 on the other diagonal line.
  • the pair of corner portions 551 have a smaller radius than the corner portions 552.
  • one corner portion 551 is gripped when the weighing pan 55 is lifted by a user, and the other corner portion 551 is held.
  • 551 is inserted into the medicine bag when the medicine on the weighing pan 55 is stored in the medicine bag.
  • the weighing pan 55 may have a configuration in which the corner portion 551 and the corner portion 552 are rounded with the same radius.
  • an anti-slip member for increasing the frictional resistance between the bottom surface of the weighing pan 55 and the top surface of the mounting portion 57 on one or both of the bottom surface of the weighing pan 55 and the top surface of the mounting portion 57.
  • the anti-slip member is provided on a part or all of the upper surface of the mounting unit 57.
  • the anti-slip member is an adhesive sheet.
  • the weighing pan 55 and the placing portion 57 are temporarily fixed by the anti-slip member, and the shaking of the weighing pan 55 is further suppressed.
  • the weighing by the weighing portion 5N is not stable. Is avoided.
  • the anti-slip member may be provided on a later-described platter 58.
  • the load cell 56 is a load converter that supports the placing portion 57 and measures the weight of the weighing object placed on the placing portion 57.
  • the weight of the medicine placed on the weighing dish 55 is weighed by the load cell 56 by placing the weighing dish 55 on the placement unit 57.
  • the load cell 56 for example, a load cell having a small rated capacity of 300 g or 500 g and high weighing accuracy is used.
  • the weighing pan 55 and the placing portion 57 are integrally configured.
  • the placing portion 57 is supported by the load cell 56, and the weighing pan 55 is placed on the upper surface.
  • a concave portion for stably placing the bottom surface of the weighing pan 55 is formed on the upper surface of the placing portion 57 described above.
  • the load cell 56 and the mounting portion 57 are connected below the upper surface 501 of the weighing device 50, and a large-sized opening corresponding to the mounting portion 57 is formed in the upper surface 501. .
  • a wide gap is generated between the upper surface 501 and the mounting portion 57, and there is a problem that dust or the like easily enters from the gap.
  • the load cell 56 and the mounting portion 57 are connected above the upper surface 501, and a small opening corresponding to the connection location is formed on the upper surface 501. .
  • a structure in which dust or the like is difficult to enter from the opening of the upper surface 501 is realized.
  • the results of weighing by the load cell 56 include the weights of the weighing pan 55 and the placing portion 57 described above. Therefore, the control unit 10 performs taring at the time of weighing using the load cell 56, and subtracts the tare weights of the weighing pan 55 and the placement unit 57 from the weighing result of the load cell 56 to determine the weighing. Obtained as a result of weighing the chemicals placed on the plate 55.
  • the tare weight is initially set when the inspection support apparatus 100 is shipped, but the inspection support apparatus 100 can reset the tare weight at an arbitrary timing. As described above, when the anti-slip member is provided on one or both of the weighing pan 55 and the mounting portion 57, the weight of the anti-slip member is also included in the tare weight.
  • the weighing of the medicine is performed using a large plate 58 (an example of an extended placement unit) that is larger than the weighing plate 55 instead of the plurality of the weighing plates 55.
  • the platter 58 can be placed across the plurality of weighing units 51 to 54.
  • a convex portion 581 is provided on the bottom surface of the platter 58 at a position corresponding to the placement portion 57 of the plurality of weighing portions 51 to 54.
  • the convex portions 581 of the platter 58 are arranged in front of the plurality of weighing portions 51 to 54 as shown in FIG.
  • the weighing device 50 can weigh up to a total of 2.0 kg by using the platter 58.
  • the platter 58 is not limited to the usage form in which the platters 58 are placed on the placing units 57 of the weighing units 51 to 54 in place of the plurality of weighing pans 55, and the plurality of weighing pans 55 are described above. It is also conceivable that the plurality of weighing pans 55 are placed on the placing portion 57 while being placed on the placing portion 57. Thereby, since the user does not need to attach and detach each weighing pan 55, the convenience is improved.
  • the convex portion 581 of the platter 58, the mounting portion 57, and the weighing pan 55 are placed on the mounting portion 57 of the four weighing portions 51 to 54 or the weighing pan 55. It has a shape that is stable in the applied state.
  • a cross portion 582 indicating the center position of the platter 58 is formed in the platter 58. Accordingly, the cross portion 582 serves as an index for setting the medicine in the center of the platter 58, and can prompt the user to set the medicine in the center of the platter 58. Further, when no medicine is placed in the center of the platter 58, the load acting on the weighing units 51 to 54 from the platter 58 is biased, and only the weighing value of any of the weighing units 51 to 54 is obtained. It is possible to exceed the rated capacity. For example, when the rated capacity of each of the weighing units 51 to 54 is 200 g, and when 500 g of medicine is placed on the platter 58, one or more weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 are used.
  • the control unit 10 determines that the difference between the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 exceeds a predetermined range, that is, the load is applied evenly. If not, it is possible to display a caution message such as “Please bring it to the center”.
  • the cross portion 582 serves as an index for setting the platter 58 at the center of the weighing units 51 to 54 so that a load is applied to the weighing units 51 to 54 evenly. It is also conceivable that it can be easily set at the center of the weighing parts 51 to 54. For example, it is conceivable that an index part for determining the center positions of the weighing parts 51 to 54 is formed on the upper surface 501, and in this case, referring to the cross part 582 and the index part. However, it becomes easier to set the platter 58 at the center of the weighing parts 51 to 54.
  • a concave portion 583 is formed on the inner wall surface of the platter 58 to indicate a vertical center position and a horizontal center position of the platter 58 in plan view.
  • the control unit 10 determines the center position of the platter 58 based on the position and shape of the cross portion 582 or the concave portion 583 included in the photographed image. Can be detected. For example, the control unit 10 may display a warning on the display unit 20 when the center position of the platter 58 is out of a predetermined range.
  • the information reading unit 60 can read identification information such as a one-dimensional code such as a barcode (JAN, GS1) or a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark). It is a barcode reader that is input to the control unit 10.
  • identification information such as a one-dimensional code such as a barcode (JAN, GS1) or a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark). It is a barcode reader that is input to the control unit 10.
  • the information reading unit 60 is used when reading identification information (hereinafter referred to as “prescription identification information”) written on a medicine bag in order to identify prescription data.
  • the prescription identification information is printed on the medicine bag by the dispensing support system 200.
  • a prescription number for identifying the prescription data and prescription data hereinafter referred to as Rp data
  • Rp data a prescription number for identifying the prescription data and prescription data
  • the prescription identification information may be other information such as order information as long as the prescription data and the Rp data can be identified.
  • the information reading unit 60 is also used to read identification information (hereinafter referred to as “medicine identification information”) written on a packaging material of medicine such as wrapping paper or PTP sheet in order to identify the medicine. It is done.
  • the medicine identification information is, for example, a JAN code, RSS code, YJ code, or GS1 code.
  • the said control part 10 can acquire the prescription data corresponding to the said prescription identification information from the said memory
  • the said control part 10 specifies the kind of chemical
  • the control unit 10 can select any one of the medicines registered in advance in the medicine master in accordance with a medicine selection operation in a prescription display area A15 (see FIG. 8) described later by the operator. It is.
  • the photographing unit 70 includes a camera body 710 and a holding member 720 that holds the camera body 710.
  • the camera body 710 is a digital camera used for taking a still image or a moving image of a subject.
  • an image is taken by the photographing unit 70 in accordance with a control instruction from the control unit 10, and a photographed image is transmitted from the photographing unit 70 to the control unit 10.
  • moving image information of the shooting range captured by the shooting unit 70 is input to the control unit 10 and a still image is acquired from the moving image information by the control unit 10.
  • the control unit 10 can determine the situation within the shooting range of the shooting unit 70 at any time based on the moving image information.
  • the photographing unit 70 is arranged at a position and orientation in which the weighing units 51 to 54 of the weighing device 50 and the display unit 20 can be photographed simultaneously.
  • the camera body 710 is held by the holding member 720 by holding the connecting portion 711 provided in the camera body 710 by the holding member 720.
  • the holding member 720 holds the camera body 710 in a state where the shooting range by the camera body 710 can be adjusted within a predetermined range (for example, about 1 mm).
  • the holding member 720 includes a swing mechanism that can swing a holding portion that holds the connecting portion 711 of the camera main body 710 within a range of a predetermined width.
  • the inspection support device 100 it is possible to easily adjust the photographing range photographed by the photographing unit 70 by finely adjusting the direction of the camera main body 710 held by the holding member 720. It is.
  • the photographing unit 70 only needs to be able to photograph at least the weighing units 51 to 54, and it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the display unit 20 is not included in the photographing range. Further, the photographing unit 70 may be fixed to the cover member 90.
  • the photographing unit 70 is supported by the support arm 71 by fixing the holding member 720 to the support arm 71, and the support arm 71 supports the rotation support unit 72. Via the support arm 73, the support arm 73 is rotatably connected. Accordingly, the user can finely adjust the shooting range of the shooting unit 70 by rotating the support arm 71.
  • the support arm 73 is fixed to the weighing device 50. In another embodiment, the support arm 73 is rotatably supported by the weighing device 50 and can be folded compactly by rotating the support arm 73 when the cover member 90 is closed. Conceivable.
  • the inspection support process is started by the control unit 10 when the inspection support apparatus 100 is turned on or returned from the power saving mode.
  • the inspection support process ends when the inspection support apparatus 100 is shut down or when there is no operation for a predetermined time or more and the mode is shifted to the power saving mode.
  • the control unit 10 performs user authentication by inputting a user ID and a password using the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30.
  • the user of the inspection support apparatus 100 is specified.
  • step S11 the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display a predetermined prescription inspection screen D10.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the prescription inspection screen D10.
  • the prescription inspection screen D10 includes an unprocessed information key K11, a wrapping paper selection key K12, a visual inspection key K13, a platter use key K14, a tare key K15, a menu key K16, and an inspection completion key. Operation keys such as K17, shooting key K18, and image display key K19 are displayed.
  • the prescription inspection screen D10 displays weighing display areas A11 to A14 and a prescription display area A15.
  • the name of the user authenticated by the user authentication is also displayed as the authenticator. Further, the control unit 10 displays an authentication screen for performing the user authentication again when, for example, the vicinity of the user's name is operated, and the certifier is selected according to the subsequent input of the user ID and password. It is possible to switch.
  • the unprocessed information key K11 is an operation key for displaying a list of unprocessed prescription data for which inspection has not been completed on the prescription inspection screen D10.
  • the control unit 10 displays an unprocessed display area A21 in which a list of unprocessed prescription data is displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 as shown in FIG.
  • information such as a prescription date, a patient name, the total number of Rp, and a voucher number is displayed as a list as information for identifying unprocessed prescription data.
  • a search operation area A22 and a detail display key K21 are displayed.
  • the control unit 10 searches the prescription data according to the item selected in the search operation area A22 and the input characters input in the search operation area A22, and displays the search results.
  • FIG. 9 shows a display example when the item “date” is selected in the search operation area A22 and the character “20131130” is input.
  • a list of prescription data whose date is November 30, 2013 is displayed as a search result.
  • the control unit 10 displays detailed information on the prescription data at the location where the detail display key K21 is displayed.
  • the detailed information includes, for example, each content of Rp data of one or more same usage units included in the prescription data (medicine name, usage, daily dose, etc.).
  • Each of the Rp data includes information on one or more types of prescription drugs that have the same usage and are contained in the same medicine bag.
  • the packaging paper selection key K ⁇ b> 12 does not include preset specific information.
  • an operation key for designating the type of the wrapping paper used when weighing the wrapping paper For example, there are 10 types of wrapping paper such as 60 mm, 70 mm, 76 mm, 80 mm, and 90 mm for each cellopoly and glassine.
  • the control unit 10 displays a plurality of pre-registered wrapping papers as selection candidates according to the operation of the wrapping paper selection key K12, and presets corresponding to the wrapping paper selected from among them. The weight thus determined is set as the weight of the wrapping paper used in the weighing inspection process described later.
  • the specific information is, for example, in a dispensing device such as a tablet packaging machine or a powder medicine packaging machine in which a packaging process using the packaging paper is performed, and the weight of the packaging paper is known, and the medicine identification information Is information for determining whether or not the weight of the wrapping paper is included in the weight per wrapping paper included in or the total weight of all the wrapping papers.
  • the specific information is information for specifying a manufacturer of the tablet packing machine or the powder packing machine.
  • the visual inspection key K13 is an operation key for executing a visual inspection process on the prescription data displayed in the prescription display area A15.
  • the control unit 10 is selected in the prescription display area A15 as shown in FIG.
  • a visual inspection screen D ⁇ b> 11 for performing visual inspection for each of the medicines being displayed is displayed on the display unit 20.
  • the visual inspection screen D11 displays a medicine information display area A31, a medicine image display area A32, a target value display area A33, and an inspection time input area A34 corresponding to each medicine. Yes.
  • the control unit 10 reads the medicine name of the medicine to be visually inspected selected on the prescription display screen D10 from the prescription data or Rp data and displays it in the medicine information display area 31. Moreover, the said control part 10 reads the chemical
  • the units such as “lock”, “g”, “pack”, “capsule” and the like displayed in the inspection input area A34 are units set in advance for each medicine in the pharmaceutical master.
  • the said control part 10 is the said visual inspection object according to the left and right flick operation in the said visual inspection screen D11, or operation of an arrow key. Scroll the medicine display.
  • the control unit 10 processes that the visual inspection of the visual inspection target medicine being displayed on the visual inspection screen D11 is completed, and It memorize
  • the visual inspection process information such as the drug name, drug image, and target value of the drug to be visually inspected is displayed on the visual inspection screen D11. Therefore, the user refers to the visual inspection screen D11. Visual inspection of the visual inspection target chemical can be easily performed.
  • the platter use key K ⁇ b> 14 is an operation key for executing the weighing inspection process using the platter 58.
  • the control unit 10 displays one weighing display area A41 on the prescription inspection screen D10 instead of the weighing display areas A11 to A14 as shown in FIG. .
  • the control unit 10 may gray out or hide the weighing display areas A11 to A14.
  • the total of all weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 is displayed as a weighing result.
  • a matching result between the weighing result when the platter 58 is used and the prescription data is displayed in the weighing inspection process described later. Accordingly, the inspection support apparatus 100 can execute the weighing inspection using the platter 58 even with a large amount of medicine that is difficult to weigh in each of the weighing dishes 55 or a medicine with a large size.
  • the tare key K15 is used for a taring process start operation for updating the set value of the tare weight of the tare weight corresponding to each of the weighing units 51 to 54 in the weighing device 50.
  • the control unit 10 sets the current weighing value of each of the weighing units 51 to 54 as the tare weight of each of the weighing units 51 to 54. Therefore, the control unit 10 can weigh the chemical placed on the weighing pan 58 by subtracting the tare weight from the weighing value weighed by the weighing units 51 to 54.
  • the tare weight key K15 is operated to set the tare weight corresponding to the weighing pan 55.
  • the menu key K16 is an operation key for displaying a menu of various functions of the inspection support apparatus 100.
  • the control unit 10 displays a menu screen for performing operations such as initial setting, master registration, environment setting, software version update, or history inquiry according to the operation of the menu key K16.
  • the inspection completion key K17 executes a visual inspection process or a weighing inspection process, which will be described later, for a drug whose inspection has not been completed among the Rp data currently displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 in the inspection support apparatus 100. It is operated when the inspection is completed without any problem.
  • the control unit 10 completes the inspection of medicines that have not been inspected among the Rp data currently displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10, and records the history thereof as described above. After memorize
  • the inspection service is completed by operating the inspection completion key K17 to complete the inspection of the displayed Rp data. It is possible to speed up the process.
  • the control unit 10 may display an inspection completion screen indicating that the inspection is completed on the display unit 20. Conceivable.
  • a predetermined first color check mark is attached to the weighed and inspected medicine inspected in the later-described weighing inspection process in the Rp data, and the visual inspection performed in the later-described visual inspection process.
  • the inspected medicine is given a predetermined second color check mark different from the first color.
  • the uninspected medicine which is not inspected by the said weighing inspection process or the said visual inspection process among the said Rp data in the aspect (for example, there is no check mark) which can be distinguished from the said weighing inspection medicine and the said visual inspection medicine. Is displayed. In the inspection completion screen, it is only necessary to distinguish the medicines weighed, the visual inspections, and the uninspected medicines on the inspection completion screen. For example, each background color may be different. .
  • the photographing key K18 is an operation key for recording a photographed image by the photographing unit 70.
  • the control unit 10 causes the photographing unit 70 to take an image in response to an operation of the photographing key K18. Then, the control unit 10 records the captured image in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history in association with the prescription data to which the Rp data currently displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 belongs. Thereby, the said control part 10 can display the said picked-up image memorize
  • the control unit 10 associates the captured image with each Rp data and stores it in the storage unit 40.
  • the prescription, the medicine bag, and the medicine corresponding to the prescription data that is the object of the inspection are obtained by the user.
  • the photographing key K18 is operated after being placed within the photographing range of the photographing unit 70 such as the upper surface 501 of 50. Accordingly, the prescription, the medicine bag, and the medicine are photographed by the photographing unit 70, and the photographed image is recorded in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history in association with the prescription data.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an inspection history inquiry screen D12 for referring to the inspection history in the inspection support device 100.
  • an extraction condition display area A51 in which conditions for extracting the inspection history stored in the storage unit 40 can be input
  • a list display area A52 for displaying extraction results
  • the list display A history content display area A53 is displayed in which the contents of the inspection history selected in the area A52 are displayed.
  • the extraction condition display area A51 it is possible to input an inspection period (inspection date / time), a prescription date, a patient name, a medicine name, a pharmacist name, and whether or not yellow is determined.
  • the said control part 10 reads the inspection log
  • the target column displays target values (values of tablets, capsules, sheets, etc.) corresponding to the prescription data, and the inspection column is weighed by the inspection support apparatus 100.
  • a converted value (value of tablets, capsules, sheets, etc.) obtained by converting the measured weight value of the medicine into the unit of medicine is displayed.
  • the word “visually” is displayed in the inspection column of the medicines that have been inspected by the visual inspection process described below among the prescription medicines.
  • thumbnail images of images taken by the photographing unit 70 stored in the storage unit 40 as the inspection history of the prescription data selected in the list display area A52 are displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10. Similarly, it is displayed as the image display key K19.
  • a thumbnail image of the photographed image is also displayed as the image display key K19.
  • the control unit 10 enlarges and displays the photographed image corresponding to the image display key K19 on the inspection history inquiry screen D12.
  • the image display key K19 is a thumbnail image of a photographed image by the photographing unit 70 stored in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history of the prescription data displayed in the prescription display area A15. . 8 and 12, “Image 1” to “Image 4” are displayed as the thumbnail image names under the image display key K19, but “Rp number” and “Continuous” are displayed as the thumbnail image names. It is also conceivable that “No.” is used. For example, when the Rp number is “01”, the name of the first image is “01-1”, and the name of the second image is “01-2”. Further, the control unit 10 enlarges and displays the thumbnail image corresponding to the image display key K19 in accordance with the operation of the image display key K19.
  • the weighing display areas A11 to A14 are display areas corresponding to the weighing parts 51 to 54, respectively, and the weighing results by the weighing parts 51 to 54 are displayed in the weighing display areas A11 to A14.
  • the weighing display areas A11 to A14 are displayed on the display unit 20 in the same arrangement as the weighing units 51 to 54.
  • the weighing display area A11 corresponding to the weighing section 51 is arranged at the upper left as in the weighing section 51
  • the weighing display area A12 corresponding to the weighing section 52 is arranged at the upper right as in the weighing section 52. Has been.
  • the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display the weighing display areas A11 to A14 corresponding to the weighing units 51 to 54 in the same arrangement as the weighing units 51 to 54, respectively.
  • Such display processing is executed by the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10.
  • the unspecified weighing display areas A11 to A14 may be referred to as “weighing display areas A1M”.
  • the prescription display area A15 is a display area in which a list of medicine names and medicine images of prescription medicines included in Rp data to be displayed is displayed together with a patient name and a patient code. For a medicine whose medicine image is not registered in the medicine master, a character “no image” is displayed instead of the medicine image.
  • prescription medicines included in the Rp data can be selected as inspection targets, and one or a plurality of selected prescription medicines are selected with a check mark.
  • the prescription drug corresponding to the drug identification information is added with a check mark and selected as an inspection target.
  • the medicines that have already been inspected by the visual inspection process described later are displayed in a color different from other medicines.
  • Step S12 to S13 the control unit 10 determines whether or not an operation for specifying prescription data to be inspected in the inspection support apparatus 100 has been executed. Specifically, in step S12, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the information reading unit 60 has read the prescription identification information described in the medicine bag. Moreover, in the said step S13, the said control part 10 judges whether operation which selects prescription data from an unprocessed list was performed. And the said control part 10 will transfer a process to step S14, if the said prescription data are specified (S12 or S13: Yes side).
  • step S14 the control unit 10 reads the prescription data specified in step S12 or step S13. Specifically, when the prescription identification information is read from the medicine bag in step S12, the control unit 10 reads the Rp data corresponding to the prescription identification information from the storage unit 40. That is, the control unit 10 can acquire the prescription data to be inspected based on the prescription identification information of the medicine bag read by the information reading unit 60. This processing is executed by the verification processing unit 14 of the control unit 10. In addition, the said control part 10 specifies the Rp data as inspection object, when Rp data is selected in the said detailed information displayed according to operation of the said detailed display key K21 of the said unprocessed display area A21. It is also possible.
  • control unit 10 When unprocessed prescription data is selected in step S13, the control unit 10 reads the selected prescription data from the storage unit 40. That is, the control unit 10 can select the prescription data to be inspected from a plurality of the prescription data in accordance with a user operation. This processing is executed by the verification processing unit 14 of the control unit 10.
  • FIG. 8 is a display example of the prescription inspection screen D10 when unprocessed prescription data is selected in step S13.
  • the Rp data to be inspected is not specified even when the prescription data includes a plurality of Rp data. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8, in the prescription display area A15, among the Rp data included in the prescription data, the designated RpNo. “1/3” is displayed.
  • the designated RpNo. “1/3” indicates that the prescription data includes three Rp data, and the first Rp data is currently displayed. Then, the control unit 10 performs the designation RpNo. By the operation of “+” and “ ⁇ ” displayed in the prescription display area A15 or the direct input operation of the numerical value. And change the designated RpNo. Rp data corresponding to is displayed in the prescription display area A15. Further, the control unit 10 corresponds to the medicine identification information from the prescription data displayed in the prescription display area A15 when the medicine identification information is read from the medicine packaging material by the information reading unit 60. Rp data including the medicine to be searched is retrieved, and the Rp data is displayed in the prescription display area A15.
  • the Rp data to be inspected can be specified by the prescription identification information. Therefore, when the prescription identification information is read from the medicine bag in step S12, Rp data corresponding to the prescription identification information is displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10, and the designated RpNo. The display of is omitted.
  • step S15 when the control unit 10 has a visual inspection setting medicine set in advance as a medicine to be inspected by visual inspection processing in the prescription data or the Rp data (S15: Yes side), The process proceeds to step S151, and a visual inspection process described later is executed.
  • medical agent is specified as a visual inspection object chemical
  • the visual inspection setting medicine is, for example, a medicine in which a barcode is not attached to a medicine packaging material, or a medicine in which water and kneaded materials are mixed and dispensed.
  • step S15 when the chemical
  • step S16 when an operation for starting visual inspection is performed (S16: Yes side), the control unit 10 must move the process to step S151 and perform an operation for starting visual inspection. If it is (S16: No side), the process proceeds to step S17. Specifically, the control unit 10 starts the visual inspection when the visual inspection key K13 is operated in a state where one or more prescription medicines displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 are selected. It is determined that an operation has been performed. In this case, one or a plurality of prescription medicines selected on the prescription inspection screen D10 are specified as visual inspection target medicines.
  • step S17 when the medicine identification information is read from the wrapping paper that is a medicine packaging material (S17: Yes side), the control unit 10 shifts the process to step S171 and performs a visual inspection process described later. Execute. For example, the medicine identification information corresponding to the medicine packaged by the packaging paper is recorded on the packaging paper by a code such as a QR code (registered trademark). Moreover, the said control part 10 makes a process transfer to step S18, when the said chemical
  • Step S18 when the medicine identification information is read from the PTP sheet which is a medicine packaging material (S18: Yes side), the control unit 10 sets the prescription medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information as a weighing inspection target medicine. The process is shifted to step S19, and a weighing inspection process described later is executed. Moreover, the said control part 10 returns a process to the said step S16, when the said chemical
  • the control unit 10 may shift the process to step S151 as another embodiment.
  • the control unit 10 selects only one medicine displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 and is predetermined.
  • the weighing inspection processing start operation is performed, it is also possible to shift the processing to step S19 and execute the weighing inspection processing for the medicine.
  • the operation for starting the weighing inspection process is an operation of long-pressing the display area of the medicine or an operation of a weighing inspection key (not shown) displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10.
  • the process returns to step S16.
  • the target drug for which the weighing inspection processing start operation is arbitrarily performed includes, for example, a drug in which the drug identification information is not attached to a packaging material, a drug in which a plurality of sheets are in one package, and a tablet component. This is medicine after packaging that is packaged by a packaging machine.
  • step S151 or step S171 the control unit 10 executes a visual inspection process that supports a task for a user to visually confirm a medicine image for the visual inspection target medicine.
  • the visual inspection processing is executed by the visual inspection processing unit 15 of the control unit 10.
  • the control unit 10 first displays the visual inspection screen D11 (see FIG. 10) on the display unit 20.
  • the control unit 10 causes the visual inspection screen D11 to display one or a plurality of prescription drugs specified in the steps S15 to S17 as the visual inspection target chemicals.
  • the control unit 10 includes one or a plurality of pieces stored in the wrapping paper based on the medicine identification information.
  • a medicine is specified as the medicine to be visually inspected.
  • the said control part 10 reads the chemical
  • the control unit 10 processes that the visual inspection of the visual inspection target drug being displayed on the visual inspection screen D11 is completed, It memorize
  • the control unit 10 may automatically delete the visual inspection screen D11 by determining that the visual inspection has ended when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the visual inspection screen D11. It is done. Furthermore, after the said control part 10 displays the said visual inspection screen D11, it is also considered that the enlarged screen of each said medicine image is automatically popped up in order, and it erase
  • the control unit 10 reads the medicine identification information from the PTP sheet by the information reading unit 60 during the display of the visual inspection screen D11, among the medicines displayed on the visual inspection screen D11 Regarding the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information, it may be possible to store in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history that the collation by the medicine identification information has been performed.
  • the storage unit 40 stores in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history that the collation by the medicine identification information has been performed.
  • the GS1 code or the like is read from the PTP sheet after the wrapping.
  • the labor of visual inspection for at least some of the medicines packaged with the wrapping paper is reduced.
  • the result of the verification process of the medicine identification information in the visual inspection is reflected in the result of “bar code confirmation” in the history display area A53 in FIG.
  • step S17 When the medicine identification information on the wrapping paper is read in step S17, in the visual inspection process, the user performs inspection with reference to the medicine in the wrapping paper and the visual inspection screen D11. There is a need.
  • the medicine identification information printed on the wrapping paper in a dispensing device such as the tablet wrapping machine or the powder wrapping machine
  • the medicine names and dosage forms of all the medicines contained in the wrapping paper It is conceivable that packaging information regarding contents such as dispensing amount (weight or quantity) and patient information is included.
  • the control unit 10 collates the packaging information included in the medicine identification information with the prescription data, and the collation result If they match, it is conceivable that the inspection of each medicine contained in the wrapping paper is completed without executing the visual inspection process and the weighing inspection process. Thereby, the labor of the visual inspection about the chemical
  • step S172 the control unit 10 determines whether or not the weighing inspection setting is set to ON. If the weighing inspection setting is set to ON (S172: Yes) Side), the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, when the weighing inspection setting is set to OFF (S172: No side), the control unit 10 shifts the process to step S20.
  • the weighing inspection setting is a setting relating to whether or not the weighing inspection processing using the weighing device 50 is executed together with the visual inspection processing when the medicine identification information is read from the wrapping paper in the step S17.
  • the control unit 10 can arbitrarily change the contents of the weighing inspection setting according to a user operation at the time of setting the environment of the inspection support device 100.
  • the control unit 10 may switch whether or not to execute the weighing inspection process according to a subsequent user operation. . Furthermore, it is considered that the weighing inspection setting is effective not only when the medicine identification information is read from the wrapping paper but also for a medicine that is predetermined as a medicine that can be weighed by the inspection support device 100. It is done.
  • step S19 the said control part 10 performs the weighing
  • This process is an example of a collation step, and is executed by the collation processing unit 14.
  • step S19 the control unit 10 starts the new weighing inspection process corresponding to the medicine identification information, and then shifts the process to step S20. That is, the control unit 10 individually starts the weighing inspection process corresponding to the medicine identification information every time the medicine identification information is read in step S18.
  • the medicine identification information of the wrapping paper includes the weight of one wrap including the weight of the wrapping paper or the total weight of all the wrapping paper
  • the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N is included in one package including the weight of the wrapping paper included in the medicine identification information. It is conceivable to check against the weight of the minute or the total weight of all the wrapping papers.
  • the dispensing data or the packaging data at the time of dispensing executed based on the prescription data as described above is also an example of the prescription data.
  • the control unit 10 When the medicine identification information of the wrapping paper does not include the weight of one wrapping paper including the weight of the wrapping paper or the total weight of all the wrapping papers, the control unit 10 The number of wrapping paper selected after the operation of the wrapping paper selection key K12 or the initial setting of the wrapping paper type and the weight corresponding to the number of sachets to be weighed and the wrapping paper for inspection It is conceivable to execute the weighing inspection process by adding to the value. Further, when the medicine identification information of the wrapping paper does not include the weight of one wrap including the weight of the wrapping paper or the total weight of all the wrapping paper, the control unit 10 It is also conceivable to calculate the total weight based on the name of the medicine, YJ code, fraction, etc. packaged in the wrapping paper, and collate the value with the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N.
  • step S20 the control unit 10 determines whether or not the inspection has been completed for all of the prescription drugs included in the Rp data specified in step S12 or the prescription data specified in step S13. Determine whether. Specifically, the control unit 10 determines whether inspection by any of the visual inspection process and the weighing inspection process has been completed for all medicines included in the Rp data or the prescription data. Here, if the said control part 10 judges that the inspection was completed about all the said prescription medicines (S20: Yes side), it will transfer a process to step S21. Moreover, if the said control part 10 judges that the prescription medicine which inspection has not been completed remains (S20: No side), a process will be returned to said step S16.
  • step S21 the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display an inspection completion notification indicating that the inspection of the Rp data or the prescription data has been completed, and returns the process to step S11.
  • This processing is executed by the inspection completion notification unit 16 of the control unit 10.
  • the user can grasp
  • FIG. It is also conceivable that the inspection support device 100 is connected to a printer via the network N1. In this case, it is considered that the control unit 10 can print the inspection record of the Rp data or the prescription data for which the inspection is completed using the printer in the step S21.
  • the inspection record includes, for example, patient information (patient name, patient ID, age, sex, etc.), usage, medicine, inspection result (weighing result, target value, verification result, etc.) and the like.
  • the control unit 10 automatically prints the inspection execution record in the step S21 or prints the inspection execution record in response to a user operation on the screen on which the inspection completion notification is displayed. It is possible. Note that the control unit 10 can also set in advance according to a user operation whether or not to automatically print the inspection execution record. Moreover, it is also conceivable that the control unit 10 can print a medicine bag based on the Rp data or the prescription data using the printer.
  • the said control part 10 displays the inspection completion notice on the said display part 20 whenever inspection about Rp data contained in the said prescription data is completed. Is also possible. As a result, the inspection is performed in units of the Rp data, and it is possible to perform the inspection collectively for each prescription drug to be accommodated in the same medicine bag.
  • step S30 the control unit 10 determines that the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information read from the PTP sheet or the wrapping paper is the prescription data to be inspected displayed in the prescription display area A15 or It is determined whether it is included in the Rp data.
  • the process proceeds to step S31.
  • the control unit 10 proceeds to step S301.
  • the control unit 10 reads the step S30. It is conceivable to determine whether or not a medicine corresponding to medicine identification information is included in the Rp data currently displayed in the prescription display area A15.
  • step S301 the control unit 10 displays an error message on the display unit 20, and then ends the weighing inspection process.
  • the error message includes a warning that the medicine identification information read by the information reading unit 60 does not match the prescription data or the Rp data.
  • step S31 the control unit 10 stores the weight per unit amount of medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information read in step S17 or step S18 (hereinafter referred to as “unit weight”) in the storage unit 40. Obtain from the said pharmaceutical master. This process is executed by the unit weight acquisition unit 12 of the control unit 10.
  • the control unit 10 may acquire a unit weight of the medicine from an external storage device. For example, when the medicine identification information is a tablet, the weight per unit amount of the tablet is read from the medicine master.
  • the control unit 10 sets the background color of the weighing display areas A11 to A14 to a light yellow color determined in advance. It is possible to change. Thereby, the user can perform inspection work paying attention to the fact that the unit weight is small. Moreover, it is possible that the same chemical
  • the top medicine displayed in the prescription display area A15 is specified as the medicine for weighing inspection.
  • the control unit 10 similarly sets the background color of the weighing display areas A11 to A14 when the unit weight acquired in the step S31 is equal to or larger than a preset allowable maximum value. It is conceivable to change the color to a predetermined light yellow color.
  • step S32 the control unit 10 determines whether any of the weighing values of the weighing unit 5N has increased from zero.
  • the control unit 10 determines that the weighing value of any of the weighing units 5N of the weighing units 51 to 54 has increased from 0 (S32: Yes side)
  • the process proceeds to step S33.
  • the control unit 10 determines that the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 have not changed from 0 (S32: No side)
  • the process proceeds to step S35.
  • step S33 the control unit 10 specifies the weighing unit 5N whose weighing value has increased from 0 in step S32 as the weighing unit associated with the medicine identification information identified in step S17 or S18. That is, the control unit 10 specifies one or a plurality of the weighing units 5N whose weighing values have increased from 0 after the reading of the drug identification information by the information reading unit 60 as the weighing units associated with the drug identification information.
  • the specifying process is an example of a weighing specifying step, and is executed by the weighing specifying unit 11 of the control unit 10.
  • the plurality of weighing units 5N Is associated with the medicine identification information that has been read first. Thereby, the user can divide a bundle of the same kind of medicines into a plurality of parts and place them on the weighing unit 5N.
  • the control unit 10 when the control unit 10 includes a weighing unit whose weighing value is increased from a value larger than 0 in the weighing unit 5N (S32: No side).
  • the weighing unit is not specified as the weighing unit associated with the medicine identification information. Accordingly, the control unit 10 determines whether the weighing by the weighing unit 5N to be associated with the previously read medicine identification information and the weighing by the weighing unit 5N to be associated with the next medicine identification information read. Even when proceeding simultaneously, it is possible to distinguish these weighing parts 5N and associate them with the medicine identification information.
  • the control unit 10 determines the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the medicine identification information in a later-described step S35 or S36. If the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N returns to 0 in the meantime, the association between the weighing unit 5N and the medicine identification information is canceled. In this case, the control unit 10 also resets the display in the weighing display area A1M corresponding to the weighing unit 5N.
  • step S34 the control unit 10 starts displaying the chemical amount according to the weighing value by the weighing unit 5N specified in step S33. Specifically, the control unit 10 converts the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N into a predetermined unit and displays it in the weighing display area A1M corresponding to the weighing unit 5N. Thereafter, the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is continuously updated and displayed in the weighing display area A1M. The real-time update of the weighing result display is executed until the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is stably determined.
  • the process of converting the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N into a predetermined unit based on the unit weight acquired in the step S31 is executed by the unit conversion processing unit 13 of the control unit 10. . Further, the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10 executes a process of displaying the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N converted into a predetermined unit in the weighing display area A1M.
  • the unit of the drug after conversion of the weighing result (tablet, capsule, package, sheet, g, etc.) is the same as the unit of drug (tablet, capsule, package, sheet, g, etc.) used in the prescription data, for example. It is.
  • the weighing unit 5N includes a weighing control unit that inputs a weighing value to be weighed using the load cell 56 to the control unit 10.
  • the weighing control unit is a control unit such as ASIC or MPU.
  • the weighing control unit changes the number of digits of the decimal point of the weighing value input to the control unit 10 as the weighing result of the load cell 56 of the weighing unit 5N according to the control instruction from the control unit 10. Can be considered.
  • the weighing control unit is configured to input a weighing value to the control unit 10 with accuracy up to the first decimal point in accordance with a control instruction from the control unit 10, and to the second decimal point. It is conceivable that the second range mode in which the weighing value is input to the control unit 10 with high accuracy can be switched and executed.
  • the control unit 10 can switch the operation mode of the weighing control unit to the first range mode or the second range mode depending on the situation.
  • the control unit 10 normally obtains a weighing value with accuracy from the weighing unit 5N to the second decimal place by operating the weighing control unit of the weighing unit 5N in the second range mode.
  • the usage environment of the inspection support apparatus 100 for example, an environment in which the value of the second decimal place of the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is difficult to be stabilized due to the influence of wind or vibration is assumed.
  • the control unit 10 turns the weighing control unit of the weighing unit 5N on.
  • the control unit 10 acquires the weighing value as a weighing result.
  • control unit 10 it is also conceivable to change the normal initial operation mode of the weighing control unit of the unit 5N from the second range mode to the first range mode.
  • step S ⁇ b> 35 the control unit 10 determines whether or not the drug identification information corresponding to another drug has been read by the information reading unit 60. Here, if the said control part 10 judges that the said chemical
  • step S36 a process will be transferred to step S36.
  • the said control part 10 is after the said chemical
  • This processing is executed by the weighing specifying unit 11 of the control unit 10.
  • step S36 the control unit 10 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the medicine identification information is specified in step S33.
  • the said control part 10 judges that the said predetermined time passed (S36: Yes side)
  • it will transfer a process to step S351, and until the said predetermined time passes (S36: No side)
  • the process returns to step S32.
  • the process (S33) for assigning the weighing unit 5N to the weighing inspection target drug is not executed, and the weighing unit corresponding to the weighing inspection target drug
  • the control unit 10 can determine the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the weighing inspection target medicine in accordance with an operation of a predetermined confirmation key or the like.
  • the control unit 10 executes a verification process described later in step S37 from time to time after step S33, and confirms that the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the drug for weighing inspection matches the prescription data.
  • the weighing section 5N corresponding to the drug for weighing inspection can be determined under conditions.
  • step S351 the control unit 10 determines whether or not all the weighing values of one or a plurality of the weighing units 5N specified as the weighing unit corresponding to the medicine identification information in the step S33 have been determined.
  • the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is determined, for example, when the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is stable without fluctuation for a predetermined time.
  • the said control part 10 judges that the weighing value of all the said weighing parts was decided (S351: Yes side)
  • S351: No side the determination in step S351 is repeatedly executed.
  • step S37 the control unit 10 calculates the total of the weighing results by the one or more weighing units 5N specified as the weighing unit corresponding to the same medicine in step S33, and the total value and the prescription data And match. Specifically, the control unit 10 matches the prescription quantity, which is the target value indicated by the prescription data, in which the total weighing result of each of the weighing units 5N converted into the unit predetermined in step S34. Determine whether or not.
  • the control unit 10 matches the collation result when the drug quantity calculated based on the weighing value by the weighing unit 5N and the unit weight is 8.5 to 9.4 tablets. If it is 8.4 tablets or less or 9.5 tablets or more, it may be determined that the verification results are inconsistent. That is, the control unit 10 may perform verification by rounding off the first decimal place of the chemical quantity.
  • the error allowed by the control unit 10 in the verification process can be set in advance, and rounding off to the first decimal place is just one example.
  • the control unit 10 determines that the collation results are the same when the weighing result is a target value ⁇ 0.1 tablet or a target value ⁇ 0.2 tablet.
  • the control unit 10 when there are a plurality of weighing units 5N associated with the weighing inspection target drug, the control unit 10 includes the total number of tablets of the weighing inspection target drug in the prescription data or the Rp data, The total of the number of tablets into which the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is converted is collated.
  • the user can arbitrarily perform the same procedure as in the case of using one weighing unit 5N without requiring a special operation. It is possible to easily perform the weighing inspection by placing the weighing inspection target chemicals on the weighing portions 5N.
  • the control unit 10 calculates the total number of tablets of the weighing inspection target drug in the prescription data or the Rp data.
  • the total weight value obtained by multiplying the number of PTP sheets obtained by dividing by the number of PTP sheets corresponding to the drug to be weighed and inspected by the weight per PTP sheet, and the plurality of weighing units 5N It is also conceivable to determine whether or not the difference from the total weighing value is less than a predetermined tolerance.
  • the control unit 10 stores the number per one PTP sheet stored in the medicine master corresponding to the medicine for weighing inspection and the prescription data.
  • the control unit 10 may add a predetermined value set in advance as the weight of the ear of the PTP sheet to the target value in accordance with the number of PTP sheets and the presence or absence of fractions.
  • the control unit 10 may determine that there is an ear and add the weight of the ear. Thereby, the target value approximates to a value considering the weight of the ear of the PTP sheet, and the matching is executed with high accuracy.
  • edge is also considered.
  • the control unit 10 always changes the addition value to the target value with the ears with respect to the fraction of the PTP sheet. It is also conceivable to display a message suggesting the possibility that the collation result is inconsistent because the setting with the ear is set.
  • the control unit 10 displays “without ear” and “with ear” operation keys for inputting the presence / absence state of the ear in the fractional PTP sheet on the display unit 20. It can be considered.
  • the control unit 10 assumes that there is no ear on the PTP sheet in which the fraction is generated.
  • the control unit 10 collates the measured value with the target value on the assumption that there is an ear in the PTP sheet having a fraction. It is done.
  • the control unit 10 adds a predetermined value set in advance as the weight of the rubber band to the target value according to the number of the PTP sheets. For example, when the number of PTP sheets is 0 or more and 2 or less, the weight of a predetermined small rubber band is set. When the number of PTP sheets is 3 or more and 5 or less, When the weight of the rubber band of the size and the number of PTP sheets are 6 or more and 10 or less, it is conceivable to add the weight of a predetermined large rubber band to the target value as the predetermined value. As a result, the target value approximates to a value that takes into account the weight of the rubber band that bundles the PTP sheets, and the verification is performed with high accuracy.
  • the control unit 10 sets “weight of ear (0-99.99)”, “weight of rubber band (large) (0-99.99)”, “band rubber ( “Middle weight” (0-99.99) “,” Rubber rubber (small) weight (0-99.99) "," Number of rubber band application sheets (small: 0.0-2.0, Medium: 3.0) -5.0, large: 6.0-10.0, etc.) "," single-pack weight inspection (performed, not performed, etc.) "," QR weight data (per day, per packet, etc.) ",” “Inspection unit (RP unit, prescription unit, etc.)”, “Treatment of third decimal place when displaying g (rounding off, rounding off, etc.)”, “Rubber weight when reading packaged QR (adding, not adding, etc.)” Etc.
  • control unit 10 sets the initial selection state of the rubber band at the time of weighing by each of the weighing unit 51 to the weighing unit 54, and “balance one wheel rubber selection default value”, “balance”.
  • the control unit 10 inputs “size of rubber”, “medium rubber”, “small rubber” for inputting the size or type of the rubber band for binding the PTP sheet to the display unit 20.
  • An operation key such as “no rubber” may be displayed.
  • the control unit 10 switches the size of the rubber band used for the PTP sheet in accordance with the operation of operation keys such as “large rubber”, “medium rubber”, “small rubber”, “no rubber”, and the like. It is possible. Thereby, the weighing value and the target value can be collated in consideration of the weight of the rubber band placed on the weighing unit 5N together with the PTP sheet.
  • the size or type of the rubber band used for bundling the PTP sheets may differ depending on not only the number of PTP sheets but also the size of the PTP sheets. For this reason, the size or type of rubber band may not be uniquely determined only by the number of PTP sheets.
  • the size or type of the rubber band can be arbitrarily selected according to the operation of the operation keys such as “large rubber”, “medium rubber”, “small rubber”, “no rubber”, etc. The user can set the size or type of the rubber band by looking at the rubber band used in the actual PTP sheet.
  • the rubber bands are provided only on one of the weighing parts 5N. It is possible to be placed. In particular, it is conceivable that the rubber band is placed on the weighing unit 5N where the number of PTP sheets not requiring the rubber band is placed. Further, even if the number of PTP sheets corresponds to “small rubber”, it is conceivable that the PTP sheet is placed on the weighing unit 5N together with the rubber rubber of “large rubber”.
  • the size or type of the rubber band can be arbitrarily selected according to the operation of the operation keys such as “large rubber”, “medium rubber”, “small rubber”, “no rubber”, etc.
  • the presence / absence, size or type of the rubber band corresponding to each weighing unit 5N can be set.
  • the reflection method (calculation method) with respect to the target value of the weight of the ear of the PTP sheet and the reflection method (calculation method) with respect to the target value of the weight of the rubber band are different for each pharmacy or medical institution, these It is conceivable that the reflection method can be set in advance. For example, as a method for reflecting the target value of the weight of the ear of the PTP sheet, a first arithmetic expression based on a first internal rule corresponding to the ear and a second arithmetic expression based on a second internal rule corresponding to the absence of the ear are set.
  • control unit 10 corrects the target value or the weighing value based on the first arithmetic expression corresponding to the first internal rule when the PTP sheet is selected to have the ear, and the PTP sheet If no ear is selected, it is conceivable to correct the target value or the weighing value based on the second arithmetic expression corresponding to the second internal rule.
  • a method for dispensing the PTP sheet for example, a method of leaving an ear may be defined such as “leave an ear in the case of one tablet”. Therefore, if the result of the comparison between the measured value and the target value is not appropriate according to the method of leaving the ears of the PTP sheet, the possibility that the method of leaving the ears is not appropriate is displayed on the display unit 20.
  • step S38 if the collation result in step S37 is coincident (S38: Yes side), the control unit 10 moves the process to step S39, and if the collation result in step S37 is not coincident. (S38: No side), the process proceeds to step S381.
  • step S381 the control unit 10 displays an error message in the weighing display area A1M corresponding to each of the one or more weighing units 5N specified as the weighing unit corresponding to the same medicine in step S33.
  • the error message is “The measured value of the drug to be inspected exceeds (or is insufficient) the upper or lower limit value. Press the OK key to approve the inspection. Please press the cancel key ".
  • the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display an OK key and a cancel key together with the error message. Then, when the OK key is operated, the control unit 10 determines that the inspection of the weighing inspection target medicine is completed. On the other hand, when the cancel key is operated, the control unit 10 displays a message such as “Please take out the medicine to be inspected and weigh it again”, and the process proceeds to step S31.
  • step S39 the control unit 10 determines the weighing value in the weighing display area A1M corresponding to each of the weighing units 5N identified as the weighing unit corresponding to the same medicine in step S33.
  • the quantity obtained by converting the weighing result corresponding to the weighing unit 5N into a predetermined unit is displayed, and the fact that the collation result is coincident is displayed.
  • the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10 executes the process of displaying the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N and the collation result by the step S38 in the weighing display area A1M.
  • the said control part 10 displays the said collation result on the said weighing display area A41 (refer FIG.
  • step S39 the control unit 10 determines the weighing value as a weighing result of the weighing unit 5N, and a converted value obtained by converting the weighing value into a unit of medicine (value of units such as tablets, capsules, and sheets). Either or both of these are stored in the storage unit 40 together with the prescription data as an inspection history. Thereby, the said control part 10 can display the said measured value, the said conversion value, etc. with the content of the said prescription data, when displaying the said inspection history on the said inspection history inquiry screen D12.
  • a printer is connected to the inspection support apparatus 100 in accordance with a communication standard such as USB, RS232C, or Bluetooth (registered trademark).
  • the control unit 10 causes the printer to print out the weighing result obtained in step S37 in step S39 or step S381.
  • inspection start date and time, prescription number, voucher number, patient ID, patient name, medical department, examiner, prescription data, and Rp data are printed in the journal output by the printout.
  • a JAN code may be printed as medicine identification information included in the prescription data or the Rp data.
  • a configuration in which the control unit 10 can convert the GS1 code into a JAN code and print it out is also conceivable.
  • step S40 the control unit 10 waits for the recording timing of the captured image by the imaging unit 70 (S40: No side). Specifically, the control unit 10 performs the weighing inspection when all the weighing values of the four weighing units 51 to 54 are determined, or for all drugs included as prescription drugs in the prescription data or the Rp data. When the process is completed (when no other medicine remains in the prescription data or the Rp data as an inspection target), it is determined to record the captured image by the imaging unit 70 (S40: Yes side), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S41.
  • the case where the weighing inspection process is completed for all drugs included as prescription drugs in the prescription data or the Rp data is, for example, a case where six types of prescription drugs are included in the Rp data. This is a case where, after weighing the four types of prescription drugs using the weighing units 51 to 54, the remaining two types of prescription drugs are weighed using the two weighing units 5N. It is also conceivable that photographing by the photographing unit 70 is performed when the weighing values of all the weighing units 51 to 54 are stabilized instead of after the collation processing of all the weighing units 51 to 54 is completed.
  • step S41 the control unit 10 records a photographed image by the photographing unit 70, and associates the photographed image with the prescription data or the Rp data displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 as the inspection history.
  • the data is stored in the storage unit 40.
  • the photographing unit 70 photographs the weighing dishes 55 of all the weighing units 51 to 54 at the same time.
  • the platter 58 is placed on the weighing units 51 to 54, the platter 58 is photographed.
  • This processing is executed by the photographing processing unit 18 of the control unit 10. Thereby, as described above, the photographed image can be confirmed when referring to the inspection history on the inspection history inquiry screen D12 or the like.
  • the control unit 10 determines that the recording timing has arrived in step S40, the control unit 10 displays on the display unit 20 a start of shooting such as “starts shooting” and then determines in advance. It is conceivable that the weighing unit 51 to 54 is photographed by the photographing unit 70 after a predetermined waiting time (for example, about 2 seconds) has elapsed. Thereby, it is expected that the user retreats the hand or the like out of the shooting range by the shooting unit 70, and useless shooting can be suppressed.
  • the weighing inspection process is individually executed for each weighing unit 5N, but the photographing process in step S41 is executed as a common process.
  • the photographing by the photographing unit 70 is performed at the timing when the photographing key K18 is operated after the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is stabilized, and the association with the medicine identification information of the weighing unit 5N is released. It is also conceivable.
  • control unit 10 may record an image of a predetermined region corresponding to each of the weighing units 51 to 54 from the captured image after recording the image captured by the imaging unit 70. Considered as a form. In this case, the control unit 10 also extracts an image of each predetermined region corresponding to each of the weighing display regions A11 to A14. Then, the image corresponding to each of the weighing units 51 to 54 and the image corresponding to each of the weighing display areas A11 to A14 are stored in the storage unit 40 as individual image data. Note that the control unit 10 may store the moving image information received from the imaging unit 70 in the storage unit 40 in association with the prescription data as an inspection history.
  • step S40 when it is determined in step S40 that the photographing key K18 displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 has been operated, the control unit 10 performs photographing by the photographing unit 70. It is conceivable to record an image. In addition, it is also conceivable that a photographed image by the photographing unit 70 is recorded on the condition that collation with the prescription data of the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the medicine identification information is completed.
  • a range in which a user using the inspection support apparatus 100 performs an operation for putting a medicine in a medicine bag is included in the imaging range of the imaging unit 70, and the predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the event of the recording timing. It is also conceivable that a photographed image by the photographing unit 70 is recorded. Thereby, it is possible to image
  • step S42 the control unit 10 cancels the association between all the medicine identification information performed in step S33 and the weighing unit 5N. Thereby, the control unit 10 can execute the weighing inspection process for the next medicine by using the weighing unit 5N whose association with the medicine identification information is released.
  • the control unit 10 resets (erases) the display of the weighing display area A1M corresponding to the weighing unit 5N that has been released from the association with the medicine identification information.
  • the weighing inspection process (S19) is started each time medicine identification information is read from a packaging material such as a medicine PTP sheet, and the prescription data or the Rp data is read. It is possible to carry out inspection of prescription medicines contained in a continuous and in parallel. Therefore, for example, it is possible to efficiently and accurately perform the inspection operation for each of the prescription drugs and the storage operation for each prescription drug in the medicine bag.
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 includes four weighing units 51 to 54, and the weighing inspection process using the weighing units 51 to 54 is individually executed.
  • the user reads the drug identification information of the PTP sheet of the first tablet with the information reading unit 60 and stores it in the weighing unit 5N. Place the PTP sheet. Thereafter, the user reads the drug identification information of the PTP sheet of the second tablet by the information reading unit 60 and places the PTP sheet on the weighing unit 5N. At this time, the medicine identification information on the PTP sheet of the second tablet may be read before the weighing value of the first weighing unit 5N is stabilized.
  • each of the weighing inspection processes started for each medicine identification information the inspection result based on the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N is displayed in the weighing display area A1M.
  • the user continues to read the medicine identification information of the PTP sheet of the third tablet by the information reading unit 60 and place the PTP sheet on the weighing unit 5N, and the PTP of the fourth tablet
  • the medicine reading information of the sheet is read by the information reading unit 60, and the PTP sheet is placed on the weighing unit 5N.
  • the comparison between the weighing result by each weighing unit 5N and the prescription data or the Rp data is started individually when the medicine identification information is read. Therefore, the collation process by each of the weighing units 5N is sequentially terminated.
  • the last (fourth) PTP sheet is weighed as compared with the case where all the four types of PTP sheets are placed on the weighing unit 5N and the weighing results of all the weighing units 5N are compared. It is possible to shorten the time from the placement on the unit 5N to the end of the weighing inspection process by the inspection support device 100.
  • the inspection support device 100 since the inspection support device 100 includes the four weighing units 51 to 54, when the five types of medicines are included in the Rp data as they are, the PTP sheet of the fifth medicine is the above-mentioned. Even if the medicine identification information is read by the information reading unit 60, the PTP sheet cannot be placed. Therefore, the control unit 10 may cancel the association between the weighing unit 5N and the medicine identification information every time the comparison between the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N and the prescription data or the Rp data is completed. It can be considered as an embodiment. As a result, even when five or more kinds of medicines more than the number of the weighing units 51 to 54 included in the inspection support device 100 are included in the Rp data, the weighing units 51 to 54 are repeatedly used.
  • this type of configuration is, for example, when the inspection support apparatus 100 does not have a recording function for recording a photographed image by the photographing unit 70, or when the recording function is set to be invalid, Is an operation of the photographing key K18, or when the recording timing of the photographed image is that the collation with the prescription data of the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is completed.
  • the weighing inspection process can be executed in a state of being accommodated in a first packaging material such as a PTP (press through pack) sheet or a heat seal in which a plurality of medicines are accommodated.
  • a first packaging material such as a PTP (press through pack) sheet or a heat seal in which a plurality of medicines are accommodated.
  • the object of the weighing inspection process is a medicine in which a plurality of the first packaging materials are accommodated in a second packaging material such as an aluminum packaging material or a medicine box.
  • an operator such as a pharmacist takes out the first packaging material from the second packaging material in the inspection work using the inspection support device 100.
  • the inspection support device 100 has a packaging inspection function capable of executing the weighing inspection process while a plurality of the first packaging materials are accommodated in the second packaging material.
  • the control unit 10 implements the package inspection function by executing various processes according to the inspection support program.
  • first packaging material used in the following description means a state in which a plurality of medicines are contained in the first packaging material as well as the first packaging material.
  • material means not only the second packaging material but also a plurality of the first packaging materials contained in the second packaging material.
  • the medicine identification information such as the same GS1 code is given to the first packaging material and the second packaging material. Therefore, the control unit 10 weighs the prescription medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information when the medicine identification information is read from the first packaging material or the second packaging material in the inspection support processing step S18. It is possible to select it as a drug subject to inspection. In addition, the control unit 10 can select the drug for weighing inspection according to a user operation using the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30.
  • medical agent of the weighing object by the said weighing part 5N is an example of a selection process part.
  • control unit 10 sets the weighing units 51 to 54 in response to a user's operation input using the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 at the time of initial setting in the inspection support device 100 or at the start of weighing inspection. It is possible to switch between valid and invalid of the package inspection function.
  • a state in which the packaging inspection function is valid is referred to as a packaging inspection mode
  • a state in which the packaging inspection function is invalid is referred to as a normal mode.
  • an operation key K51 for switching between “with packaging” and “without packaging” is displayed in the weighing display areas A11 to A14 of the prescription inspection screen D10. Then, the control unit 10 switches between enabling and disabling the packaging inspection function for each of the weighing units 51 to 54 in accordance with the operation of the operation key K51 in each of the weighing display areas A11 to A14.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a registration screen D14 for registering barcode information in the pharmaceutical master. Specifically, the control unit 10 displays the registration screen D14 when an operation key for starting registration of barcode information is operated on the master maintenance screen D13 (see FIG. 14). In addition, in FIG. 16, the state in which three barcode information is registered about the medicine of the Magrax tablet 330 mg is shown.
  • barcode information information on each item of the type of barcode, the content of the barcode, the standard, the unit, the number in the PTP, the single weight, the number in the package, the package weight, the image, and the classification is the individual information of the medicine Included as
  • the number in the PTP indicating the number of medicines contained in one first packaging material is set to “10.00”.
  • the single weight indicating the weight of one of the first packaging materials is set to “5.72 g”.
  • the number in the packaging indicating the number of medicines contained in one second packaging material is set to “100”, indicating the weight of one second packaging material.
  • the packaging weight is set to “62.20 g”.
  • the control unit 10 can set the number in the PTP, the single weight, the number in the packaging, the packaging weight, and the like according to a user operation on the registration screen D14.
  • the number in the PTP, the single weight, the number in the package, the package weight, etc. are set according to the numerical input operation by the user or updated based on the information of the mother master specified in advance. Also good.
  • control unit 10 is accommodated in one second packaging material based on the number of the first packaging materials accommodated in one second packaging material and the number in the PTP. It is possible to calculate the number of drugs.
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 it is possible to set the single weight of the first packaging material, the packaging weight of the second packaging material, and the like using the weighing unit 5N.
  • K142 is displayed corresponding to each record.
  • the cells of the single weight and the package weight corresponding to each record function as the operation keys K141 and K142.
  • the control unit 10 stores the first packaging material of the medicine in the record corresponding to the operation key K141 as shown in FIG.
  • a notification screen D141 including a message that prompts the user to place only one on the weighing unit 5N is displayed. Accordingly, only two of the first packaging materials are placed on the weighing unit 5N by the operator. Thereafter, when the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is determined, the control unit 10 calculates the weight per unit of the first packaging material by dividing the weighing result by two, and sets it as the single weight. .
  • control part 10 can set arbitrarily the number of the said 1st packaging materials measured at the time of the setting of the said single weight beforehand according to user operation in the said registration screen D14.
  • control unit 10 may have a learning function for updating the single weight based on the weighing results of the weighing units 51 to 54 by the daily inspection support apparatus 100.
  • the control unit 10 uses the bar code information as a single weight obtained by averaging a single weight calculated from a weighing result of each drug weighed using the weighing units 51 to 54 for each drug. Can be registered.
  • the control unit 10 sets the second packaging material for the medicine in the record corresponding to the operation key K142 as shown in FIG.
  • a notification screen D142 including a message prompting to put the weighing unit 5N on the weighing unit 5N is displayed. Accordingly, only one second packaging material is placed on the weighing unit 5N by the operator. Thereafter, when the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is determined, the control unit 10 sets the weighing result as the packaging weight of the second packaging material.
  • the control unit 10 may have a learning function for updating the package weight based on the weighing results of the weighing units 51 to 54 by the daily inspection support apparatus 100. For example, the control unit 10 registers, in the barcode information, the value obtained by averaging the packaging weight calculated from the weighing result of each drug weighed using the weighing units 51 to 54 for each drug as the packaging weight. It is possible to do.
  • step S31 of the weighing inspection process the control unit 10 determines the single weight and the number in the PTP of the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information as the medicine master. Get from.
  • step S34 the control unit 10 starts displaying the chemical amount according to the weighing value, the single weight, and the number in the PTP by the weighing unit 5N specified in step S33. For example, as shown in the weighing display unit A14 in FIG. 15, the control unit 10 displays “35 tablets” as the weighing result of the weighing unit 54 set in the normal mode. And the said control part 10 collates the weighing result of the said weighing part 54, and the said Rp data in the said step S37.
  • the control unit 10 determines the number of medicines in the packaging corresponding to the medicine identification information and the packaging weight. Get from.
  • the said control part 10 when performing the acquisition process which concerns here is an example of an acquisition process part.
  • step S34 the control unit 10 starts displaying the amount of medicine according to the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N specified in step S33, the previous number in the package, and the package weight.
  • the display processing is executed by the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10.
  • the control unit 10 includes the weighing unit 5N out of the weight of the weighing unit 5N and the weight of the packaging weight n times (n is an integer of 1 or more) that is the total weight of the second packaging material. It is determined whether or not the difference from the approximate weight closest to the weighed value is within a preset allowable range.
  • permissible_range is set by the ratio with respect to the weight of n times the total weight of a said 2nd packaging material.
  • the allowable range is set as a range of ⁇ 10% with respect to a weight n times the total weight of the second packaging material. That is, the lower limit allowable value of the allowable range is -10% of the approximate weight, and the upper limit allowable value is + 10% of the approximate weight.
  • the allowable range of ⁇ 10% is a value set in advance in view of the fact that the weight error of one second packaging material generally guaranteed by a pharmaceutical manufacturer is ⁇ 5%.
  • the control unit 10 can arbitrarily set the permissible range according to a user operation at the time of initial setting of the inspection support apparatus 100 or at the start of the inspection support process.
  • the said control part 10 when performing the setting process which concerns here is an example of a setting process part.
  • the control unit 10 determines that the packaging inspection is performed when the difference between the weighing value by the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is within the allowable range.
  • a chemical amount n times the number in the package is displayed.
  • the number of n corresponding to n times that number is displayed as the weighing result of the weighing unit 53.
  • the weighing value of the weighing unit 53 is larger than the approximate weight and the difference between the approximate weight and the weighing value of the weighing unit 53 is out of the allowable range, the number of n corresponding to n times the number The total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material is displayed as the weighing result.
  • the weighing display unit A13 shows that the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is 0 times the number in the package (a number smaller than 1 which is n) “0”. "Lock" is displayed.
  • the approximate weight is twice the package weight, and the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is smaller than the approximate weight, and the difference between the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is When it exceeds 10% of the approximate weight, the weighing display unit A13 has the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 as 1 times the number in the package (one less than 2 which is n) “100”. "Lock" is displayed.
  • the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is larger than the approximate weight, and the difference between the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is When it exceeds 10% of the approximate weight, “100 tablets” is displayed as the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 on the weighing display unit A13.
  • the approximate weight is twice the package weight, and the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is larger than the approximate weight, and the difference between the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is If it exceeds 10% of the approximate weight, “200 tablets” is displayed as the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 on the weighing display unit A13.
  • step S37 when the control unit 10 collates the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N with the prescription data, the total number of the medicines displayed as the weighing result in the step S34. And the prescription data. That is, when the difference between the approximate weight and the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is within a preset allowable range based on the number in the package and the package weight, the control unit 10 The total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material corresponding to an integer multiple is collated with the prescription data as a weighing result.
  • the difference between the approximate weight and the weighed value of the weighing unit is outside the allowable range
  • the weighed value of the weighing unit 5N is smaller than the approximate weight
  • the number corresponding to the integral multiple is larger than
  • the total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material having a smaller number is collated with the prescription data as the weighing result
  • the integral multiple is used.
  • the total number of the medicines contained in the corresponding number of the second packaging materials is collated with the prescription data as the weighing result.
  • the said control part 10 judges that a collation result is in agreement, when the total number of the said medicine and the target value (prescription amount) of the said medicine in Rp data of the said prescription data correspond. Further, when the total number of the medicines does not match the target value, it is determined that the matching results do not match. However, even if the control unit 10 determines in the step S37 that the collation result is the same, if the weight of the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is outside the allowable range, The set warning message is displayed on the display unit 20 to notify the operator.
  • the total number of chemicals corresponding to the weighing results by the plurality of weighing units 5N is the Rp data.
  • the matching result is matched when it matches the target value of the medicine.
  • the target value of the drug in the Rp data is 135 tablets
  • the single weight of the drug is 5.72 g
  • the number in the PTP is 10 tablets
  • the package weight is 24.45 g
  • the number in the package is 100 tablets.
  • the control unit 10 calculates 26.895, which is a weight of + 10% of 24.45 of the packaging weight, as an upper limit allowable value, The weight of 10% is calculated as 22.005 g as the lower limit allowable value. And since the 23.98 g which is the weighing value by the weighing unit 53 falls within the upper limit allowable value and the lower limit allowable value (22.005 ⁇ 23.98 ⁇ 26.895), the control unit 10 100 tablets, which are the number of medicines in the package, are specified as a result of weighing by the weighing unit 53.
  • the control unit 10 calculates 20.02 g (weighing value) /5.72 g (single weight) ⁇ 10 (number in the PTP) when the weighing value by the weighing unit 54 is 20.02 g.
  • the 35 tablets that are the results are specified as the results of weighing by the weighing unit 54.
  • the said control part 10 calculates 135 tablets which are the total of the weighing result of the said weighing part 53 and the said weighing part 54, and collation whether it corresponds with 135 which is the target value of the said medicine in the said Rp data Execute the process. That is, in the example described here, the matching result is determined to be coincident.
  • the weighing result by the weighing unit 53 becomes 0 tablets.
  • the total weighing result of the unit 54 is 35 tablets, which does not coincide with 135 tablets, which is the target value of the medicine in the Rp data, and is determined to be inconsistent as the collation result.
  • the weighing result by the weighing unit 54 is not 35 tablets, it does not coincide with 135 tablets which is the target value of the medicine in the Rp data.
  • an inspection operation for inspecting a medicine in a state where a plurality of the first packaging materials containing a plurality of medicines are accommodated in the second packaging material is performed. It is possible to support. Therefore, the operator does not need to take out the first packaging material from the second packaging material, and the labor of inspection work is reduced.
  • the inspection support device 100 when the prescription data includes a plurality of Rp data, operation of the “+” and “ ⁇ ” operation keys displayed in the prescription display area A15, or direct numerical input operation The designated RpNo. Is changed, and the designated RpNo. Rp data corresponding to is displayed in the prescription display area A15.
  • the inspection of the selected Rp data is completed, the next Rp data is selected and the inspection is performed in the same manner. For example, when the Rp data of 10 is included in the prescription data, it is necessary to operate the “+” operation key every time the inspection of the Rp data is completed. Will be operated once.
  • the inspection support device 100 has a prescription unit inspection function capable of performing inspection in units of the prescription data even when the prescription data includes a plurality of the Rp data. It is done.
  • the said prescription unit inspection function is embodied by the said control part 10 performing various processes according to the said inspection assistance program.
  • control part 10 is effective in the said prescription unit inspection function according to the user's operation input using the said display part 20 and the said operation part 30 at the time of the initialization in the said inspection assistance apparatus 100, or the time of the start of the weighing inspection. And invalid can be switched.
  • the said control part 10 performs the following process in the said inspection assistance process (refer FIG. 7) and the said weighing inspection process (refer FIG. 13).
  • the inspection assistance process reference FIG. 7
  • the said weighing inspection process reference FIG. 13
  • the control unit 10 selects medicines in all the Rp data included in the prescription data as inspection targets in the step S14. Specifically, the control unit 10 displays a list of information on medicines in all the Rp data included in the prescription data in the prescription display area A15. That is, the medicines included in each of the Rp data are displayed as a list in the prescription data unit.
  • Such processing is executed by the verification processing unit 14 of the control unit 10. If the information about each medicine cannot be displayed in the prescription display area A15 at one time, a scroll bar or the like is displayed in the prescription display area A15, and the information about each medicine is scrolled by operating the scroll bar or the like. Is displayed.
  • step S40 the control unit 10 performs the weighing inspection process when all the weighing values of the four weighing units 51 to 54 are confirmed, or for all the drugs included in the prescription data as prescription drugs. Is completed, it is determined that it is the recording timing of the photographed image by the photographing unit 70, and the weighing units 51 to 54 are photographed by the photographing unit 70. That is, it is not determined that it is the recording timing of the photographed image just by completing the weighing inspection process for all the drugs included in the Rp data. Therefore, the photographed image photographed by the photographing unit 70 is not limited to a medicine image corresponding to one piece of Rp data, and may contain medicine images over a plurality of pieces of Rp data.
  • the prescription unit inspection function compared to the case where the weighing inspection process is executed in units of the Rp data, an operation for the operator to sequentially select the Rp data becomes unnecessary. The burden on the operator is reduced. Further, when all the weighing values of the four weighing units 51 to 54 are confirmed, or when the weighing inspection process is completed for all the drugs included in the prescription data as the prescription drug, The chemicals on the weighing units 51 to 54 are taken out together. Accordingly, the number of executions of the step of taking out the medicines on the weighing units 51 to 54 is reduced as compared with the case where the weighing inspection process is executed in Rp data units.
  • control unit 10 determines when all the weighing values of the four weighing units 51 to 54 are confirmed, or when the weighing inspection process is completed for all drugs included in the prescription data as prescription drugs.
  • the photographing by the photographing unit 70 is executed. Therefore, the time required for the inspection support process is shortened as compared with the case where photographing by the photographing unit 70 is executed in units of the Rp data.
  • the prescription unit inspection function is effective and the weighing inspection process is executed in the prescription data unit, as shown in FIG. 20, the medicines corresponding to the three Rp data are Simultaneously displayed in the prescription display area A15 in units of prescription data. Therefore, the operation of taking out the medicine from the weighing units 51 to 54 and the imaging by the imaging unit 70 are executed only once, and the switching operation of the Rp data is unnecessary.
  • the medicines are taken out from the weighing units 51 to 54 at the end timing of the weighing inspection process for four medicines.
  • the work, the switching operation of the Rp data, and the photographing by the photographing unit 70 are performed, but the number of times is smaller than that in the case where the weighing inspection process is performed in units of the Rp data.
  • the inspection support device 100 has an inspection hold function capable of interrupting and holding the inspection support processing and resuming the inspection support processing from the middle.
  • the inspection suspension function is implemented by the control unit 10 executing various processes according to the inspection support program.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the prescription inspection screen D10. As shown in FIG. 21, an inspection hold key K41 is displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10. And when the said control part 10 judges that the hold request
  • operation keys K61 to K63 are displayed.
  • the operation key K61 is operated when the inspection support process for the prescription data is interrupted after the photographing by the photographing unit 70.
  • the operation key K62 is operated when the inspection support process for the prescription data is interrupted without performing the photographing by the photographing unit 70.
  • the operation key K63 is operated when canceling the interruption of the prescription data inspection support process.
  • the control unit 10 photographs the weighing units 51 to 54 by the photographing unit 70 and stores the photographed images in the storage unit 40 in association with the prescription data.
  • the photographing process is executed by the photographing processing unit 18 of the control unit 10.
  • the said control part 10 memorize
  • the information during execution of the inspection support process includes the execution result of the weighing inspection process for some medicines executed up to the present time. Thereby, the control unit 10 can execute the inspection support process for the other prescription data.
  • the control unit 10 stores information during execution of the inspection support process of the prescription data in the storage unit 40 without performing imaging by the imaging unit 70. And the processing state of the prescription data is set to the hold state.
  • the control unit 10 converts the prescription data set in the hold state by the inspection hold function to other prescription data as shown in FIG. And a display mode (background color or character color) that can be identified.
  • a hold selection key K42 for limiting prescription data to be displayed to the prescription data in the hold state is displayed.
  • the control unit 10 displays the prescription data list in the hold state in the unprocessed display area A21.
  • the pending Rp data is displayed in a display mode that can be distinguished from other Rp data.
  • the control unit 10 performs the inspection based on the processing state relating to the prescription data stored in the storage unit 40. Resume support processing.
  • the control unit 10 displays the image display key K19 corresponding to the photographed image as shown in FIG. .
  • the control unit 10 enlarges and displays the captured image corresponding to the image display key K19 on the display unit 20. Thereby, the worker can easily grasp the suspension status of the inspection support processing for the prescription data.
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 after the inspection support processing for one prescription data is interrupted by the inspection hold function and the inspection support processing for one or more other prescription data is executed.
  • the inspection support process for the one prescription data can be resumed from the middle, and the efficiency of the inspection work can be improved.
  • the medicine to be inspected is selected by the information reading unit 60 reading the medicine identification information such as a barcode from the packaging material such as the PTP sheet.
  • the medicine identification information may not be attached to a packaging material such as the PTP sheet.
  • the operator performs an operation for selecting a medicine displayed in the prescription display area A15 when executing the inspection support process.
  • the medicine master a plurality of medicine identification information are registered for one medicine, and any of the plurality of medicine identification information may be set as representative medicine identification information.
  • the said control part 10 selects the chemical
  • the representative medicine identification information is set in advance, even when there are a plurality of standards for the same medicine, for example, one preset representative medicine identification information is selected. . Therefore, when the inspection support apparatus 100 executes the inspection support process, a medicine displayed in the prescription display area A15 is selected, and a plurality of the medicine identification information is registered in the medicine master for the selected medicine.
  • the standard selection function is implemented by the control unit 10 executing various processes according to the inspection support program.
  • control unit 10 can not set the representative medicine identification information even when a plurality of medicine identification information is registered as the medicine identification information of one medicine in the medicine master. And the said control part 10 selects the chemical
  • FIG. 25 shows an example of the operation screen D62.
  • the operation screen D62 displays a plurality of standards corresponding to a plurality of the medicine identification information.
  • the control unit 10 receives an operation for selecting any of the plurality of standards on the operation screen D62, and the medicine identification information corresponding to the selected standard is subjected to the inspection support process. It is selected as the medicine identification information of the medicine.
  • the control unit 10 specifies the weighing unit 5N whose weighing value has increased from 0 in step S32 as the weighing unit associated with the specified medicine identification information. To do.
  • the standard selection function for example, there are a plurality of standards for the same medicine, and a plurality of the medicine identification information is registered in the medicine master. It is possible to select an appropriate standard from the plurality of standards, and it is possible to appropriately execute the inspection support process.
  • a plurality of the inspection support devices 100 may be connected to the medical system 1.
  • the inspection support processing may be executed individually by each of the inspection support devices 100.
  • the same inspection support device 100 is used.
  • the inspection support process for the prescription data may be executed and work efficiency may be reduced.
  • each of the inspection support devices 100 it is possible to set whether the own device is a main device or a sub device.
  • the inspection support devices 100 it is possible to set whether each of the inspection support devices 100 is a main device or a sub device, and the setting contents may be transmitted to each of the inspection support devices 100.
  • the inspection support device 100 set as the main device is referred to as a main inspection support device 100A
  • the inspection support device 100 set as the sub device is referred to as a sub-inspection support device 100B.
  • the control unit 10 determines whether the main device is already registered in the medical system 1 when a registration operation as the main device is performed. It is conceivable to make an inquiry to each support device 100. And the said control part 10 permits setting an own machine as the said main apparatus, only when the said main apparatus is not registered. This prevents duplicate registration of the main device.
  • the main inspection support device 100A acquires the prescription data from the dispensing support system 200 and the receipt system 300 and stores the prescription data in the storage unit 40.
  • the control unit 10 of the sub-inspection support device 100B accesses the storage unit 40 of the main inspection support device 100A and performs the inspection support process for the prescription data stored in the storage unit 40 or The prescription data can be deleted. That is, it is conceivable that each of the sub-inspection support devices 100B does not acquire the prescription data from the dispensing support system 200 and the reception system 300.
  • the medical system 1 includes an exclusive control function that exclusively controls access from the plurality of inspection support apparatuses 100 to the same prescription data.
  • the exclusive control function is implemented by the control unit 10 executing various processes according to the inspection support program.
  • a processing folder and a processed folder may be provided in the storage unit 40 of the main inspection support apparatus 100A.
  • the said control part 10 of each said inspection assistance apparatus 100 is the said prescription identification which shows the selected said prescription data, when the said prescription data are selected as processing objects, such as the said inspection assistance process or the said deletion process Information is stored in the processing folder.
  • the control unit 10 of each of the inspection support devices 100 can determine that the prescription data is being processed based on the prescription identification information in the processing folder. Accordingly, in each of the inspection support devices 100, when the control unit 10 displays a list of unprocessed prescription data on the prescription inspection screen D10 (see FIG. 9), prescription data accessed from other terminals is displayed. It is possible not to display.
  • the control unit 10 when the prescription identification information indicating the prescription data to be processed is stored in the processing folder, the control unit 10 performs the inspection support process or the deletion process for the prescription data. Can not run. In addition, when the prescription identification information indicating the prescription data to be processed is not stored in the processing folder, the control unit 10 performs the inspection support process or the deletion process for the prescription data. Can be performed.
  • each of the said control part 10 will move the said prescription identification information which shows the said prescription data to the said processed folder from the said folder during a process, when the said inspection support process or the said deletion process about the said prescription data is complete
  • the control unit 10 each sets the processing content and the processing result for the prescription data as the inspection history as the inspection history of the main inspection support apparatus 100A. The data is stored in the storage unit 40.
  • exclusive control is performed on the prescription data stored in the storage unit 40 of the main inspection support apparatus 100A by the exclusive control function, and thus a plurality of the inspections are performed. It is possible to prevent the processing for the same prescription data from being executed in parallel using the support device 100.
  • control unit 10 of the main inspection support apparatus 100A may manage the presence / absence of access to the prescription data by each of the inspection support apparatuses 100 connected to the medical system 1. It is done. In this case, when any one of the inspection support devices 100 accesses the prescription data, the control unit 10 of the main inspection support device 100A restricts access from the terminal to the prescription data. Thereby, in each said inspection assistance apparatus 100, when the said control part 10 displays the list of unprocessed prescription data on the said prescription inspection screen D10 (refer FIG. 9), the prescription data currently accessed from the other terminal Can not be displayed.
  • the maximum weight that can be used for the weighing inspection process using the platter 58 (hereinafter referred to as “maximum platter maximum weight”) is a predetermined value that is less than the total of the rated capacities of the four weighing units 5N. Is used. For example, when the rated capacity of the weighing unit 5N is 200 g, the total rated capacity of the four weighing dishes 5N is 800 g, whereas the maximum weight of the platter is set to about 600 g. .
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 includes a platter dividing function that can execute the weighing inspection process for a medicine that exceeds the maximum weight of the platter using the platter 58.
  • the control unit 10 implements the platter dividing function by executing various processes according to the inspection support program.
  • the control unit 10 can set validity and invalidity of the platter division weighing function according to a user operation in the initial setting of the inspection support apparatus 100 or the like.
  • the control unit 10 may switch between enabling and disabling the platter divided weighing function according to a user operation during the execution of the weighing inspection process.
  • the control unit 10 determines the medicine exceeding the platter maximum weight (hereinafter, “weight” based on the Rp data selected as an object of the weighing inspection process. It is determined whether or not “excess medicine” is included as a prescription medicine. And when the said overweight chemical
  • the control unit 10 sets the drug corresponding to the weighing result every time the weighing drug is placed on the platter 58 and the weighing result by the weighing units 51 to 54 is determined. The amount is displayed in the weighing display area A41. In addition, the control unit 10 calculates and displays the remaining drug amount obtained by accumulating the drug amount corresponding to the weighing result by the weighing units 51 to 54 from the target value of the overweight drug in the Rp data. Let me.
  • FIG. 26 to FIG. 28 are diagrams showing display examples of the weighing display area A41 sequentially displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 in the platter divided weighing mode.
  • the control unit 10 calculates the amount of medicine obtained by converting the weight corresponding to the overweight medicine into the unit of the overweight medicine, and uses the amount of medicine as a weighing result to display the weight of the display unit 20. It is displayed in the weighing display area A41 of the prescription inspection screen D10. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the control unit 10 calculates the weighing result from the target value of the overweighted drug in the Rp data every time the weighing result by the weighing units 51 to 54 is determined. The remaining amount of medicine after accumulating the amount of medicine is displayed in the weighing display area A41 as a target quantity. As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the control unit 10 calculates the maximum number of medicines that can be weighed using the platter 58, and sets the number of medicines in the weighing display area A41 as the divided maximum number. It can also be displayed.
  • the said control part 10 judges whether the weighing using the said platter 58 was repeatedly performed about the said overweight chemical
  • the control unit 10 determines that the collation results are the same, the control unit 10 displays the fact on the display unit 20 and then ends the platter divided weighing mode, and determines that the collation results are inconsistent. While weighing, the weighing by the weighing unit 5N using the platter 58 is repeated. That is, the control unit 10 can collate the results of weighing a plurality of times by the plurality of weighing units 51 to 54 on which the platter 58 is placed with the prescription data.
  • the weighing inspection process can be executed using the platter 58 for the overweight medicine exceeding the maximum weight of the platter by the platter dividing function.
  • the control unit 10 displays the remaining amount of medicine with respect to the target value of the overweight medicine in the weighing display area A41 of the prescription inspection screen D10. Can be easily performed.
  • the control unit 10 may divide the data of the overweight medicine so that the weighing target value per time is not more than the maximum weight of the platter for the overweight medicine. It is done. For example, let us consider a case where the overweight medicine is a unit weight of 160 g (10 per bag), the amount to be dispensed is 60, and the maximum weight of the platter is 600 g. In this case, the weight corresponding to the excess drug is 960 g (160 g ⁇ 6 bags). In this case, it is conceivable that the control unit 10 sets the maximum weight of the platter 600 g and the remaining 360 g as two weighing target values.
  • control unit 10 uses 480 g (3 bags) which is less than 600 g which is the maximum weight of the platter and is an integral multiple of the minimum payout unit, and the remaining 480 g (3 bags) as a target value for weighing twice. Dividing evenly is also conceivable.
  • the case where the platter 58 placed over the plurality of weighing units 5N is used is described as an example.
  • the control unit 10 obtains a plurality of weighing results obtained by the one weighing unit 5N and the prescription data. It is also conceivable as another embodiment that collation is possible.
  • step S31 of the weighing inspection process the unit weight of the medicine is acquired, but it is considered that the unit weight of the medicine is not registered in the medicine master. For example, unit weight information for a new drug may not be registered.
  • the inspection support device 100 has a master update function for updating the drug master.
  • the master update function is realized when the control unit 10 executes a master update process (see FIG. 29) described later in step S31.
  • the master update process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the said master update process is a process performed separately about each chemical
  • step S51 the control unit 10 determines whether or not information on a medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process is stored in the medicine master.
  • the medicine for example, information such as the unit weight of the medicine used in the weighing inspection process, the weight per PTP sheet, and the number per PTP sheet is stored in the medicine master. It is determined whether or not.
  • the process proceeds to step S55, and it is determined that the drug information is not stored in the drug master. If so (S51: No), the process proceeds to step S52.
  • step S ⁇ b> 52 the control unit 10, with respect to the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process, the mother master (second master) stored in the medicine master (an example of the first master) and a preset reference destination. It is determined whether or not there is a difference.
  • the mother master includes the same type of information as the pharmaceutical master, and is downloaded in advance from a website, for example, or read from a recording medium such as a CD and stored in the storage unit 40.
  • the mother master may be stored in the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300.
  • the control unit 10 can set the reference destination of the mother master in advance according to a user operation at the initial setting of the inspection support apparatus 100 or at the start of the weighing inspection process.
  • the storage unit 40, the dispensing support system 200, the receipt system 300, or the like of the inspection support device 100 is set as the reference destination. Furthermore, the mother master sends the inspection support apparatus 100 to the inspection support apparatus 100 via the communication network N1 periodically or at an arbitrary timing from a server apparatus 400 (see FIG. 1) of the inspection support apparatus 100 or a drug manufacturer. It may be automatically distributed and stored in the storage unit 40.
  • the control unit 10 extracts the number of barcode information associated with the medicine identification information such as the YJ code of the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process as the individual information of the medicine for the medicine master. . Moreover, the said control part 10 extracts the number of the said barcode information matched with the identification information of the chemical
  • control unit 10 does not register the barcode information corresponding to the medicine identification information such as the YJ code of the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process in the medicine master, and the mother master It is determined that there is a difference even if registered in.
  • control unit 10 is different even when there is a difference between the pharmaceutical master and the mother master in the content of the barcode information corresponding to the medicine (packaging weight or number in the packaging). Is determined to have occurred.
  • step S52 if it is determined that there is a difference between the drug master and the mother master (S52: Yes), the process proceeds to step S53, and there is no difference between the drug master and the mother master. If it is determined (S52: No), the process proceeds to step S55. Note that, in step S52, instead of whether or not there is a difference between the pharmaceutical master and the mother master, whether or not information on the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process is registered in the mother master. Simple processing for determining
  • step S53 the control unit 10 determines whether or not to update the medicine master based on the mother master. Specifically, the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display an inquiry about whether or not the medicine master is updated, and determines whether or not the medicine master is updated according to a user operation for the inquiry. If it is determined that the pharmaceutical master is to be updated (S53: Yes), the process proceeds to step S54. If it is determined that the pharmaceutical master is not to be updated (S53: No), the process proceeds to step S55. To do.
  • step S54 the control unit 10 updates the medicine master based on the mother master. Specifically, the control unit 10 updates the information on the item that is different from the mother master to the information on the mother master by updating the information on the medicine master with the mother master. Synchronize. That is, the control unit 10 extracts a difference between the medicine master and the mother master. And when the number of the barcode information registered in association with the medicine is different between the medicine master and the mother master, the control unit 10 has the bar that the medicine master lacks. Code information is read from the mother master and registered in the pharmaceutical master.
  • control unit 10 does not register the barcode information corresponding to the medicine identification information such as the YJ code of the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection processing in the medicine master, and does not register it in the mother master. If registered, the barcode information is read from the mother master and registered in the pharmaceutical master.
  • control unit 10 when there is a difference between the drug master and the mother master, the content of the barcode information corresponding to the drug (packaging weight or number in the package), It is also possible to adopt the content of the barcode information in the mother master and update the content of the barcode information in the pharmaceutical master.
  • the control unit 10 may be able to change the presence / absence of individual medicines in steps S53 to S54 according to a user operation for each medicine for which there is a difference between the mother master and the medicine master. . Further, the control unit 10 updates the information in the drug master to the information in the mother master only for the drug arbitrarily selected according to the user operation, or arbitrarily edits the information in the drug master. It may be possible.
  • the said control part 10 is matched with the said chemical
  • step S55 the control unit 10 acquires the unit weight of the medicine from the medicine master.
  • a preset error message or the like is displayed.
  • the control unit 10 manually stores the barcode information.
  • a warning prompting registration may be displayed on the display unit 20.
  • the control unit 10 may start the registration process of the barcode information in response to a user operation of the operation unit 30 by subsequently displaying the registration screen D14.
  • the medicine master when the information such as the unit weight of the medicine is not stored in the medicine master, the medicine master can be updated based on the mother master. Therefore, it is possible to update information such as the unit weight of the medicine without interrupting the weighing inspection process, and it is possible to continue the weighing inspection process.
  • step S51 is omitted and whether or not there is a difference between the pharmaceutical master and the mother master each time the weighing inspection process is performed.
  • step S53 may be omitted, and the medicine master may be automatically updated without a user operation during the weighing inspection process.
  • the comparison between the drug master and the mother master and the update of the drug master based on the mother master may be automatically executed every preset period.
  • Preliminary weighing inspection function In a medical facility such as a hospital or a pharmacy, the same medicine as that prescribed to the patient in the past may be prescribed to the patient (Do prescription). In such a case, an operator such as a pharmacist performs a medicine dispensing operation and an inspection operation based on a patient's visit schedule (reservation) or a visit frequency before the prescription data is input to the inspection support device 100. May be executed. However, if the prescription data is not input to the inspection support device 100, the inspection support device 100 cannot be used for the inspection work.
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 has a pre-weighing inspection function capable of executing the inspection support processing based on the past prescription data before the prescription data is newly issued.
  • the control unit 10 implements the pre-weighing inspection function by executing various processes in accordance with the inspection support program.
  • the pre-inspection control process is a process that is executed before new prescription data is registered, for example, before a patient visit, and the pre-dispensed result is inspected based on past prescription data. It is a process to do.
  • the pre-verification conforming process is a result of collating past prescription data and new prescription data without requiring weighing using the weighing unit 5N, and having been inspected in advance by the pre-inspection control process. Is a process for adopting as an inspection result of new prescription data.
  • step S61 the control unit 10 determines whether inspection has been completed for the prescription data that has been subject to inspection in the inspection support process, and when the inspection is completed (S61: Yes), The process proceeds to step S62. That is, the process of step S62 is performed every time the inspection support process for the prescription data is completed. If the inspection is not completed (S61: No), the process proceeds to step S63.
  • the control unit 10 stores a part or all of the information in the prescription data in the storage unit 40 as data for executing the weighing support process (hereinafter referred to as “pre-matching data”).
  • pre-matching data is a part of the prescription data generated based on the prescription data, or the prescription data itself.
  • the pre-collation data includes information such as a prescription ID, a patient ID (patient name), a medicine type, a usage, and a dose (total amount) corresponding to the prescription data.
  • the control unit 10 may determine whether or not the pre-verification data is stored for only prescription data satisfying a preset condition among the prescription data to be inspected in the inspection support process. It is done. For example, the condition is that the patient is preset, the preset medicine is not included, the type of the prescription data is a preset type (regular or temporary), and the like. Conceivable. Note that the control unit 10 may automatically delete the pre-collation data after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the storage date and time of the pre-collation data. This makes it possible to effectively use the data capacity of the storage unit 40 and prohibit the use of the old pre-verification data.
  • step S63 the control unit 10 determines whether a user operation for using the pre-weighing inspection function has been performed. For example, when a predetermined pre-weighing inspection key is displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 and the control unit 10 is operated, the pre-weighing inspection key is used. It is determined that a user operation has been performed. If it is determined that the user operation has been performed (S63: Yes), the process proceeds to step S64. If it is determined that the user operation has not been performed (S63: No), the process is performed as described above. The process returns to step S61.
  • step S ⁇ b> 64 the control unit 10 displays a list of the pre-verification data stored in the storage unit 40 on the prescription inspection screen D ⁇ b> 10 of the display unit 20.
  • the list of pre-collation data a patient ID corresponding to each of the pre-collation data, a prescription ID of the prescription data that is the original of the pre-collation data, and the like are displayed.
  • the control unit 10 accepts an operation for selecting any of the pre-collation data from the pre-collation data list.
  • step S65 the control unit 10 determines whether or not the pre-collation data has been selected. If it is determined that the pre-collation data has been selected (S65: Yes), the process proceeds to step S66 until the pre-collation data is selected (S65: No). Waits in step S65.
  • step S66 the control unit 10 starts the inspection support process based on the preliminary collation data determined to be selected in step S65. Specifically, the control unit 10 determines that the preliminary verification data has been selected as an inspection target, and starts the process from step S15 in the inspection support process (see FIG. 7).
  • step S67 the control unit 10 determines whether or not the inspection support process for the pre-verification data has been completed, and determines that the inspection support process has ended (S67: Yes), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S68 and waits for the process in step S67 until the inspection support process ends (S67: No).
  • step S68 the control unit 10 causes the storage unit 40 to store the result of the inspection support process for the preliminary verification data as the preliminary inspection result.
  • the said control part 10 can refer the said preliminary inspection result later.
  • the pre-examination result includes the prescription ID, patient ID (patient name), medicine type, usage, dose (total amount), weighing value, weighing result (quantity), matching result ( Information such as match, mismatch).
  • step S69 the control unit 10 prints information that can identify the preliminary inspection result by the printer.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the printing result in step S69.
  • the control unit 10 prints, as the barcode B1, a pre-inspection record number assigned to the pre-inspection result by a serial number as identification information of the pre-inspection result.
  • information such as patient ID (patient name), usage, number of days, and total amount of each medicine is also printed in the print result in step S69.
  • control part 10 performs the said prior collation application process in the back
  • an example of the procedure of the pre-collation application process will be described with reference to FIG.
  • step S71 the control unit 10 determines whether or not the preliminary inspection record number has been read. Specifically, the control unit 10 determines that the preliminary inspection record number has been read when the barcode B1 is read by the information reading unit 60. If the pre-inspection record number has been read (S71: Yes), the process proceeds to step S72. If the pre-inspection record number has not been read (S71: No), the pre-inspection process ends. To do.
  • step S ⁇ b> 72 the control unit 10 reads out the preliminary inspection result corresponding to the preliminary inspection record number from the storage unit 40.
  • the control unit 10 may display a list of the preliminary inspection results, accept an arbitrary selection operation of the preliminary inspection results, and read the preliminary inspection results instead of the steps S71 to S72. Other embodiments are possible.
  • step S73 the control unit 10 determines whether or not the contents of the prescription data that are the targets of the inspection support process and the contents of the preliminary verification data included in the preliminary inspection results all match. Is matched. Specifically, the control unit 10 includes patient information such as patient ID (patient name) in the prescription data and the pre-verification data, drug information (YJ code, etc.), usage, dose (total amount), etc. It is determined whether or not all the drug information matches. In addition, the collation item in the said collation process should just be one or several preset items.
  • control unit 10 determines whether or not the patient corresponding to the pre-verification data matches the patient corresponding to the prescription data, and then only when the patient matches If the patients do not match, it may be determined that the collation results do not match without determining whether the drug information matches.
  • step S74 when the control unit 10 determines that the collation result of the prescription data and the pre-collation data in step S73 is the same (S74: Yes), the process proceeds to step S75, and the collation is performed. If it is determined that the results do not match (S74: No), the process proceeds to step S76.
  • step S75 the control unit 10 uses the pre-inspection result executed in the pre-inspection control process as a target (verification target) of the inspection support process after the execution of the pre-inspection control process. Is stored in the storage unit 40, and the process proceeds to step S21. That is, the weighing inspection process for the prescription data is omitted, and the preliminary inspection result in the preliminary inspection control process performed based on the preliminary verification data is adopted as the inspection result of the prescription data. Will be.
  • step S76 the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display a warning that the collation result between the preliminary inspection result and the prescription data is inconsistent. For example, messages such as “patient difference”, “drug difference”, “use difference”, and “dose difference” are displayed.
  • the pre-collation process ends, and the process proceeds to step S15. That is, in this case, the preliminary inspection result is not adopted, the inspection support process for the prescription data is performed as usual, and the weighing unit 5N is compared with the prescription data in the weighing inspection process. Will be.
  • the inspection support process can be executed in advance for the pre-check data, and the dispensing operation and the inspection operation for the prescription data are performed in advance. Therefore, an operator such as a pharmacist can use time effectively.
  • the pre-collation result is adopted only for the portion where the drug information in the prescription data and the pre-collation data matches, as described above, in the inspection support device 100, Since the pre-collation result is adopted only when all the drug information in the prescription data and the pre-collation data match, a highly safe inspection is realized.
  • a method in which the inspection result by the pre-weighing inspection function is adopted as the inspection result for the prescription data when the total weights match is also considered as a comparative example.
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 the weighing inspection process for a plurality of types of medicines in the preliminary collation data is individually executed for each medicine using the plurality of weighing units 5N. And only when the information of all the medicines in the data for pre-collation and the prescription data are in agreement, the pre-collation result is adopted. Therefore, in the inspection support apparatus 100, highly reliable inspection is realized.
  • control part 10 restrict
  • control unit 10 may display the inspection hold key K41 on the prescription inspection screen D10 in gray out.
  • the mother master is used for updating the drug master and the barcode information in the master update function.
  • the mother master is distributed from the server device 400 to each of the inspection support devices 100, the mother master set in the server device 400 needs to have high reliability.
  • the medical system 1 includes the server device 400 and a plurality of the inspection support devices 100 connected to the server device 400 via the communication network N1, and the inspection support device It is conceivable to have a mother master update function for updating the mother master based on information collected from each of 100.
  • the medical system 1 is an example of an inspection support system according to the present invention.
  • the server device 400 may be the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300.
  • the control unit 10 performs actual measurement using the weighing units 51 to 54 such as the single weight and the package weight in the barcode information. A value that can be calculated based on the value can be set based on the actual measurement value. And the said control part 10 outputs the said barcode information of each chemical
  • the identification information such as a MAC address that can identify the inspection support device 100 is transmitted to the server device 400 via the communication network N1.
  • the said control part 10 when performing the transmission process which concerns is an example of a transmission process part.
  • the server device 400 automatically collects a plurality of pieces of bar code information corresponding to each medicine from the plurality of inspection support devices 100.
  • the said pharmaceutical master containing the said barcode information is transmitted to the said server apparatus 400 from each said inspection support apparatus 100, or only the information of the said single weight or the said packaging weight is the said each from the said inspection support apparatus 100. Transmission to the server apparatus 400 is also conceivable as another embodiment.
  • the server device 400 includes a control unit 401 including a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, and the like, and a non-volatile storage unit 402 such as a hard disk or an SSD.
  • the storage unit 402 stores the barcode information acquired from the mother master and the inspection support device 100, respectively.
  • the said control part 401 calculates the said single weight and the said package weight of each chemical
  • the said control part 401 when performing the setting process which concerns here is an example of a weight setting process part.
  • each of the inspection support devices 100 acquires the updated master master from the server device 400, and thereby sets the single weight set based on the information acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100 and the Package weight information can be acquired.
  • the server device 400 automatically distributes the mother master to each inspection support device 100 at a preset timing, or each of the inspection support devices 100 sets the server at a preset timing. It is conceivable to automatically obtain the mother master from the device 400. That is, in the medical system 1, the bar code information and the mother master are automatically transmitted and received between each of the inspection support devices 100 and the server device 400 without any user operation, so-called M2M. (Machine to Machine) is realized.
  • the information acquired by each of the inspection support devices 100 may be only information corresponding to the barcode information in the mother master, or only information on the single weight or the packaging weight in the mother master. Good.
  • the packaging weight may be calculated in the same manner as the single weight, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
  • control unit 401 for each medicine, has a center in a plurality of single weights, which is a combination of a plurality of single weights acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100 and a single weight currently registered in the mother master.
  • the value is extracted as a reference single weight.
  • a single weight currently registered in the mother master may not be extracted.
  • the median value is a value located in the center when the single weights are arranged in ascending order, and the number of the single weights is an even number.
  • the median is the smaller of the two values located in the center when the single weights are arranged in ascending order.
  • the median value when the number of single weights is an even number may be an average value of two values located at the center when the single weights are arranged in ascending order.
  • control unit 401 calculates a predetermined allowable range for the reference single weight for each medicine.
  • the allowable range is a value for limiting the single weight so as not to fluctuate greatly in the mother master.
  • the allowable range is within ⁇ 10% of the median.
  • control part 401 extracts the single weight which belongs to the said tolerance
  • the mother master update function it is possible to update the single weight of each medicine in the mother master according to information collected from a plurality of the inspection support devices 100, It is possible to increase the accuracy of a single weight.
  • three values of 2.43 g, 2.40 g, and 2.80 g are acquired as a single weight of a specific medicine from the three inspection support devices 100, and the unit currently registered in the mother master is acquired.
  • one weight is 2.42 g, 2.42 g which is the median value among the four values is extracted as the reference single weight.
  • the allowable range is not less than 2.18 g of 2.42 g which is the reference single weight and 2.66 g or more and 2.66 g or less.
  • out of 2.43 g, 2.40 g, 2.42 g, and 2.80 g, 2.80 g outside the allowable range is excluded, and 2.43 g, 2.40 g, and 2.42 g within the allowable range are extracted.
  • 2.42 g which is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the three values by 3 of the number of data ((2.43 + 2.40 + 2.42) /3 ⁇ 2.42) is calculated, and the mother master Is set as a single weight (reference value of the weight) of the specific medicine.
  • the control unit 401 updates the mother master based on the single weight. It is possible not to execute.
  • the control unit 401 stores the single weight of the medicine acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100 together with the identification information and the acquisition date and time of the inspection support device 100 in the storage unit 402.
  • the single weight of the same medicine acquired from the same inspection support device 100 is overwritten and stored. Thereafter, when the control unit 401 acquires the single weight from the inspection support device 100, the single unit acquired for the same kind of medicine in a specific period set in advance such as the past seven days from the present, for example. It is determined whether the weight parameter is equal to or greater than the threshold value. And when the number of the said single weight is more than the said threshold value, the said single weight in the said mother master is updated based on those single weights as mentioned above. On the other hand, if the number of the single weights is less than the threshold value, the updating of the mother master based on the single weights is not performed. This prevents the single weight from being updated in a state where the parameter is small and the reliability is low.
  • the control unit 401 updates the single weight and the packaging weight of the medicine collected in the server device 400, the barcode having the same medicine identification information such as the YJ code and the GS1 code. It is possible to average for each information. However, for the medicines sold by the manufacturer, the specifications of the packaging such as the PTP sheet, heat seal, or medicine box in which the medicine is accommodated are changed without changing the medicine identification information, and the unit weight of the medicine. Or individual information such as packaging weight may change. When the individual information changes in this way, the inspection result of the medicine before the change of the packaging specification in the inspection support device 100 in the barcode information collected from the inspection support device 100 to the server device 400.
  • the barcode information updated based on the information and the barcode information updated based on the inspection result of the medicine after the change of the packaging specification by the inspection support device 100 are included. Therefore, the reliability of the single weight and the package weight for each barcode information set in the mother master may be lowered. Therefore, in the medical system 1, it is desirable to increase the reliability of the single weight and the package weight for each barcode information set in the mother master.
  • the single weight and the package weight will be described as an example of the individual information.
  • the medicine master for each of the barcode information, an external appearance photographed image in which a state corresponding to the barcode information is packaged with a plurality of types of packaging materials or an illustration depicting the state is drawn.
  • a packaging state image such as an image can be registered together with packaging identification information such as a file name for identifying the packaging state image.
  • the packaging state image and the packaging identification information are registered in advance in the mother master, for example, and are taken into the pharmaceutical master from the mother master.
  • the control unit 10 of the inspection support device 100 automatically registers the packaging state image and the packaging identification information registered in the mother master in the medicine master at a preset timing. It is possible. That is, when the packaging specification of the medicine is changed and the packaging state image and the packaging identification information of the medicine are newly registered in the mother master, the mother used in the inspection support apparatus 100 thereafter
  • the master and the pharmaceutical product master are also updated to the latest state.
  • the said control part 10 is the said packaging state image corresponding to each said barcode information in the said prescription inspection screen D10 displayed on the said inspection assistance apparatus 100, the said master maintenance screen D13, etc.
  • a user operation for arbitrarily selecting the packaging identification information can be accepted. Specifically, when the operation key corresponding to the “bar code” on the master maintenance screen D13 (see FIG. 14) is operated, the control unit 10 displays the registration screen D14. Subsequently, the control unit 10 corresponds to the barcode information when the information reading unit 60 reads the barcode information of the medicine whose packaging specifications are new in a state where the registration screen D14 is displayed. The registration process is started with the drug information to be operated as the operation target. Specifically, the control unit 10 displays a display field corresponding to the read barcode information on the registration screen D14 so as to be identifiable in a display mode such as a preset color scheme.
  • the control unit 10 displays the packaging state image registered in association with the barcode information.
  • An image list screen D143 showing a list is displayed on the display unit 20.
  • FIG. 33 shows an example of the image list screen D143.
  • the selection of the barcode information to be operated may be performed according to a user operation on the operation unit 30.
  • the control unit 10 temporarily stores the selection state of the image and stores the image.
  • the list screen D143 is closed and the registration screen D14 is displayed on the display unit 20.
  • the control unit 10 displays the packaging identification information corresponding to the packaging state image selected on the image list screen D143 for the barcode information. Store in information.
  • the packaging identification information stored in association with the barcode information is included in the barcode information collected by the server device 400 from the inspection support device 100. Therefore, in the server device 400, the control unit 401 determines that each of the single weight and the packaging weight for each barcode information in which the medicine identification information such as the YJ code and the GS1 code and the packaging identification information are the same. It is possible to calculate the average value of. And the said control part 401 sets the average value of the said single weight and the said package weight as the said single weight and the said package weight for every said package identification information corresponding to the said barcode information of the said mother master.
  • control unit 401 identifies the packaging based on the single weight and the packaging weight that are the same in the packaging identification information among the single weight and the packaging weight acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100. A reference value of the single weight and the package weight corresponding to the information is set. The control unit 401 sets the latest package identification information among the package identification information associated with the barcode information in the mother master as the single weight and the package weight corresponding to the barcode information. It is also possible to do.
  • individual information such as the single weight and the packaging weight corresponding to the barcode information in the mother master is included in each medicine packaging specification corresponding to the barcode information. Updated to Thereby, the reliability of the single weight and the packaging weight for each barcode information set in the mother master is increased, and as a result, the inspection accuracy in the inspection support device 100 in which the barcode information is used. It is possible to increase.
  • the control unit 10 of the inspection support device 100 performs the barcode information. It is conceivable to switch the individual information corresponding to the barcode information in accordance with a user operation for selecting the packaging identification information corresponding to the barcode information.
  • the control unit 10 stores the inspection history based on the weighing results of the weighing units 51 to 54 in the storage unit 40.
  • the control unit 10 automatically deletes the inspection history stored in the storage unit 40 in order from the oldest in accordance with preset deletion conditions.
  • the said control part 10 when performing the process which concerns here is an example of a memory
  • the deletion condition is that the timing when a preset date / time has elapsed from the storage date / time of the inspection history has arrived, or that the storage capacity of the storage unit 40 has reached a lower limit value or less. is there. However, in this case, even if there is an inspection history that the user thinks important, the oldest one is deleted in order.
  • the control unit 10 may have a history protection function capable of protecting the inspection history.
  • the control unit 10 when executing the process for realizing the history protection function is an example of the protection processing unit.
  • the control unit 10 displays a list of the inspection history, and accepts a selection operation by an arbitrary user in a state where the list is displayed.
  • the control unit 10 can select the inspection history for each prescription according to a user operation, but the inspection history can be selected for each patient, for each date, for each drug, and for each pharmacist in charge. It is also possible to select.
  • the inspection history includes a protection flag as protection information indicating the presence or absence of protection, and the protection flag is set to ON in the inspection history selected in accordance with a user operation.
  • the protection flag in the inspection history is set. Set to ON.
  • history selected beforehand according to a user operation and the said protection flag is set to ON is excluded from deletion object.
  • the user can refer to the inspection history in which the protection flag is set to ON at any time by performing the history inquiry operation with the inspection support device 100.
  • the control unit 10 sets the protection flag to OFF in the same process as the inspection history protection setting, and thereafter, the inspection history is sequentially deleted at the deletion timing.
  • the control unit 10 does not set the protection flag to ON when the number of inspection histories that can set the protection flag to ON exceeds a preset upper limit number. Therefore, when setting the protection of the inspection history, the user selects a target for setting the protection flag to ON while being aware of the upper limit number.
  • the control unit 10 can also erase the inspection history in which the protection flag is set to ON after a longer period than usual. For example, when the inspection history with the protection flag OFF is deleted after 90 days, the inspection history with the protection flag ON is automatically deleted after one year has passed, or the user is notified after one year has passed. It is possible to delete the data after accepting the confirmation operation.
  • the control unit 10 has a continuous mode in which the continuous weighing function is enabled, and switches between a normal mode in which the continuous weighing function is disabled and the continuous mode in accordance with a user operation. Then, when the control unit 10 is in the continuous mode, the control unit 10 performs the current measurement by each of the weighing units 51 to 54 at a predetermined timing such as the timing at which the photographed image is recorded in the step S42 of the weighing inspection process. A taring setting process for performing so-called taring to adjust the weighing value to 0 is executed.
  • the said control part 10 when performing the said tare pulling setting process is an example of a tare pulling setting process part here.
  • the control unit 10 sets the current actual weighing value as the exceptional taring value. And the said control part 10 outputs the value which pulled the said exceptional tare subtraction value from the actual weighing result as a weighing result at the time of subsequent weighing.
  • the weighing value is adjusted to 0 when the photographed image is recorded. It is possible to continue the inspection based on the weight of the medicine newly placed on the parts 51 to 54.
  • control part 10 complete
  • the continuous weighing function even when five or more kinds of medicines are to be inspected, the next medicine is removed without removing the four kinds of medicines placed on the weighing parts 51 to 54. It can be placed, and the efficiency of user work is realized.
  • the tare setting setting process is not limited to step S42, but for example, timing when the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 are determined (step S351), timing when the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 are verified (step S351).
  • Step S37) may be executed at a predetermined timing such as a timing at which the comparison of the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 is determined to be normal (Step S38: Yes).
  • the control unit 10 performs the tare subtraction setting process when the current weighing value of the weighing units 51 to 54 is equal to or greater than a preset upper limit value. It is also conceivable to display a preset message such as “Please take out the medicine” without executing it.
  • the medicine weighed by the inspection support device 100 includes a medicine that is likely to cause an error in the weight per unit quantity such as one tablet or 0.1 sheet.
  • a medicine that is likely to cause an error in the weight per unit quantity such as one tablet or 0.1 sheet.
  • Errors may occur frequently and the efficiency of inspection work may be reduced.
  • the inspection support device 100 has a relaxed inspection function that can improve the efficiency of inspection work by relaxing the inspection accuracy of drugs that are likely to cause an error in weight per unit amount. It is done.
  • the relaxation inspection function will be described.
  • a caution flag (ON: valid, OFF: invalid) indicating validity and invalidity of the relaxation examination function can be stored in association with each medicine.
  • the control unit 10 may automatically set the caution flag for each medicine based on the inspection history of each medicine in the inspection support apparatus 100. For example, the control unit 10 displays an error message indicating that the verification results do not match in step S381 of the weighing inspection process (see FIG. 13) in the inspection support process executed in the inspection support apparatus 100.
  • the inspection approval operation (OK key operation) for the user to approve the inspection is performed, the fact that the conditional approval has been performed for the medicine and the error at that time are stored as the inspection history.
  • control unit 10 automatically sets the caution flag to ON when the conditional approval is performed more than a predetermined number of times set in a predetermined specific period (for example, three months). It is possible.
  • the control unit 10 displays an operation screen for allowing the user to select whether or not to set the attention flag to ON when the conditional approval is performed more than the specific number of times within the specific period.
  • the caution flag may be set to ON according to a user operation. Further, the control unit 10 may arbitrarily set the caution flag according to a user operation.
  • the pharmaceutical master can store target value lower limit number conversion, target value upper limit number conversion, target value lower limit sheet conversion, and target value upper limit sheet conversion in association with each drug.
  • the target value lower limit number conversion and the target value upper limit number conversion are values that define a range that is allowed as an error when the amount of medicine is collated in units of number.
  • the target value lower limit sheet conversion and the target value upper limit sheet conversion are values that define a range that is allowed as an error when the amount of medicine is collated in sheet units.
  • the initial value of the target value lower limit number conversion, the target value upper limit number conversion, the target value lower limit sheet conversion, and the target value upper limit sheet conversion may be 0, for example.
  • the control unit 10 performs the target value lower limit number conversion, the target value upper limit number conversion, the target value lower limit sheet conversion, and the target value upper limit sheet conversion in the pharmaceutical master according to a user operation. It can be set arbitrarily. However, in the inspection support device 100, it is possible to set the settable maximum number of the target value lower limit number conversion and the target value upper limit number conversion in common for all medicines, and the control unit 10 It is conceivable to limit the setting of the target value lower limit number conversion and the target value upper limit number conversion to the settable maximum number or less.
  • the settable maximum number of sheets for the target value lower limit sheet conversion and the target value upper limit sheet conversion is set, and the control unit 10 It is conceivable to limit the setting of the target value lower limit sheet conversion and the target value upper limit sheet conversion of the medicine to the settable maximum number of sheets or less.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a display example of the master maintenance screen D13.
  • the target value lower limit number conversion, the target value upper limit number conversion, the target value lower limit sheet conversion, and the target value upper limit sheet conversion can be input.
  • the master maintenance screen D13 displays operation keys K33 to K36 for displaying an inspection history for the medicine selected on the master maintenance screen D13.
  • the control unit 10 determines the number of errors that occurred when the inspection unit is the number and the conditional approval is performed, and the occurrence of the errors. Display percentages.
  • the control unit 10 generates an error in the number of sheets and the occurrence of the error when the inspection unit is the number of sheets and the conditional approval is performed. Display percentages.
  • the number of times that the conditional approval was made within the specific period is 15 cases, and the number of errors at that time is ⁇ 1 tablet, 80%, ⁇ 2 tablets In the case where there is 20%, such information is displayed on a pop-up screen D33 as shown in FIG. 34 in response to the operation of the operation key K33.
  • the number of times that the conditional approval is made within the specific period is 15 cases, and the number of errors at that time is +1 tablet, 80%, and +2 tablets Is 20%, these pieces of information are displayed according to the operation of the operation key K34.
  • the control unit 10 may calculate and display the error number and the ratio of the error sheet number as absolute values including shortage and excess. For example, in the case of the above-described example, when the operation key K33 or K34 is operated, 30 cases are displayed as the number of times that the conditional approval is performed, and the number of errors is 1 tablet 80% If there are 2 tablets, 20% is displayed. Similarly, when the operation key K35 or K36 is operated, 30 cases are displayed as the number of times that the conditional approval has been performed, and the number of error sheets is 0.1%. Is displayed.
  • control unit 10 is based on the inspection history, the number of medicines or the number of sheets with the highest rate of conditional approval, the target value lower limit number conversion, the target value upper limit number conversion, It is also conceivable to automatically set each value for target value lower limit sheet conversion and target value upper limit sheet conversion.
  • step S37 of the weighing inspection process in the inspection support process, the control unit 10 determines the weighing result when the caution flag is ON in the medicine master for the medicine to be inspected. When the error is within a preset error range, it is determined that the matching result is coincident. Specifically, when the inspection unit of the medicine to be inspected is the number, the control unit 10 calculates the number of medicines calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing part 5N and the target value in the prescription data. When the difference is equal to or greater than the target value lower limit number conversion set by the pharmaceutical master and equal to or less than the target value upper limit number conversion, it is determined that the matching results are the same.
  • the control unit 10 calculates the number of medicine sheets calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N and the target value in the prescription data.
  • the difference is equal to or greater than the target value lower limit sheet conversion set by the pharmaceutical master and equal to or less than the target value upper limit sheet conversion, it is determined that the matching results are the same. That is, the controller 10 determines that the difference between the amount of the medicine calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing section 5N and the target value of the medicine in the prescription data is within an error range set in advance for each medicine. In some cases (S38: Yes), the error is not notified, and when the error range is exceeded (S38: No), the error is notified (S381).
  • the inspection support apparatus 100 allows inspection errors for medicines that are likely to have an error in weight per unit amount, and reduces the frequency of notification of errors, so that the efficiency of inspection work can be improved.
  • a case has been described by way of example in which it is determined that the matching result is the same when the error between the weighing result and the target value is within the error range.
  • the collation result is determined to be inconsistent, but only the error notification in step S371 is not executed, and the process is performed in step S40. It is also conceivable as another embodiment to shift to.
  • control unit 10 may display a precaution check mode that is set in advance in order to recognize that the medicine with the caution flag turned on is an easy-to-error medicine on the prescription inspection screen D10.
  • the caution display mode may be displayed in a preset character color, displayed in a preset background color, or a symbol or character such as a preset “!”, “*”, Or “caution” It may be possible to display the name with a chemical name. Thereby, the user can perform inspection while paying attention to the medicine displayed in the caution display mode.
  • the control unit 10 includes, for each medicine to be inspected, image identification information such as a file name for identifying a photographed image by the photographing unit 70, and the medicine on which the medicine is placed.
  • Weighing unit identification information such as a weighing unit number for identifying the weighing unit 5N is associated with and stored in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history.
  • the control unit 10 displays the inspection history on the inspection history inquiry screen D12 or the like (see FIG. 12), at least according to the selection operation of the display column of any medicine in the history content display area A53.
  • An image display screen D121 on which a captured image of the image identification information corresponding to the medicine is displayed is displayed on the display unit 20.
  • FIG. 35 shows an example of the image display screen D121.
  • the photographed image of the selected medicine is displayed in an enlarged manner than the thumbnail image of the operation key K19.
  • the operation key K19 is not displayed on the inspection history inquiry screen D12, and the control unit 10 performs the image display screen D121 in response to a selection operation of an arbitrary medicine display field in the history content display area A53. It is also possible to display. Further, when the operation key K19 is operated, the captured image may be enlarged and displayed on the image display screen D121.
  • the history content display area A53 displayed in FIG. 12 is extracted on the basis of information such as the medicine name input in the extraction condition display area A51 and displayed in the list display area A52.
  • the contents of the inspection history of a patient arbitrarily selected from the selected patient list are displayed. That is, the control unit 10 can search for a photographed image in which the medicine is photographed using an arbitrarily input medicine name as a keyword.
  • control unit 10 can accept operations on the operation areas A121 to A124, which are separated by a dashed line shown in FIG. 35, on the image display screen D121.
  • Each of the operation areas A121 to A124 is an area corresponding to each position of the weighing units 51 to 54. Then, the control unit 10 performs weighing with a weighing unit corresponding to one of the operation regions A121 to A124 operated among the weighing units 51 to 54 in response to any operation of the operation regions A121 to A124.
  • Individual information on medicines including information such as medicine names that can identify the medicines that have been identified, and information indicating the amount of medicines (number of tablets, number of sheets, etc.) calculated based on the weighing results, is stored in the inspection history. Display based on.
  • Such display processing is executed by the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10.
  • the control unit 10 ends the display of the individual drug information.
  • the operation area A121 is operated, and the name and the number of tablets (number of sheets) weighed by the weighing unit 51 are displayed on the pop-up screen D122.
  • an enlarged image of the photographed image of the weighing unit 51 and the individual information on the medicine may be displayed on the pop-up screen D123. Note that the name of the medicine and the number of tablets (number of sheets) weighed by the weighing unit 51 may be transferred from the image display screen D121 to another screen and displayed.
  • Control unit 20 Display section 30 Operation unit 40 storage unit 50 Weighing device 51-54 Weighing section 55 Weighing pan 56 load cell 60 Information reader 70 Shooting Department 80 tablet devices 90 Cover member 100 Inspection support device

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Medical Preparation Storing Or Oral Administration Devices (AREA)
  • Medical Treatment And Welfare Office Work (AREA)

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a screening assistance device and screening assistance method which are capable of assisting with screening work in which drugs are screened in a state wherein a plurality of first packaging materials in which a plurality of drugs is contained is collectively contained in a second packaging material. [Solution] Provided is a screening assistance device 100 in which, on the basis of both the number of drugs in a second packaging material which contains a plurality of first packaging materials that contains a plurality of drugs and the total weight of the second packaging material which contains the plurality of first packaging materials, if the difference between the weighed values of balance units 51-54 and the nearest approximate weights to the weighed values of the balance units 51-54, among integer multiple weights of the total weight of the second packaging material, falls within a preset allowable range, then a control unit 10 is capable of comparing prescription data with, as a balance result, the total number of drugs which the second packaging material contains, which is a quantity corresponding to the integer multiple.

Description

鑑査支援装置、鑑査支援方法、鑑査支援システムInspection support device, inspection support method, inspection support system

 本発明は、処方データに基づいて調剤された薬品を鑑査する薬剤師等の業務を支援するために用いられる鑑査支援装置、及び鑑査支援方法に関する。

The present invention relates to an inspection support apparatus and an inspection support method used for supporting the work of a pharmacist or the like that inspects a medicine dispensed based on prescription data.

 一般に、処方データに基づいて薬品が調剤された薬品を鑑査する薬剤師等の業務を支援するために用いられる鑑査支援装置が知られている。例えば、複数の秤量部に載置される薬品の総量に基づいて調剤内容の適否が判定される調剤鑑査システムが知られている(例えば特許文献1参照)。

In general, an inspection support apparatus is known that is used to support the work of a pharmacist or the like that inspects a medicine dispensed with a medicine based on prescription data. For example, a dispensing inspection system is known in which the suitability of dispensing contents is determined based on the total amount of medicines placed on a plurality of weighing units (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

特開2013-42795号公報JP 2013-42795 A

 ところで、複数の薬品が収容されているPTPシート又はヒートシールのような第1包装材が複数まとめてアルミ包装材又は薬箱などのような第2包装材に収容された状態で患者に提供されることがある。この場合、前述の調剤鑑査システムを利用して鑑査作業を行うためには、例えば第2包装材から第1包装材を取り出して鑑査を行った後、再び第1包装材を第2包装材に収容するという作業が必要になる。

By the way, a plurality of first packaging materials such as PTP sheets or heat seals containing a plurality of medicines are collectively provided to a patient in a second packaging material such as an aluminum packaging material or a medicine box. Sometimes. In this case, in order to perform inspection work using the above-described dispensing inspection system, for example, after the first packaging material is taken out from the second packaging material and inspected, the first packaging material is again used as the second packaging material. The work of housing is required.

 本発明の目的は、複数の薬品が収容されている第1包装材が複数まとめて第2包装材に収容されている状態でその薬品を鑑査する鑑査作業を支援することのできる鑑査支援装置及び鑑査支援方法を提供することにある。

An object of the present invention is to provide an inspection support apparatus capable of supporting an inspection operation for inspecting a medicine in a state where a plurality of first packaging materials containing a plurality of medicines are accommodated in a second packaging material. The purpose is to provide inspection support methods.

 本発明に係る鑑査支援装置は、秤量部と、前記秤量部による秤量対象の薬品を選択する選択処理部と、前記選択処理部で選択された前記薬品が複数収容されている第1包装材が複数収容されている第2包装材における前記薬品の数と前記複数の第1包装材が収容されている前記第2包装材の総重量とを取得する取得処理部と、前記秤量部による秤量結果と処方データとを照合する照合処理部と、を備える。そして、前記照合処理部が、前記取得処理部によって取得された前記薬品の数と前記第2包装材の総重量とに基づいて、前記第2包装材の総重量の整数倍の重量のうち前記秤量部の秤量値に最も近い近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が予め設定された許容範囲内である場合に前記整数倍に対応する数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数を秤量結果として前記処方データと照合可能である。

 また、本発明に係る鑑査支援方法は、秤量部を備える鑑査支援装置における鑑査支援方法であって、前記秤量部による秤量対象の薬品を選択する選択ステップと、前記選択ステップで選択された前記薬品が複数収容されている第1包装材が複数収容されている第2包装材における前記薬品の数と前記複数の第1包装材が収容されている前記第2包装材の総重量とを取得する取得ステップと、前記秤量部による秤量結果と処方データとを照合する照合ステップとを含む。そして、前記照合ステップでは、前記取得ステップによって取得された前記薬品の数と前記第2包装材の総重量とに基づいて、前記第2包装材の総重量の整数倍の重量のうち前記秤量部の秤量値に最も近い近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が予め設定された許容範囲内である場合に前記整数倍に対応する数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数が秤量結果として前記処方データと照合される鑑査支援方法である。

 また、本発明に係る鑑査支援システムは、複数の前記鑑査支援装置と前記鑑査支援装置各々と通信可能な情報処理装置とを備える。そして、前記鑑査支援装置各々は、前記照合処理部による照合で用いられる前記第1包装材又は前記第2包装材の重量の情報を予め定められたタイミングで前記情報処理装置に送信する送信処理部を備える。また、前記情報処理装置は、前記鑑査支援装置各々から取得される前記重量の情報に基づいて前記薬品ごとの前記重量の基準値を設定する重量設定処理部を備える。そして、前記鑑査支援装置各々は、前記情報処理装置から前記重量の基準値を取得可能である。

The inspection support apparatus according to the present invention includes: a weighing unit; a selection processing unit that selects a drug to be weighed by the weighing unit; and a first packaging material that stores a plurality of the drugs selected by the selection processing unit. An acquisition processing unit that acquires the number of the medicines in the plurality of second packaging materials accommodated and the total weight of the second packaging material in which the plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated, and a weighing result by the weighing unit And a collation processing unit that collates the prescription data. And based on the number of the medicines acquired by the acquisition processing unit and the total weight of the second packaging material, the verification processing unit is based on the integral weight of the total weight of the second packaging material. When the difference between the approximate weight closest to the weighing value of the weighing unit and the weighing value of the weighing unit is within a preset allowable range, it is accommodated in the second packaging material in a number corresponding to the integral multiple. The total number of the medicines can be compared with the prescription data as a weighing result.

Further, the inspection support method according to the present invention is an inspection support method in an inspection support apparatus including a weighing unit, the selection step of selecting a drug to be weighed by the weighing unit, and the drug selected in the selection step The number of the medicines in the second packaging material in which a plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated and the total weight of the second packaging material in which the plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated are obtained. An acquisition step, and a collation step of collating the weighing result obtained by the weighing unit with the prescription data. And in the collation step, the weighing unit out of the weight of an integral multiple of the total weight of the second packaging material based on the number of the medicines acquired by the acquisition step and the total weight of the second packaging material When the difference between the approximate weight closest to the weighed value and the weighed value of the weighed portion is within a preset allowable range, the medicine contained in the second packaging material in a number corresponding to the integer multiple This is the inspection support method in which the total number is collated with the prescription data as a weighing result.

The inspection support system according to the present invention includes a plurality of the inspection support devices and an information processing device capable of communicating with each of the inspection support devices. And each said inspection support apparatus transmits the information of the weight of the said 1st packaging material or the said 2nd packaging material used by the collation by the said collation process part to the said information processing apparatus at a predetermined timing. Is provided. The information processing apparatus includes a weight setting processing unit that sets a reference value of the weight for each medicine based on the weight information acquired from each of the inspection support apparatuses. And each said inspection assistance apparatus can acquire the reference value of the said weight from the said information processing apparatus.

 また、本発明に係る鑑査支援方法は、秤量部を備える鑑査支援装置における鑑査支援方法であって、前記秤量部による秤量対象の薬品を選択する選択ステップと、前記選択ステップで選択された前記薬品が複数収容されている第1包装材が複数収容されている第2包装材における前記薬品の数と前記複数の第1包装材が収容されている前記第2包装材の総重量とを取得する取得ステップと、前記秤量部による秤量結果と処方データとを照合する照合ステップと、を含み、前記照合ステップでは、前記取得ステップによって取得された前記薬品の数と前記第2包装材の総重量とに基づいて、前記第2包装材の総重量の整数倍の重量のうち前記秤量部の秤量値に最も近い近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が予め設定された許容範囲内である場合に前記整数倍に対応する数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数が秤量結果として前記処方データと照合される鑑査支援方法である。

 また、本発明に係る鑑査支援装置は、秤量部と、前記秤量部による秤量結果に基づいて算出される薬品の量と処方データにおける当該薬品の目標値とを照合する照合処理部と、前記照合処理部による照合結果が不一致である場合にエラーを報知する報知処理部と、を備える。そして、前記報知処理部は、前記照合処理部による照合結果が予め設定された条件を満たす場合は、前記秤量部による秤量結果に基づいて算出される薬品の量と処方データにおける当該薬品の目標値との差が前記薬品ごとに予め設定された誤差範囲内である場合に前記エラーを報知せず、前記誤差範囲を超える場合にエラーを報知する。

Further, the inspection support method according to the present invention is an inspection support method in an inspection support apparatus including a weighing unit, the selection step of selecting a drug to be weighed by the weighing unit, and the drug selected in the selection step The number of the medicines in the second packaging material in which a plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated and the total weight of the second packaging material in which the plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated are obtained. An obtaining step, and a collating step for collating the weighing result by the weighing unit and the prescription data, and in the collating step, the number of the medicines obtained by the obtaining step and the total weight of the second packaging material Based on the above, the difference between the approximate weight closest to the weighing value of the weighing part and the weighing value of the weighing part among the integral multiples of the total weight of the second packaging material is within a preset allowable range. Place The total number of the chemicals contained in the second packaging material number corresponding to the integer multiple is inspecting support method are matched to the prescription data resulting weighed.

Further, the inspection support apparatus according to the present invention includes a weighing unit, a matching processing unit that compares the amount of medicine calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing section and a target value of the medicine in the prescription data, and the matching A notification processing unit that notifies an error when the verification result by the processing unit is inconsistent. When the collation result by the collation processing unit satisfies a preset condition, the notification processing unit calculates the amount of the medicine calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing unit and the target value of the medicine in the prescription data. The error is not notified when the difference is within an error range set in advance for each medicine, and the error is notified when the error exceeds the error range.

 本発明によれば、複数の薬品が収容されている第1包装材が複数まとめて第2包装材に収容されている状態でその薬品を鑑査する鑑査作業を支援することのできる鑑査支援装置及び鑑査支援方法が提供される。

According to the present invention, an inspection support apparatus capable of supporting an inspection operation for inspecting a medicine in a state where a plurality of first packaging materials containing a plurality of medicines are accommodated in the second packaging material, and Inspection support methods are provided.

図1は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an inspection support apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. 図2は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図3は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図4は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図5は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図6は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the configuration of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図7は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置で実行される鑑査支援処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of inspection support processing executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図8は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図9は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図10は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図11は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図12は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図13は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置で実行される秤量鑑査処理の手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the weighing inspection process executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図14は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置のマスターメンテナンス画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a master maintenance screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図15は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図16は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図17は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図18は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図19は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図20は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図21は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図22は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図23は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図24は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図25は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図26は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図27は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図28は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図29は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置で実行されるマスター更新処理の手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of master update processing executed by the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図30は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置で実行される事前鑑査制御処理の手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a prior inspection control process executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図31は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置で実行される事前鑑査制御処理における印刷結果の一例を示す図である。FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a printing result in the preliminary inspection control process executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図32は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置で実行される事前鑑査適用処理の手順の一例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a prior inspection application process executed by the inspection support apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図33は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図34は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention. 図35は、本発明の実施形態に係る鑑査支援装置の表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the inspection support device according to the embodiment of the present invention.

 以下添付図面を参照しながら、本発明の実施形態について説明し、本発明の理解に供する。なお、以下の実施形態は、本発明を具体化した一例であって、本発明の技術的範囲を限定する性格のものではない。

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. In addition, the following embodiment is an example which actualized this invention, Comprising: The thing of the character which limits the technical scope of this invention is not.

[医療システム1]

 図1に示すように、医療システム1は、鑑査支援装置100、調剤支援システム200及びレセプトシステム300などを備える。前記鑑査支援装置100、前記調剤支援システム200、及び前記レセプトシステム300は、LAN又はインターネット等のネットワークN1を介して通信可能に接続される。なお、前記医療システム1には、前記鑑査支援装置100が複数接続可能である。

[Medical system 1]

As shown in FIG. 1, the medical system 1 includes an inspection support device 100, a dispensing support system 200, a reception system 300, and the like. The inspection support device 100, the dispensing support system 200, and the reception system 300 are communicably connected via a network N1 such as a LAN or the Internet. Note that a plurality of inspection support devices 100 can be connected to the medical system 1.

[調剤支援システム200]

 前記調剤支援システム200は、電子カルテシステム又は処方オーダーシステムなどの上位システムから処方データを受信する。前記処方データには、例えば患者ID、患者氏名、性別、年齢、病棟、担当医師、担当薬剤師などの基本情報、及び患者に処方する薬品の種類(薬品名称、薬品ID、YJコード、GS1コードなど)、用量、用法、服用開始日、服用期間、及び服用終了日などの薬品情報が含まれる。そして、前記調剤支援システム200は、前記処方データに基づいて、錠剤分包機及び散薬分包機などの調剤機器で使用される調剤データを生成し、前記調剤機器に送信する。前記錠剤分包機は、1種類又は複数種類の錠剤を服用時期ごとに分包紙に分包することが可能であり、前記散薬分包機は、1種類又は複数種類の散薬を服用時期ごとに分包紙に分包することが可能である。また、錠剤及び散薬を同一の分包紙に分包することが可能な前記錠剤分包機又は前記散薬分包機も知られている。なお、分包紙は透明又は半透明な材料で形成されており、前記分包紙の内部に収容された薬品は外部から視認可能である。また、前記錠剤分包機又は前記散薬分包機は、前記分包紙に患者名、服用時期、及び薬品名などを記載する分包プリンターなども備える。

[Dispensing support system 200]

The dispensing support system 200 receives prescription data from a host system such as an electronic medical record system or a prescription order system. The prescription data includes, for example, basic information such as patient ID, patient name, gender, age, ward, doctor in charge, pharmacist in charge, and the type of medicine prescribed to the patient (drug name, medicine ID, YJ code, GS1 code, etc. ), Medication information such as dose, usage, start date of taking, duration of taking, and end date of taking. And the said dispensing assistance system 200 produces | generates the dispensing data used with dispensing apparatuses, such as a tablet packaging machine and a powder packaging machine, based on the said prescription data, and transmits to the said dispensing apparatus. The tablet packaging machine is capable of packaging one or more kinds of tablets into a wrapping paper at each time of taking, and the powder medicine dispensing machine separates one or more kinds of powder at each time of taking. It is possible to wrap it into wrapping paper. In addition, the tablet packaging machine or the powder packaging machine capable of packaging tablets and powders in the same wrapping paper is also known. Note that the wrapping paper is formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the medicine contained in the wrapping paper is visible from the outside. The tablet packaging machine or the powder packaging machine also includes a packaging printer that records a patient name, a medication time, a medicine name, and the like on the packaging paper.

 ここで、前記調剤支援システム200は、前記処方データを予め設定された記憶装置に共有可能な状態で記憶する。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100は、前記調剤支援システム200の前記記憶装置から前記処方データを取得することが可能である。また、前記調剤支援システム200から前記鑑査支援装置100に能動的に前記処方データが送信されることも考えられる。前記調剤支援システム200から取得される前記処方データは、例えば前記調剤支援システムで編集されたオリジナルフォーマット形式のデータであってもよい。なお、前記鑑査支援装置100が取得する前記処方データは、前記調剤支援システム200が前記上位システムから取得した処方データに限らず、前記調剤支援システム200において前記処方データに基づいて生成された前記調剤データであってもよい。

Here, the dispensing support system 200 stores the prescription data in a sharable state in a preset storage device. Thereby, the inspection support device 100 can acquire the prescription data from the storage device of the dispensing support system 200. It is also conceivable that the prescription data is actively transmitted from the dispensing support system 200 to the inspection support device 100. The prescription data acquired from the dispensing support system 200 may be data in an original format edited by the dispensing support system, for example. The prescription data acquired by the inspection support device 100 is not limited to prescription data acquired from the higher-level system by the dispensing support system 200, and the dispensing generated by the dispensing support system 200 based on the prescription data. It may be data.

[レセプトシステム300]

 前記レセプトシステム300は、電子カルテシステム又は処方オーダーシステムなどの上位システムから診療内容及び処方データなどの診療データを受信する。そして、前記レセプトシステム300は、前記診療データに基づく医療費の計算及び請求書の発行などのレセプト業務を支援するために用いられる。

[Receive system 300]

The receipt system 300 receives medical data such as medical contents and prescription data from a host system such as an electronic medical record system or a prescription order system. The receipt system 300 is used to support a reception service such as calculation of medical expenses based on the medical data and issuance of a bill.

 ここで、前記レセプトシステム300は、前記処方データを予め設定された記憶装置に共有可能な状態で記憶する。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100は、前記レセプトシステム300の前記記憶装置から前記処方データを取得することが可能である。また、前記レセプトシステム300から前記鑑査支援装置100に能動的に前記処方データが送信されることも考えられる。前記レセプトシステム300から取得される前記処方データは、例えばNSIPS仕様で定められたテキストファイルフォーマットである。

Here, the reception system 300 stores the prescription data in a sharable state in a preset storage device. Thereby, the inspection support device 100 can acquire the prescription data from the storage device of the reception system 300. In addition, the prescription data may be actively transmitted from the receipt system 300 to the inspection support device 100. The prescription data acquired from the reception system 300 is, for example, a text file format defined by NSIPS specifications.

[鑑査支援装置100]

 図1及び図2に示すように、前記鑑査支援装置100は、制御部10、表示部20、操作部30、記憶部40、秤量装置50、情報読取部60、及び撮影部70などを備える。前記鑑査支援装置100は、病院、老健施設、又は薬局などの医療機関において、前記処方データに基づいて調剤された薬品の最終鑑査を行う薬剤師等の医療従事者の業務を支援するために用いられる。なお、前記秤量装置50、前記情報読取部60、及び前記撮影部70は、例えばUSB、RS232C、又はBluetooth(登録商標)などの通信規格に従って前記制御部10と通信可能に接続される。

[Inspection support device 100]

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the inspection support device 100 includes a control unit 10, a display unit 20, an operation unit 30, a storage unit 40, a weighing device 50, an information reading unit 60, and a photographing unit 70. The inspection support device 100 is used to support the work of a medical worker such as a pharmacist who performs a final inspection of a medicine dispensed based on the prescription data in a medical institution such as a hospital, a health facility, or a pharmacy. . The weighing device 50, the information reading unit 60, and the photographing unit 70 are communicably connected to the control unit 10 in accordance with a communication standard such as USB, RS232C, or Bluetooth (registered trademark).

 本実施形態において、前記鑑査支援装置100は、前記制御部10、前記表示部20、前記操作部30、及び前記記憶部40を含むタブレット端末80を備える。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100の小型化を図ることができる。なお、前記鑑査支援装置100が、前記制御部10、前記表示部20、前記操作部30、及び前記記憶部40を個別に備える構成も他の実施形態として考えられる。

In the present embodiment, the inspection support device 100 includes a tablet terminal 80 including the control unit 10, the display unit 20, the operation unit 30, and the storage unit 40. Thereby, size reduction of the said inspection assistance apparatus 100 can be achieved. A configuration in which the inspection support device 100 includes the control unit 10, the display unit 20, the operation unit 30, and the storage unit 40 individually is also conceivable as another embodiment.

 前記鑑査支援装置100は、不図示の電源コードにより商用交流電源に接続され、前記商用交流電源から供給される電力によって稼働する。また、前記タブレット端末80には、二次電池が内蔵されており、前記商用交流電源で充電される。そのため、前記商用交流電源が遮断された場合でも前記タブレット端末80は前記二次電池により一定時間稼働可能であり、例えば停電時のデータバックアップなどが可能である。

The inspection support device 100 is connected to a commercial AC power source by a power cord (not shown) and is operated by electric power supplied from the commercial AC power source. The tablet terminal 80 has a built-in secondary battery and is charged by the commercial AC power source. Therefore, even when the commercial AC power is cut off, the tablet terminal 80 can be operated for a certain period of time by the secondary battery, and for example, data backup at the time of a power failure is possible.

 前記制御部10は、CPU、ROM、RAM、及びEEPROM(登録商標)などを備える。前記CPUは、各種の制御プログラムに従って各種の演算処理を実行するプロセッサーである。前記ROMは、前記CPUにより実行されるBIOS等のプログラムが予め記憶された不揮発性メモリである。前記RAM及び前記EEPROMは、前記CPUによる各種の制御プログラムの展開及びデータの一時記憶に用いられる揮発性メモリ及び不揮発性メモリである。

The control unit 10 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an EEPROM (registered trademark), and the like. The CPU is a processor that executes various arithmetic processes according to various control programs. The ROM is a non-volatile memory in which programs such as BIOS executed by the CPU are stored in advance. The RAM and the EEPROM are a volatile memory and a non-volatile memory used for development of various control programs and temporary storage of data by the CPU.

 前記表示部20及び前記操作部30は、前記制御部10によって制御されることにより、ユーザーに情報を表示すると共に、ユーザーの操作を受け付けるユーザインターフェースである。前記表示部20は、液晶ディスプレイ又は有機ELディスプレイなどを有しており、前記操作部30は、前記表示部20に配置されるタッチパネルなどを有する。具体的に、前記鑑査支援装置100において、前記制御部10は、前記表示部20に各種の操作キーを表示させ、前記操作キーの操作を前記操作部30が有する前記タッチパネルで検出することによりユーザー操作を受け付ける。なお、前記操作部30は、マウス又はキーボードなどを含むものであってもよい。さらに、前記操作部30は、音声認識により各種情報の入力を受け付ける音声操作入力部を有するものであってもよい。

The display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 are user interfaces that are controlled by the control unit 10 to display information to the user and receive user operations. The display unit 20 includes a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display, and the operation unit 30 includes a touch panel disposed on the display unit 20. Specifically, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 displays various operation keys on the display unit 20, and detects the operation of the operation keys with the touch panel included in the operation unit 30. Accept the operation. The operation unit 30 may include a mouse or a keyboard. Furthermore, the operation unit 30 may include a voice operation input unit that receives input of various types of information by voice recognition.

 また、前記鑑査支援装置100は、図2及び図3に示すように、前記鑑査支援装置100に対して開閉可能なカバー部材90を備える。具体的に、前記カバー部材90は、前記秤量装置50の一端において回動支持部91によって回動可能に支持されることにより、前記鑑査支援装置100に対して開閉可能である。そして、前記カバー部材90には、前記タブレット端末80が配置されている。このように、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記カバー部材90に前記タブレット端末80が配置されることにより、前記鑑査支援装置100の小型化が図られている。

Further, the inspection support apparatus 100 includes a cover member 90 that can be opened and closed with respect to the inspection support apparatus 100 as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3. Specifically, the cover member 90 can be opened and closed with respect to the inspection support device 100 by being rotatably supported by a rotation support portion 91 at one end of the weighing device 50. The tablet terminal 80 is disposed on the cover member 90. Thus, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the inspection support apparatus 100 is downsized by arranging the tablet terminal 80 on the cover member 90.

 ここで、前記タブレット端末80は、前記表示部20の表示面が前記カバー部材90の内面側に露出する姿勢で前記カバー部材90によって支持されている。特に、前記タブレット端末80は、図3に示す前記カバー部材90の閉鎖時に、前記表示部20の表示面が前記秤量装置50に設けられている後述の秤量部51~54に対向する姿勢で前記カバー部材90によって支持されている。これにより、図2に示すように、前記カバー部材90が開かれている場合には、前記表示部20及び前記操作部30が、前記秤量装置50の秤量部51~54と対峙した状態となる。そのため、ユーザーは、前記表示部20及び前記操作部30と前記秤量装置50の秤量部51~54とを一度に見渡すことができる状態で視線を大きく動かすことなく鑑査作業を行うことができる。

Here, the tablet terminal 80 is supported by the cover member 90 such that the display surface of the display unit 20 is exposed to the inner surface side of the cover member 90. In particular, the tablet terminal 80 is configured such that when the cover member 90 shown in FIG. 3 is closed, the display surface of the display unit 20 faces the weighing units 51 to 54 described later provided in the weighing device 50. It is supported by the cover member 90. Thus, as shown in FIG. 2, when the cover member 90 is opened, the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 are in a state of facing the weighing units 51 to 54 of the weighing device 50. . Therefore, the user can perform the inspection work without moving the line of sight in a state where the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 and the weighing units 51 to 54 of the weighing device 50 can be looked over at a time.

 前記記憶部40は、前記制御部10によって実行される各種のアプリケーションプログラム及び各種のデータが記憶されるソリッドステートドライブ又はフラッシュメモリ等の記憶装置である。なお、前記記憶部40は、前記制御部10に外部接続されるハードディスクドライブ等であってもよい。

The storage unit 40 is a storage device such as a solid state drive or a flash memory in which various application programs executed by the control unit 10 and various data are stored. The storage unit 40 may be a hard disk drive externally connected to the control unit 10.

 前記記憶部40には、前記制御部10によって前記調剤支援システム200又は前記レセプトシステム300等から取得された前記処方データが記憶される。例えば、前記制御部10は、予め定められたタイミングで前記調剤支援システム200又は前記レセプトシステム300等の記憶装置内の共有フォルダを参照し、前記共有フォルダに未取得の処方データが存在する場合にその処方データを取得する。

The storage unit 40 stores the prescription data acquired from the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300 by the control unit 10. For example, the control unit 10 refers to a shared folder in a storage device such as the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300 at a predetermined timing, and there is unacquired prescription data in the shared folder. Get the prescription data.

 また、前記記憶部40には、医薬品マスター及び患者マスター等の各種データベースが記憶されている。前記医薬品マスター及び前記患者マスターは、前記調剤支援システム200又は前記レセプトシステム300等との連動によって更新可能である。前記医薬品マスターには、薬品コード、規格量、ホストコード、薬品名称、薬品一般名称、JANコード、RSSコード、YJコード(個別医薬品コード)、GS1コード、薬瓶コード、剤形コード(散薬、錠剤、水剤、外用薬など)、形態コード、劇薬・管理薬品種類(向精神薬、麻薬)、管理(車高、金庫、冷所など)、及び単位(調剤単位)などの情報が含まれる。また、前記医薬品マスターには、単位量(単一)当たりの重量(裸錠)、PTPシート1枚当たりの重量、PTP上部1錠分の耳付き重量、PTP上部1錠分の耳なし重量、PTPシート1枚当たりの個数、及び薬品画像(裸薬、包装品)のファイル名称などの情報も含まれる。なお、PTPシートは、複数の錠剤又は複数のカプセルが個別に収容される包装材である。本実施形態では、PTPシートを例に挙げて説明するが、例えば所定量の錠剤又は粉薬が予め収容されたヒートシールも包装材の一例である。一方、前記患者マスターには、患者各々の患者コード、患者氏名、生年月日、及び性別などの情報が含まれる。

The storage unit 40 stores various databases such as a pharmaceutical master and a patient master. The medicine master and the patient master can be updated by interlocking with the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300. The medicine master includes medicine code, standard amount, host code, medicine name, medicine general name, JAN code, RSS code, YJ code (individual medicine code), GS1 code, medicine bottle code, dosage form code (powder, tablet) , Liquid medicine, topical medicine, etc.), form code, powerful medicine / managed medicine type (psychotropic drug, narcotic), management (vehicle height, safe, cold place, etc.), and unit (dispensing unit). In addition, the pharmaceutical master includes a weight per unit amount (single), a weight per PTP sheet, a weight with ears for one upper PTP tablet, a weight without ears for one upper PTP tablet, Information such as the number per PTP sheet and the file name of a medicine image (naked drug, packaged product) is also included. The PTP sheet is a packaging material in which a plurality of tablets or a plurality of capsules are individually accommodated. In this embodiment, a PTP sheet will be described as an example. For example, a heat seal in which a predetermined amount of tablets or powders are stored in advance is an example of a packaging material. Meanwhile, the patient master includes information such as the patient code, patient name, date of birth, and sex of each patient.

 なお、図14は、前記医薬品マスターを参照又は編集するためのマスターメンテナンス画面D13の一例を示す図である。前記制御部10は、ユーザー操作に応じて前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13を前記表示部20に表示させることが可能である。図14は、前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13に前記医薬品マスターが表示された状態を示している。また、前記制御部10は、ユーザー操作に応じて前記医薬品マスター及び前記患者マスターなどの内容を変更することも可能である。ところで、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100の電源投入時又は省電力モードからの復帰時などに、前記表示部20及び前記操作部30を用いて入力されるユーザーID及びパスワードなどに基づいてユーザー認証を実行することにより前記鑑査支援装置100の使用者を特定することが可能である。また、前記鑑査支援装置100において、前記制御部10は、ユーザー操作などに応じて予めユーザーごとの使用権限を設定することが可能である。例えば、ユーザーごとに、「一般」、「管理者」、「保守管理者」、「応援」、「研修」、及び「テクニシャン」などの権限種類を設定することが考えられる。そして、前記制御部10は、前記使用者として特定されたユーザーに対応する前記権限種類に応じて、前記鑑査支援装置100で実行可能な処理を変更することが考えられる。例えば、前記医薬品マスターの編集を行うマスターメンテナンス、日次更新の操作、鑑査履歴の照会操作などは、前記権限種類のうち「一般」、「管理者」、又は「保守管理者」のみによって実行可能である。また、ソフトウェアの設定、ハードウェアの設定、及びマザーマスター定期更新などは、前記権限種類のうち「管理者」又は「保守管理者」のみによって実行可能である。なお、前記マザーマスターは、例えば前記鑑査支援装置100のメーカー等から提供される薬品のデータベースである。また、前記権限種類によって各処理の一部のみを実行可能とすることも考えられる。例えば、前記ハードウェアの設定について、前記権限種類のうち「管理者」は天秤校正のみが使用可能であると設定されることが考えられる。また、前記制御部10が、前記権限種類ごとではなくユーザーごとに実行可能な処理を設定可能な構成も考えられる。

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a master maintenance screen D13 for referring to or editing the medicine master. The control unit 10 can display the master maintenance screen D13 on the display unit 20 according to a user operation. FIG. 14 shows a state where the drug master is displayed on the master maintenance screen D13. In addition, the control unit 10 can change the contents of the pharmaceutical master, the patient master, and the like according to a user operation. By the way, the control unit 10 is based on a user ID, a password, and the like input using the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 when the inspection support apparatus 100 is turned on or returned from the power saving mode. The user of the inspection support apparatus 100 can be specified by executing user authentication. Further, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 can set a use authority for each user in advance according to a user operation or the like. For example, it is conceivable to set authority types such as “general”, “manager”, “maintenance manager”, “support”, “training”, and “technician” for each user. And it is possible that the said control part 10 changes the process which can be performed with the said inspection assistance apparatus 100 according to the said authority kind corresponding to the user specified as the said user. For example, master maintenance for editing the pharmaceutical product master, daily update operation, inspection history inquiry operation, etc. can be executed only by “General”, “Administrator”, or “Maintenance Manager” among the above authority types It is. Also, software setting, hardware setting, mother master periodic update, and the like can be executed only by “manager” or “maintenance manager” of the authority types. The mother master is a drug database provided by, for example, the manufacturer of the inspection support apparatus 100. It is also conceivable that only a part of each process can be executed depending on the authority type. For example, regarding the setting of the hardware, it is conceivable that the “manager” of the authority types is set to use only balance calibration. A configuration is also conceivable in which the control unit 10 can set a process that can be executed for each user, not for each authority type.

 さらに、前記記憶部40には、前記制御部10によって実行される鑑査支援プログラムが記憶されている。前記鑑査支援プログラムは、例えば前記ネットワークN1を介してダウンロードされ、又はディスクドライブによって記録メディアから読み出されて前記記憶部40にインストールされる。そして、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って各種の処理を実行することにより、秤量特定部11、単位重量取得部12、単位換算処理部13、照合処理部14、目視鑑査処理部15、鑑査完了通知部16、表示処理部17、及び撮影処理部18として機能する。また、前記制御部10の一部又は全部は、ASIC等の電子回路であってもよい。なお、前記制御部10が有する各処理部の動作については後段のフローチャートと共に説明する。

Further, the storage unit 40 stores an inspection support program executed by the control unit 10. The inspection support program is downloaded via the network N1, for example, or read from a recording medium by a disk drive and installed in the storage unit 40. And the said control part 10 performs various processes according to the said inspection assistance program, The weighing specific part 11, the unit weight acquisition part 12, the unit conversion process part 13, the collation process part 14, the visual inspection process part 15, It functions as an inspection completion notification unit 16, a display processing unit 17, and a photographing processing unit 18. Further, part or all of the control unit 10 may be an electronic circuit such as an ASIC. In addition, operation | movement of each process part which the said control part 10 has is demonstrated with a flowchart of a back | latter stage.

 前記秤量装置50は、4つの秤量部51~54を備え、薬品の重量を秤量するために用いられる。前記秤量部51~54による秤量結果は、前記制御部10に入力される。以下、本実施形態では、説明の便宜上、不特定の前記秤量部51~54を示す場合に「秤量部5N」と称することがある。なお、本実施形態では、前記秤量装置50が、4つの秤量部51~54を備える構成を例に挙げて説明するが、前記秤量装置50は、少なくとも2つ以上の秤量部を備えるものであればよい。

The weighing device 50 includes four weighing units 51 to 54 and is used for weighing the weight of the medicine. The results of weighing by the weighing units 51 to 54 are input to the control unit 10. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the unspecified weighing units 51 to 54 may be referred to as “the weighing unit 5N”. In the present embodiment, the weighing device 50 will be described by taking as an example a configuration including four weighing units 51 to 54. However, the weighing device 50 may include at least two weighing units. That's fine.

 図2、図4及び図5に示すように、前記秤量部5Nは、秤量皿55、ロードセル56、及び載置部57を備える。なお、図4は、前記秤量皿55を取り外した状態を示す図、図5は、前記秤量皿55、前記載置部57、及び前記秤量装置50の上面501を取り外した状態を示す図である。

As shown in FIGS. 2, 4, and 5, the weighing unit 5 </ b> N includes a weighing pan 55, a load cell 56, and a placement unit 57. 4 is a view showing a state in which the weighing pan 55 has been removed, and FIG. 5 is a view showing a state in which the weighing pan 55, the placing portion 57, and the upper surface 501 of the weighing apparatus 50 have been removed. .

 前記秤量皿55は、前記載置部57に載置して用いられ、前記秤量皿55には、秤量対象の薬品が載置される。なお、前記秤量皿55各々は、図2に示すように、一方の対角線上の角部551と他方の対角線上の角部552との丸みの半径が異なる。具体的に、一対の前記角部551は、前記角部552に比べて半径が小さく、例えば一方の前記角部551はユーザーにより前記秤量皿55が持ち上げられる際に把持され、他方の前記角部551は前記秤量皿55上の薬品を薬袋に収容する際に前記薬袋に差し込まれる。なお、前記秤量皿55は、前記角部551及び前記角部552が同一半径の丸みを有する構成であってもよい。

The weighing pan 55 is used by being placed on the placement portion 57, and the weighing target chemical is placed on the weighing pan 55. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, each of the weighing dishes 55 has a different radius of roundness between a corner portion 551 on one diagonal line and a corner portion 552 on the other diagonal line. Specifically, the pair of corner portions 551 have a smaller radius than the corner portions 552. For example, one corner portion 551 is gripped when the weighing pan 55 is lifted by a user, and the other corner portion 551 is held. 551 is inserted into the medicine bag when the medicine on the weighing pan 55 is stored in the medicine bag. The weighing pan 55 may have a configuration in which the corner portion 551 and the corner portion 552 are rounded with the same radius.

 また、前記秤量皿55の底面と前記載置部57の上面とのいずれか一方又は両方に、前記秤量皿55の底面と前記載置部57の上面との摩擦抵抗を高めるための滑り止め部材が設けられていることが考えられる。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記載置部57に載置された前記秤量皿55の揺れが抑制され、前記秤量皿55を用いた秤量を安定して行うことができる。なお、前記秤量皿55に前記滑り止め部材が設けられる場合は、前記滑り止め部材は、前記秤量皿55の底面の一部又は全部に設けられる。同じく、前記載置部57に前記滑り止め部材が設けられる場合は、前記滑り止め部材は、前記載置部57の上面の一部又は全部に設けられる。さらに、前記滑り止め部材は、粘着性を有するシートであることが考えられる。これにより、前記滑り止め部材により前記秤量皿55と前記載置部57とが仮固定され、前記秤量皿55の揺れが更に抑制されるため、例えば前記秤量部5Nによる秤量が安定しない等の状況が回避される。なお、前記滑り止め部材は、後述の大皿58に設けられてもよい。

Further, an anti-slip member for increasing the frictional resistance between the bottom surface of the weighing pan 55 and the top surface of the mounting portion 57 on one or both of the bottom surface of the weighing pan 55 and the top surface of the mounting portion 57. Is considered to be provided. Thereby, in the said inspection assistance apparatus 100, the shaking of the said weighing pan 55 mounted in the said mounting part 57 is suppressed, and the weighing using the said weighing pan 55 can be performed stably. When the anti-slip member is provided on the weighing pan 55, the anti-slip member is provided on a part or all of the bottom surface of the weighing pan 55. Similarly, when the mounting member 57 is provided with the anti-slip member, the anti-slip member is provided on a part or all of the upper surface of the mounting unit 57. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the anti-slip member is an adhesive sheet. As a result, the weighing pan 55 and the placing portion 57 are temporarily fixed by the anti-slip member, and the shaking of the weighing pan 55 is further suppressed. For example, the weighing by the weighing portion 5N is not stable. Is avoided. The anti-slip member may be provided on a later-described platter 58.

 前記ロードセル56は、前記載置部57を支持しており、前記載置部57に載置される秤量対象物の重量を測定する荷重変換器である。前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記秤量皿55が前記載置部57に載置されることにより、前記秤量皿55に載置された薬品の重量が前記ロードセル56によって秤量される。前記ロードセル56としては、例えば定格容量が300g又は500gのように小さく秤量精度が高いロードセルが用いられる。なお、前記秤量皿55及び前記載置部57が一体に構成されていることも他の実施形態として考えられる。

The load cell 56 is a load converter that supports the placing portion 57 and measures the weight of the weighing object placed on the placing portion 57. In the inspection support apparatus 100, the weight of the medicine placed on the weighing dish 55 is weighed by the load cell 56 by placing the weighing dish 55 on the placement unit 57. As the load cell 56, for example, a load cell having a small rated capacity of 300 g or 500 g and high weighing accuracy is used. In addition, it is also possible as another embodiment that the weighing pan 55 and the placing portion 57 are integrally configured.

 前記載置部57は、前記ロードセル56によって支持されており、上面に前記秤量皿55が載置される。また、前記載置部57の上面には前記秤量皿55の底面を安定して載置するための凹部が形成されている。ところで、前記秤量装置50の上面501の下方において前記ロードセル56と前記載置部57とが連結され、前記載置部57に対応する大きなサイズの開口が前記上面501に形成されることも考えられる。しかしながら、この場合には、前記上面501と前記載置部57との間に幅の広い隙間が生じ、その隙間から内部に塵埃などが入りやすいという問題が生じる。これに対し、前記秤量装置50では、前記上面501の上方において前記ロードセル56と前記載置部57とが連結されており、前記上面501にはその連結箇所に対応する小さな開口が形成されている。これにより、前記秤量装置50では、前記上面501の開口から内部に塵埃などが入りにくい構造が実現される。

The placing portion 57 is supported by the load cell 56, and the weighing pan 55 is placed on the upper surface. In addition, a concave portion for stably placing the bottom surface of the weighing pan 55 is formed on the upper surface of the placing portion 57 described above. By the way, it is also conceivable that the load cell 56 and the mounting portion 57 are connected below the upper surface 501 of the weighing device 50, and a large-sized opening corresponding to the mounting portion 57 is formed in the upper surface 501. . However, in this case, a wide gap is generated between the upper surface 501 and the mounting portion 57, and there is a problem that dust or the like easily enters from the gap. On the other hand, in the weighing device 50, the load cell 56 and the mounting portion 57 are connected above the upper surface 501, and a small opening corresponding to the connection location is formed on the upper surface 501. . Thereby, in the weighing device 50, a structure in which dust or the like is difficult to enter from the opening of the upper surface 501 is realized.

 なお、前記秤量装置50では、前記ロードセル56による秤量結果に前記秤量皿55及び前記載置部57の重量が含まれる。そのため、前記制御部10は、前記ロードセル56を用いた秤量時に風袋引を実行し、前記ロードセル56の秤量結果から前記秤量皿55及び前記載置部57などの風袋重量を引いた値を前記秤量皿55に載置された薬品の秤量結果として取得する。なお、前記風袋重量は、前記鑑査支援装置100の出荷時に初期設定されているが、前記鑑査支援装置100でも任意のタイミングで前記風袋重量を再設定することが可能である。また、前述したように前記秤量皿55及び前記載置部57のいずれか一方又は両方に前記滑り止め部材が設けられる場合には、前記滑り止め部材の重量も前記風袋重量に含まれる。

In the weighing device 50, the results of weighing by the load cell 56 include the weights of the weighing pan 55 and the placing portion 57 described above. Therefore, the control unit 10 performs taring at the time of weighing using the load cell 56, and subtracts the tare weights of the weighing pan 55 and the placement unit 57 from the weighing result of the load cell 56 to determine the weighing. Obtained as a result of weighing the chemicals placed on the plate 55. The tare weight is initially set when the inspection support apparatus 100 is shipped, but the inspection support apparatus 100 can reset the tare weight at an arbitrary timing. As described above, when the anti-slip member is provided on one or both of the weighing pan 55 and the mounting portion 57, the weight of the anti-slip member is also included in the tare weight.

 また、図6に示すように、前記秤量装置50では、複数の前記秤量皿55に代えて前記秤量皿55よりもサイズの大きい大皿58(拡張載置部の一例)を用いて薬品の秤量を行うことが可能である。前記大皿58は、複数の前記秤量部51~54に亘って載置可能である。具体的に、前記大皿58の底面には複数の前記秤量部51~54の前記載置部57に対応する位置に凸部581が設けられている。そして、前記秤量装置50では、図4に示すように前記秤量皿55が取り外された後、図6に示すように前記大皿58の前記凸部581各々が複数の前記秤量部51~54の前記載置部57各々に載置される。これにより、例えば前記秤量部51~54の前記ロードセル56の定格容量が500gである場合、前記秤量装置50では、前記大皿58を用いることによって合計2.0kgまでの秤量が可能になる。また、前記大皿58は、複数の前記秤量皿55に代えて複数の前記秤量部51~54の前記載置部57に載置される利用形態に限らず、複数の前記秤量皿55が前記載置部57に載置されたままの状態で複数の前記秤量皿55に亘って載置されることも考えられる。これにより、ユーザーが前記秤量皿55各々を着脱する必要がないため利便性が向上する。なお、前記大皿58の前記凸部581と前記載置部57及び前記秤量皿55とは、前記大皿58が4つの前記秤量部51~54の前記載置部57又は前記秤量皿55に載置された状態で安定する形状を有する。

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, in the weighing apparatus 50, the weighing of the medicine is performed using a large plate 58 (an example of an extended placement unit) that is larger than the weighing plate 55 instead of the plurality of the weighing plates 55. Is possible. The platter 58 can be placed across the plurality of weighing units 51 to 54. Specifically, a convex portion 581 is provided on the bottom surface of the platter 58 at a position corresponding to the placement portion 57 of the plurality of weighing portions 51 to 54. In the weighing device 50, after the weighing pan 55 is removed as shown in FIG. 4, the convex portions 581 of the platter 58 are arranged in front of the plurality of weighing portions 51 to 54 as shown in FIG. It is placed on each of the placement units 57. Thus, for example, when the rated capacity of the load cell 56 of the weighing units 51 to 54 is 500 g, the weighing device 50 can weigh up to a total of 2.0 kg by using the platter 58. Further, the platter 58 is not limited to the usage form in which the platters 58 are placed on the placing units 57 of the weighing units 51 to 54 in place of the plurality of weighing pans 55, and the plurality of weighing pans 55 are described above. It is also conceivable that the plurality of weighing pans 55 are placed on the placing portion 57 while being placed on the placing portion 57. Thereby, since the user does not need to attach and detach each weighing pan 55, the convenience is improved. The convex portion 581 of the platter 58, the mounting portion 57, and the weighing pan 55 are placed on the mounting portion 57 of the four weighing portions 51 to 54 or the weighing pan 55. It has a shape that is stable in the applied state.

 さらに、前記大皿58内には、前記大皿58の中心位置を示す十字部582が形成されている。これにより、前記十字部582が、前記大皿58の中心に薬品をセットするための指標になり、ユーザーに対して前記大皿58の中心に薬品をセットすることを促すことができる。さらに、前記大皿58の中心に薬品が載置されていない場合には、前記大皿58から前記秤量部51~54に作用する荷重が偏り、前記秤量部51~54のいずれかの秤量値だけが定格容量を超えることが考えられる。例えば、前記秤量部51~54各々の定格容量が200gである場合に、前記大皿58に500gの薬品が載置された場合に、前記秤量部51~54のいずれか一つ又は複数の秤量値が定格容量である200gを超えるおそれがある。そのため、前記制御部10が、前記大皿58が使用される場合には、前記秤量部51~54各々による秤量値の差が予め定められた範囲を超えた場合、即ち荷重が均等に作用していない場合には、「中心に寄せてください」のような注意メッセージを表示させることが考えられる。

Further, a cross portion 582 indicating the center position of the platter 58 is formed in the platter 58. Accordingly, the cross portion 582 serves as an index for setting the medicine in the center of the platter 58, and can prompt the user to set the medicine in the center of the platter 58. Further, when no medicine is placed in the center of the platter 58, the load acting on the weighing units 51 to 54 from the platter 58 is biased, and only the weighing value of any of the weighing units 51 to 54 is obtained. It is possible to exceed the rated capacity. For example, when the rated capacity of each of the weighing units 51 to 54 is 200 g, and when 500 g of medicine is placed on the platter 58, one or more weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 are used. May exceed the rated capacity of 200 g. For this reason, when the platter 58 is used, the control unit 10 determines that the difference between the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 exceeds a predetermined range, that is, the load is applied evenly. If not, it is possible to display a caution message such as “Please bring it to the center”.

 また、前記十字部582が、前記秤量部51~54に均等に荷重が作用するように前記秤量部51~54の中心に前記大皿58をセットするための指標になり、ユーザーが前記大皿58を前記秤量部51~54の中心にセットしやすくなることも考えられる。なお、例えば前記秤量部51~54の中心位置を判断するための指標部が前記上面501に形成されていることも考えられ、この場合には、前記十字部582と前記指標部とを参照しつつ、前記大皿58を前記秤量部51~54の中心にセットすることがより容易となる。また、前記大皿58の内壁面には、前記大皿58の平面視における縦方向の中心位置及び横方向の中心位置を示す凹部583が形成されている。そのため、前記十字部582が前記大皿58内の薬品で隠れた場合であっても、前記凹部583を参照して前記大皿58の中心位置を推測することができ、ユーザーが前記大皿58を前記秤量部51~54の中心にセットしやすくなる。さらに、前記制御部10が、前記撮影部70によって前記大皿58が撮影された場合に、その撮影画像に含まれる前記十字部582又は前記凹部583の位置及び形状に基づいて前記大皿58の中心位置を検出することが可能である。例えば、前記制御部10は、前記大皿58の中心位置が予め定められた範囲から外れている場合に前記表示部20に警告表示を行うことが考えられる。

Further, the cross portion 582 serves as an index for setting the platter 58 at the center of the weighing units 51 to 54 so that a load is applied to the weighing units 51 to 54 evenly. It is also conceivable that it can be easily set at the center of the weighing parts 51 to 54. For example, it is conceivable that an index part for determining the center positions of the weighing parts 51 to 54 is formed on the upper surface 501, and in this case, referring to the cross part 582 and the index part. However, it becomes easier to set the platter 58 at the center of the weighing parts 51 to 54. In addition, a concave portion 583 is formed on the inner wall surface of the platter 58 to indicate a vertical center position and a horizontal center position of the platter 58 in plan view. Therefore, even if the cross portion 582 is hidden by the medicine in the platter 58, the center position of the platter 58 can be estimated with reference to the recess 583, and the user can measure the platter 58 in the weighing mode. It becomes easy to set in the center of the parts 51 to 54. Further, when the platter 58 is photographed by the photographing unit 70, the control unit 10 determines the center position of the platter 58 based on the position and shape of the cross portion 582 or the concave portion 583 included in the photographed image. Can be detected. For example, the control unit 10 may display a warning on the display unit 20 when the center position of the platter 58 is out of a predetermined range.

 前記情報読取部60は、バーコード(JAN、GS1)等の一次元コード又はQRコード(登録商標)等の二次元コードのような識別情報を読取可能であり、読み取られた前記識別情報を前記制御部10に入力するバーコードリーダーである。

The information reading unit 60 can read identification information such as a one-dimensional code such as a barcode (JAN, GS1) or a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark). It is a barcode reader that is input to the control unit 10.

 具体的に、前記情報読取部60は、処方データを識別するために薬袋に記載されている識別情報(以下「処方識別情報」と称する)を読み取る際に用いられる。前記処方識別情報は、前記調剤支援システム200によって前記薬袋に印刷される。例えば、前記処方識別情報には、前記処方データ及び前記処方データに含まれる同一の前記薬袋に収容されるべき同一用法単位の処方データ(以下、Rpデータと称する)を識別するための処方番号及びRp番号などが含まれる。なお、前記処方識別情報は、前記処方データ及び前記Rpデータを識別することが可能な情報であればオーダー情報などの他の情報であってもよい。

Specifically, the information reading unit 60 is used when reading identification information (hereinafter referred to as “prescription identification information”) written on a medicine bag in order to identify prescription data. The prescription identification information is printed on the medicine bag by the dispensing support system 200. For example, in the prescription identification information, a prescription number for identifying the prescription data and prescription data (hereinafter referred to as Rp data) of the same usage unit to be stored in the same medicine bag included in the prescription data, and Rp number and the like are included. The prescription identification information may be other information such as order information as long as the prescription data and the Rp data can be identified.

 また、前記情報読取部60は、薬品を識別するために分包紙又はPTPシートなどの薬品の包装材に記載されている識別情報(以下「薬品識別情報」と称する)を読み取るためにも用いられる。前記薬品識別情報は、例えばJANコード、RSSコード、YJコード、又はGS1コードなどである。

The information reading unit 60 is also used to read identification information (hereinafter referred to as “medicine identification information”) written on a packaging material of medicine such as wrapping paper or PTP sheet in order to identify the medicine. It is done. The medicine identification information is, for example, a JAN code, RSS code, YJ code, or GS1 code.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記処方識別情報が前記薬袋から前記情報読取部60によって読み取られた場合に、前記処方識別情報に対応する処方データを前記記憶部40から取得することが可能である。また、前記制御部10は、前記薬品識別情報が前記包装材から前記情報読取部60によって読み取られた場合に、前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品の種類を前記医薬品マスターに基づいて特定することが可能である。さらに、前記制御部10は、作業者による後述の処方表示領域A15(図8参照)における薬品の選択操作に応じて、前記医薬品マスターに予め登録されている薬品のいずれかを選択することも可能である。なお、薬品の種類には、規格量が異なる同一薬品も異なる種類の薬品として含まれる。例えば、「メマリー錠5mg」、「メマリー錠10mg」、及び「メマリー錠20mg」は、薬品名が同じであるが規格量が異なるため、それぞれ異なる種類の薬品として扱われる。

And the said control part 10 can acquire the prescription data corresponding to the said prescription identification information from the said memory | storage part 40, when the said prescription identification information is read by the said information reading part 60 from the said medicine bag. . Moreover, the said control part 10 specifies the kind of chemical | medical agent corresponding to the said chemical | medical agent identification information based on the said pharmaceutical master, when the said chemical | drug | medicine identification information is read by the said information reading part 60 from the said packaging material. Is possible. Furthermore, the control unit 10 can select any one of the medicines registered in advance in the medicine master in accordance with a medicine selection operation in a prescription display area A15 (see FIG. 8) described later by the operator. It is. In addition, in the kind of chemical | medical agent, the same chemical | medical agent from which standard amount differs is also included as a different kind of chemical | medical agent. For example, “Memary Tablets 5 mg”, “Memary Tablets 10 mg”, and “Memary Tablets 20 mg” have the same drug name but different standard amounts and are therefore treated as different types of drugs.

 前記撮影部70は、図2に示すように、カメラ本体部710と前記カメラ本体部710を保持する保持部材720とを備える。前記カメラ本体部710は、被写体の静止画又は動画を撮影するために用いられるデジタルカメラである。前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記制御部10からの制御指示に従って前記撮影部70による画像撮影が行われ、撮影画像が前記撮影部70から前記制御部10に送信される。なお、前記撮影部70で捉えられる撮影範囲の動画情報が前記制御部10に入力され、前記制御部10によって前記動画情報から静止画が取得されることも考えられる。この場合には、前記制御部10では、前記撮影部70の撮影範囲内の状況を前記動画情報に基づいて随時判断することができる。

As shown in FIG. 2, the photographing unit 70 includes a camera body 710 and a holding member 720 that holds the camera body 710. The camera body 710 is a digital camera used for taking a still image or a moving image of a subject. In the inspection support device 100, an image is taken by the photographing unit 70 in accordance with a control instruction from the control unit 10, and a photographed image is transmitted from the photographing unit 70 to the control unit 10. Note that it is also conceivable that moving image information of the shooting range captured by the shooting unit 70 is input to the control unit 10 and a still image is acquired from the moving image information by the control unit 10. In this case, the control unit 10 can determine the situation within the shooting range of the shooting unit 70 at any time based on the moving image information.

 ここで、前記撮影部70は、前記秤量装置50の前記秤量部51~54と前記表示部20とを同時に撮影可能な位置及び向きで配置されていることが考えられる。ところで、前記撮影部70では、前記カメラ本体部710に設けられた連結部711が前記保持部材720で保持されることにより、前記カメラ本体部710が前記保持部材720で保持されている。このとき、前記保持部材720は、前記カメラ本体部710による撮影範囲を予め定められた所定範囲(例えば1mm程度)で調整可能な状態で前記カメラ本体部710を保持している。例えば、前記保持部材720は、前記カメラ本体部710の連結部711を保持する保持部を所定幅の範囲で揺動可能な揺動機構を有する。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記保持部材720で保持されている前記カメラ本体部710の向きを微調整することにより前記撮影部70で撮影される撮影範囲を容易に調整することが可能である。また、前記撮影部70は、少なくとも前記秤量部51~54を撮影可能であればよく、前記表示部20が撮影範囲に含まれないことも他の実施形態として考えられる。さらに、前記撮影部70は、前記カバー部材90に固定されていてもよい。

Here, it is conceivable that the photographing unit 70 is arranged at a position and orientation in which the weighing units 51 to 54 of the weighing device 50 and the display unit 20 can be photographed simultaneously. By the way, in the photographing unit 70, the camera body 710 is held by the holding member 720 by holding the connecting portion 711 provided in the camera body 710 by the holding member 720. At this time, the holding member 720 holds the camera body 710 in a state where the shooting range by the camera body 710 can be adjusted within a predetermined range (for example, about 1 mm). For example, the holding member 720 includes a swing mechanism that can swing a holding portion that holds the connecting portion 711 of the camera main body 710 within a range of a predetermined width. Thereby, in the inspection support device 100, it is possible to easily adjust the photographing range photographed by the photographing unit 70 by finely adjusting the direction of the camera main body 710 held by the holding member 720. It is. The photographing unit 70 only needs to be able to photograph at least the weighing units 51 to 54, and it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the display unit 20 is not included in the photographing range. Further, the photographing unit 70 may be fixed to the cover member 90.

 なお、図2に示すように、前記撮影部70は、前記保持部材720が支持アーム71に固定されることによって前記支持アーム71に支持されており、前記支持アーム71は回動支持部72を介して支持アーム73に回動可能に連結されている。これにより、ユーザーは、前記支持アーム71を回動させて前記撮影部70の撮影範囲を微調整することも可能である。一方、前記支持アーム73は前記秤量装置50に固定されている。また、前記支持アーム73が前記秤量装置50に回動可能に支持されており、前記カバー部材90を閉じる際に前記支持アーム73を回動させてコンパクトに折り畳み可能な構成も他の実施形態として考えられる。

As shown in FIG. 2, the photographing unit 70 is supported by the support arm 71 by fixing the holding member 720 to the support arm 71, and the support arm 71 supports the rotation support unit 72. Via the support arm 73, the support arm 73 is rotatably connected. Accordingly, the user can finely adjust the shooting range of the shooting unit 70 by rotating the support arm 71. On the other hand, the support arm 73 is fixed to the weighing device 50. In another embodiment, the support arm 73 is rotatably supported by the weighing device 50 and can be folded compactly by rotating the support arm 73 when the cover member 90 is closed. Conceivable.

[鑑査支援処理]

 以下、図7のフローチャートを参照しつつ、前記鑑査支援装置100において、前記制御部10が前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って実行する鑑査支援処理の手順の一例について説明する。具体的に、前記鑑査支援処理は、前記鑑査支援装置100の電源投入、又は省電力モードからの復帰により前記制御部10によって開始される。また、前記鑑査支援処理は、前記鑑査支援装置100がシャットダウンされる際、又は所定時間以上操作がなく省電力モードに移行する際に終了する。なお、前記鑑査支援装置100の電源投入時又は省電力モードからの復帰時、前記制御部10は、前記表示部20及び前記操作部30を用いたユーザーID及びパスワードなどの入力によるユーザー認証を実行することにより前記鑑査支援装置100の使用者を特定する。

[Inspection support processing]

Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of inspection support processing executed by the control unit 10 in accordance with the inspection support program in the inspection support apparatus 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Specifically, the inspection support process is started by the control unit 10 when the inspection support apparatus 100 is turned on or returned from the power saving mode. The inspection support process ends when the inspection support apparatus 100 is shut down or when there is no operation for a predetermined time or more and the mode is shifted to the power saving mode. When the inspection support device 100 is turned on or returned from the power saving mode, the control unit 10 performs user authentication by inputting a user ID and a password using the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30. Thus, the user of the inspection support apparatus 100 is specified.

<ステップS11>

 まず、ステップS11において、前記制御部10は、前記表示部20に予め定められた処方鑑査画面D10を表示させる。ここに、図8は、前記処方鑑査画面D10の一例を示す図である。図8に示すように、前記処方鑑査画面D10には、未処理情報キーK11、分包紙選択キーK12、目視鑑査キーK13、大皿使用キーK14、風袋引キーK15、メニューキーK16、鑑査完了キーK17、撮影キーK18、及び画像表示キーK19などの操作キーが表示される。また、前記処方鑑査画面D10には、秤量表示領域A11~A14及び処方表示領域A15が表示される。なお、前記処方鑑査画面D10には、前記ユーザー認証によって認証されたユーザーの名称も認証者として表示される。また、前記制御部10は、例えばユーザーの名称の近傍が操作された場合に、前記ユーザー認証を再度行うための認証画面を表示させ、その後のユーザーID及びパスワードなどの入力に応じて認証者を切り替えることが可能である。

<Step S11>

First, in step S11, the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display a predetermined prescription inspection screen D10. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the prescription inspection screen D10. As shown in FIG. 8, the prescription inspection screen D10 includes an unprocessed information key K11, a wrapping paper selection key K12, a visual inspection key K13, a platter use key K14, a tare key K15, a menu key K16, and an inspection completion key. Operation keys such as K17, shooting key K18, and image display key K19 are displayed. The prescription inspection screen D10 displays weighing display areas A11 to A14 and a prescription display area A15. In the prescription inspection screen D10, the name of the user authenticated by the user authentication is also displayed as the authenticator. Further, the control unit 10 displays an authentication screen for performing the user authentication again when, for example, the vicinity of the user's name is operated, and the certifier is selected according to the subsequent input of the user ID and password. It is possible to switch.

 前記未処理情報キーK11は、前記処方鑑査画面D10に鑑査が完了していない未処理の処方データの一覧を表示させるための操作キーである。前記制御部10は、前記未処理情報キーK11の操作に応じて、図9に示すように、未処理の処方データの一覧が示される未処理表示領域A21を前記処方鑑査画面D10に表示させる。前記未処理表示領域A21には、未処理の処方データを識別するための情報として、処方日、患者名、総Rp数、及び引換券番号などの情報が一覧表示される。

The unprocessed information key K11 is an operation key for displaying a list of unprocessed prescription data for which inspection has not been completed on the prescription inspection screen D10. In response to the operation of the unprocessed information key K11, the control unit 10 displays an unprocessed display area A21 in which a list of unprocessed prescription data is displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 as shown in FIG. In the unprocessed display area A21, information such as a prescription date, a patient name, the total number of Rp, and a voucher number is displayed as a list as information for identifying unprocessed prescription data.

 なお、前記未処理表示領域A21には、検索操作領域A22及び詳細表示キーK21が表示されている。前記制御部10は、前記検索操作領域A22で選択された項目及び前記検索操作領域A22で入力された入力文字に応じて前記処方データを検索し、検索結果を表示させる。例えば、図9は、前記検索操作領域A22で「日付」の項目が選択され、「20131130」の文字が入力されている場合の表示例を示しており、前記未処理表示領域A21には、処方日が2013年11月30日の処方データの一覧が検索結果として表示されている。一方、前記制御部10は、前記詳細表示キーK21が操作されると、前記詳細表示キーK21が表示されている箇所の処方データについて詳細情報を表示させる。前記詳細情報には、例えば処方データに含まれる一又は複数の同一用法単位のRpデータのそれぞれの内容(薬品名称、用法、1日量など)が含まれる。なお、前記Rpデータ各々には、用法が同一であって同一の薬袋に収容される1種類又は複数種類の処方薬品の情報が含まれる。

In the unprocessed display area A21, a search operation area A22 and a detail display key K21 are displayed. The control unit 10 searches the prescription data according to the item selected in the search operation area A22 and the input characters input in the search operation area A22, and displays the search results. For example, FIG. 9 shows a display example when the item “date” is selected in the search operation area A22 and the character “20131130” is input. A list of prescription data whose date is November 30, 2013 is displayed as a search result. On the other hand, when the detail display key K21 is operated, the control unit 10 displays detailed information on the prescription data at the location where the detail display key K21 is displayed. The detailed information includes, for example, each content of Rp data of one or more same usage units included in the prescription data (medicine name, usage, daily dose, etc.). Each of the Rp data includes information on one or more types of prescription drugs that have the same usage and are contained in the same medicine bag.

 図8に戻り、前記分包紙選択キーK12は、前記情報読取部60によって分包紙から薬品識別情報が読み取られたとき、前記薬品識別情報に予め設定された特定情報が含まれていない場合に、分包紙の秤量の際に使用する前記分包紙の種類を指定するための操作キーである。例えば、前記分包紙の種類には、セロポリ及びグラシンごとに60mm、70mm、76mm、80mm、90mmなどの10種類がある。前記制御部10は、前記分包紙選択キーK12の操作に応じて、予め登録された複数の分包紙を選択候補として表示させ、その中から選択された分包紙に対応して予め設定された重量を後述の秤量鑑査処理で使用する分包紙の重量として設定する。なお、前記特定情報は、例えば前記分包紙を用いた分包処理が実行される錠剤分包機又は散薬分包機などの調剤機器において、前記分包紙の重量が既知であり、前記薬品識別情報に含まれる分包紙1包当たりの重量又は全ての分包紙の総重量に分包紙の重量が含まれているか否かを判断するための情報である。例えば、前記特定情報は、前記錠剤分包機又は前記散薬分包機のメーカーを特定するための情報である。

Returning to FIG. 8, when the medicine identification information is read from the packaging paper by the information reading unit 60, the packaging paper selection key K <b> 12 does not include preset specific information. And an operation key for designating the type of the wrapping paper used when weighing the wrapping paper. For example, there are 10 types of wrapping paper such as 60 mm, 70 mm, 76 mm, 80 mm, and 90 mm for each cellopoly and glassine. The control unit 10 displays a plurality of pre-registered wrapping papers as selection candidates according to the operation of the wrapping paper selection key K12, and presets corresponding to the wrapping paper selected from among them. The weight thus determined is set as the weight of the wrapping paper used in the weighing inspection process described later. The specific information is, for example, in a dispensing device such as a tablet packaging machine or a powder medicine packaging machine in which a packaging process using the packaging paper is performed, and the weight of the packaging paper is known, and the medicine identification information Is information for determining whether or not the weight of the wrapping paper is included in the weight per wrapping paper included in or the total weight of all the wrapping papers. For example, the specific information is information for specifying a manufacturer of the tablet packing machine or the powder packing machine.

 前記目視鑑査キーK13は、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている前記処方データについて目視鑑査処理を実行するための操作キーである。前記制御部10は、前記処方データに含まれる一又は複数の薬品が選択された状態で前記目視鑑査キーK13が操作された場合に、図10に示すように、前記処方表示領域A15で選択されている前記薬品各々について目視鑑査を実行するための目視鑑査画面D11を前記表示部20に表示させる。図10に示すように、前記目視鑑査画面D11には、前記薬品ごとに対応して薬品情報表示領域A31、薬品画像表示領域A32、目標値表示領域A33、及び鑑査時入力領域A34が表示されている。

The visual inspection key K13 is an operation key for executing a visual inspection process on the prescription data displayed in the prescription display area A15. When the visual inspection key K13 is operated in a state where one or more medicines included in the prescription data are selected, the control unit 10 is selected in the prescription display area A15 as shown in FIG. A visual inspection screen D <b> 11 for performing visual inspection for each of the medicines being displayed is displayed on the display unit 20. As shown in FIG. 10, the visual inspection screen D11 displays a medicine information display area A31, a medicine image display area A32, a target value display area A33, and an inspection time input area A34 corresponding to each medicine. Yes.

 具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記処方表示画面D10で選択されていた目視鑑査対象薬品の薬品名称などを処方データ又はRpデータから読み出して前記薬品情報表示領域31に表示する。また、前記制御部10は、前記目視鑑査対象薬品の薬品画像を前記医薬品マスターから読み出して前記薬品画像表示領域A32に表示する。さらに、前記制御部10は、前記目視鑑査対象薬品の目標値を処方データ又はRpデータから読み出して表示する。なお、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査時入力領域A34に入力される数値を前記目視鑑査対象薬品に対応付けて鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記憶させる。ここで、前記鑑査時入力領域A34に表示される「錠」、「g」、「包」、「カプセル」などの単位は、前記医薬品マスターで薬品ごとに予め設定された単位である。なお、前記目視鑑査画面D11に全ての前記目視鑑査対象薬品が表示できない場合、前記制御部10は、前記目視鑑査画面D11における左右のフリック操作、又は矢印キーの操作に応じて、前記目視鑑査対象薬品の表示をスクロールして表示させる。

Specifically, the control unit 10 reads the medicine name of the medicine to be visually inspected selected on the prescription display screen D10 from the prescription data or Rp data and displays it in the medicine information display area 31. Moreover, the said control part 10 reads the chemical | medical agent image of the said visual inspection object chemical | medical agent from the said pharmaceutical master, and displays it on the said chemical | medical agent image display area A32. Furthermore, the said control part 10 reads the target value of the said visual inspection object chemical | medical agent from prescription data or Rp data, and displays it. In addition, the said control part 10 matches the numerical value input into the said input area A34 at the time of inspection with the said chemical | medical agent for visual inspection, and memorize | stores it in the said memory | storage part 40 as inspection history. Here, the units such as “lock”, “g”, “pack”, “capsule” and the like displayed in the inspection input area A34 are units set in advance for each medicine in the pharmaceutical master. In addition, when all the said visual inspection object chemical | medical agents cannot be displayed on the said visual inspection screen D11, the said control part 10 is the said visual inspection object according to the left and right flick operation in the said visual inspection screen D11, or operation of an arrow key. Scroll the medicine display.

 そして、前記目視鑑査画面D11において、確認キーK31が操作されると、前記制御部10は、前記目視鑑査画面D11に表示中の前記目視鑑査対象薬品の目視鑑査が終了したものとして処理し、前記記憶部40に鑑査履歴として記憶する。このように、前記目視鑑査処理では、前記目視鑑査対象薬品の薬品名称、薬品画像及び目標値などの情報が前記目視鑑査画面D11に表示されるため、ユーザーは前記目視鑑査画面D11を参照して前記目視鑑査対象薬品の目視鑑査を容易に行うことができる。

When the confirmation key K31 is operated on the visual inspection screen D11, the control unit 10 processes that the visual inspection of the visual inspection target medicine being displayed on the visual inspection screen D11 is completed, and It memorize | stores in the memory | storage part 40 as inspection history. Thus, in the visual inspection process, information such as the drug name, drug image, and target value of the drug to be visually inspected is displayed on the visual inspection screen D11. Therefore, the user refers to the visual inspection screen D11. Visual inspection of the visual inspection target chemical can be easily performed.

 また、図8に戻り、前記大皿使用キーK14は、前記大皿58を用いて前記秤量鑑査処理を実行するための操作キーである。前記制御部10は、前記大皿使用キーK14の操作に応じて、図11に示すように、前記秤量表示領域A11~A14に代えて、1つの秤量表示領域A41を前記処方鑑査画面D10に表示させる。なお、前記制御部10は、例えば前記秤量表示領域A11~A14をグレーアウトすること又は非表示にすることが考えられる。前記秤量表示領域A41には、前記秤量部51~54の全ての秤量値の合計が秤量結果として表示される。また、前記秤量表示領域A41には、後述の秤量鑑査処理において、前記大皿58を用いたときの秤量結果と前記処方データとの照合結果が表示される。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記秤量皿55各々で秤量が困難な多量の薬品又はサイズが大きい薬品でも、前記大皿58を用いて秤量鑑査を実行することが可能である。

Returning to FIG. 8, the platter use key K <b> 14 is an operation key for executing the weighing inspection process using the platter 58. In response to the operation of the platter use key K14, the control unit 10 displays one weighing display area A41 on the prescription inspection screen D10 instead of the weighing display areas A11 to A14 as shown in FIG. . Note that, for example, the control unit 10 may gray out or hide the weighing display areas A11 to A14. In the weighing display area A41, the total of all weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 is displayed as a weighing result. Further, in the weighing display area A41, a matching result between the weighing result when the platter 58 is used and the prescription data is displayed in the weighing inspection process described later. Accordingly, the inspection support apparatus 100 can execute the weighing inspection using the platter 58 even with a large amount of medicine that is difficult to weigh in each of the weighing dishes 55 or a medicine with a large size.

 前記風袋引キーK15は、前記秤量装置50における前記秤量部51~54各々に対応する風袋引の風袋重量の設定値を更新する風袋引処理の開始操作に用いられる。例えば、ユーザーは、前記大皿58を使用する際に、前記大皿58を前記秤量部51~54に載置してから前記風袋引キーK15を操作する。これにより、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54各々の現在の秤量値を前記秤量部51~54各々の風袋重量として設定する。従って、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54で秤量される秤量値から前記風袋重量を引くことにより、前記秤量皿58に載置された薬品の重量を秤量することが可能になる。このとき、前記秤量皿55各々の上に重ねて前記大皿58が載置される場合には、風袋重量に4つの前記秤量皿55の重量も含まれることになる。なお、前記大皿58から前記秤量皿55に変更される場合にも前記風袋引キーK15が操作されて前記秤量皿55に対応する風袋重量が設定される。

The tare key K15 is used for a taring process start operation for updating the set value of the tare weight of the tare weight corresponding to each of the weighing units 51 to 54 in the weighing device 50. For example, when using the platter 58, the user operates the tare key K15 after placing the platter 58 on the weighing units 51-54. Accordingly, the control unit 10 sets the current weighing value of each of the weighing units 51 to 54 as the tare weight of each of the weighing units 51 to 54. Therefore, the control unit 10 can weigh the chemical placed on the weighing pan 58 by subtracting the tare weight from the weighing value weighed by the weighing units 51 to 54. At this time, when the platter 58 is placed on each of the weighing dishes 55, the weight of the four weighing dishes 55 is included in the tare weight. Even when the platter 58 is changed to the weighing pan 55, the tare weight key K15 is operated to set the tare weight corresponding to the weighing pan 55.

 前記メニューキーK16は、前記鑑査支援装置100の各種機能のメニューを表示させるための操作キーである。前記制御部10は、前記メニューキーK16の操作に応じて、初期設定、マスター登録、環境設定、ソフトウェアのバージョン更新、又は履歴照会などの操作を行うためのメニュー画面を表示させる。

The menu key K16 is an operation key for displaying a menu of various functions of the inspection support apparatus 100. The control unit 10 displays a menu screen for performing operations such as initial setting, master registration, environment setting, software version update, or history inquiry according to the operation of the menu key K16.

 前記鑑査完了キーK17は、前記鑑査支援装置100において、前記処方鑑査画面D10に現在表示されているRpデータのうち鑑査が完了していない薬品について、後述の目視鑑査処理又は秤量鑑査処理を実行することなく鑑査を終了させる際に操作される。前記制御部10は、前記鑑査完了キーK17の操作に応じて、前記処方鑑査画面D10に現在表示されているRpデータのうち鑑査が完了していない薬品についても鑑査を完了とし、その履歴を前記記憶部40に記憶した後、前記Rpデータの鑑査を終了する。これにより、薬剤師が目視により適正であると判断可能な未鑑査の薬品が残っている場合でも、前記鑑査完了キーK17を操作して表示中の前記Rpデータの鑑査を完了させることにより、鑑査業務の迅速化を図ることが可能である。なお、前記鑑査完了キーK17が操作されることにより鑑査が強制的に完了とされた場合、前記制御部10は、前記表示部20に鑑査が完了した旨を示す鑑査完了画面を表示させることが考えられる。前記鑑査完了画面では、前記Rpデータのうち後述の秤量鑑査処理で鑑査された秤量鑑査済み薬品には予め定められた第1色のチェックマークが付され、後述の目視鑑査処理で鑑査された目視鑑査済み薬品には前記第1色とは異なる予め定められ第2色のチェックマークが付される。また、前記Rpデータのうち前記秤量鑑査処理又は前記目視鑑査処理で鑑査されていない未鑑査薬品については、前記秤量鑑査済み薬品及び前記目視鑑査済み薬品と区別可能な態様(例えばチェックマークなし)で表示される。なお、前記鑑査完了画面では、前記鑑査完了画面で前記秤量鑑査済み薬品、前記目視鑑査済み、及び前記未鑑査薬品を区別することができればよく、例えば各々の背景色が異なるものであってもよい。

The inspection completion key K17 executes a visual inspection process or a weighing inspection process, which will be described later, for a drug whose inspection has not been completed among the Rp data currently displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 in the inspection support apparatus 100. It is operated when the inspection is completed without any problem. In response to the operation of the inspection completion key K17, the control unit 10 completes the inspection of medicines that have not been inspected among the Rp data currently displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10, and records the history thereof as described above. After memorize | storing in the memory | storage part 40, the inspection of the said Rp data is complete | finished. As a result, even if unexamined medicine that can be judged visually appropriate by the pharmacist remains, the inspection service is completed by operating the inspection completion key K17 to complete the inspection of the displayed Rp data. It is possible to speed up the process. When the inspection is forcibly completed by operating the inspection completion key K17, the control unit 10 may display an inspection completion screen indicating that the inspection is completed on the display unit 20. Conceivable. In the inspection completion screen, a predetermined first color check mark is attached to the weighed and inspected medicine inspected in the later-described weighing inspection process in the Rp data, and the visual inspection performed in the later-described visual inspection process. The inspected medicine is given a predetermined second color check mark different from the first color. Moreover, about the uninspected medicine which is not inspected by the said weighing inspection process or the said visual inspection process among the said Rp data, in the aspect (for example, there is no check mark) which can be distinguished from the said weighing inspection medicine and the said visual inspection medicine. Is displayed. In the inspection completion screen, it is only necessary to distinguish the medicines weighed, the visual inspections, and the uninspected medicines on the inspection completion screen. For example, each background color may be different. .

 前記撮影キーK18は、前記撮影部70による撮影画像を記録するための操作キーである。前記制御部10は、前記撮影キーK18の操作に応じて前記撮影部70に画像の撮影を実行させる。そして、前記制御部10は、撮影画像を前記処方鑑査画面D10に現在表示されているRpデータが属する処方データに関連付けて鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記録する。これにより、前記制御部10は、前記記憶部40に記憶された前記撮影画像を前記処方データごとに表示させることが可能である。なお、前記制御部10が、前記撮影画像をRpデータごとに関連付けて前記記憶部40に記憶させることも他の実施形態として考えられる。また、他の使用方法として、前記鑑査支援装置100を用いた薬品の鑑査が完了した後に、ユーザーにより、その鑑査の対象であった処方データに対応する処方箋、薬袋、及び薬品が、前記秤量装置50の上面501のような前記撮影部70の撮影範囲内に載置されてから前記撮影キーK18が操作されることが考えられる。これにより、前記撮影部70により前記処方箋、前記薬袋、及び前記薬品が撮影され、その撮影画像が前記処方データに関連付けて鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記録されることになる。

The photographing key K18 is an operation key for recording a photographed image by the photographing unit 70. The control unit 10 causes the photographing unit 70 to take an image in response to an operation of the photographing key K18. Then, the control unit 10 records the captured image in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history in association with the prescription data to which the Rp data currently displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 belongs. Thereby, the said control part 10 can display the said picked-up image memorize | stored in the said memory | storage part 40 for every said prescription data. In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the control unit 10 associates the captured image with each Rp data and stores it in the storage unit 40. Further, as another usage method, after the inspection of the medicine using the inspection support device 100 is completed, the prescription, the medicine bag, and the medicine corresponding to the prescription data that is the object of the inspection are obtained by the user. It is conceivable that the photographing key K18 is operated after being placed within the photographing range of the photographing unit 70 such as the upper surface 501 of 50. Accordingly, the prescription, the medicine bag, and the medicine are photographed by the photographing unit 70, and the photographed image is recorded in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history in association with the prescription data.

 ここに、図12は、前記鑑査支援装置100における鑑査履歴を参照するための鑑査履歴照会画面D12の一例を示す図である。前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12には、前記記憶部40に記憶されている鑑査履歴を抽出するための条件が入力可能な抽出条件表示領域A51、抽出結果を表示する一覧表示領域A52、及び前記一覧表示領域A52で選択された鑑査履歴の内容が表示される履歴内容表示領域A53が表示されている。具体的に、前記抽出条件表示領域A51では、鑑査期間(鑑査日時)、処方日、患者名、薬品名、薬剤師名、及び黄色判定有無の入力が可能である。そして、前記制御部10は、前記抽出条件表示領域A51で入力された条件に合致する鑑査履歴を前記記憶部40から読み出して前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12に一覧表示する。なお、前記履歴内容表示領域A53において、目標欄には、処方データに対応する薬品の目標値(錠、カプセル、枚などの値)が表示され、鑑査欄には、前記鑑査支援装置100で秤量された薬品の秤量値を薬品の単位に換算した換算値(錠、カプセル、枚などの値)が表示される。但し、処方薬品のうち後述の目視鑑査処理で鑑査が行われた薬品の鑑査欄には「目視」の文字が表示される。また、前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12では、前記一覧表示領域A52で選択された処方データの鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記憶された前記撮影部70による撮影画像のサムネイル画像が前記処方鑑査画面D10と同様に前記画像表示キーK19として表示されている。なお、前記撮影部70により前記処方箋、前記薬袋、及び前記薬品が撮影されていた場合には、その撮影画像のサムネイル画像も前記画像表示キーK19として表示される。前記制御部10は、前記画像表示キーK19の操作に応じて、前記画像表示キーK19に対応する前記撮影画像を前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12上に拡大表示させる。

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an inspection history inquiry screen D12 for referring to the inspection history in the inspection support device 100. In the inspection history inquiry screen D12, an extraction condition display area A51 in which conditions for extracting the inspection history stored in the storage unit 40 can be input, a list display area A52 for displaying extraction results, and the list display A history content display area A53 is displayed in which the contents of the inspection history selected in the area A52 are displayed. Specifically, in the extraction condition display area A51, it is possible to input an inspection period (inspection date / time), a prescription date, a patient name, a medicine name, a pharmacist name, and whether or not yellow is determined. And the said control part 10 reads the inspection log | history corresponding to the conditions input in the said extraction condition display area A51 from the said memory | storage part 40, and displays it as a list on the said inspection log | history inquiry screen D12. In the history content display area A53, the target column displays target values (values of tablets, capsules, sheets, etc.) corresponding to the prescription data, and the inspection column is weighed by the inspection support apparatus 100. A converted value (value of tablets, capsules, sheets, etc.) obtained by converting the measured weight value of the medicine into the unit of medicine is displayed. However, the word “visually” is displayed in the inspection column of the medicines that have been inspected by the visual inspection process described below among the prescription medicines. In the inspection history inquiry screen D12, thumbnail images of images taken by the photographing unit 70 stored in the storage unit 40 as the inspection history of the prescription data selected in the list display area A52 are displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10. Similarly, it is displayed as the image display key K19. When the prescription, the medicine bag, and the medicine are photographed by the photographing unit 70, a thumbnail image of the photographed image is also displayed as the image display key K19. In response to the operation of the image display key K19, the control unit 10 enlarges and displays the photographed image corresponding to the image display key K19 on the inspection history inquiry screen D12.

 また、図8に戻り、前記画像表示キーK19は、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている処方データの鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記憶される前記撮影部70による撮影画像のサムネイル画像である。なお、図8及び図12では、前記画像表示キーK19の下にサムネイル画像の名称として「画像1」~「画像4」が表示されているが、サムネイル画像の名称として「Rp番号」及び「連番」が用いられることも考えられる。例えば、Rp番号が「01」である場合、一つ目の画像の名称は「01-1」、二つ目の画像の名称は「01-2」となる。また、前記制御部10は、前記画像表示キーK19の操作に応じて、前記画像表示キーK19に対応するサムネイル画像を拡大して表示させる。

Returning to FIG. 8, the image display key K19 is a thumbnail image of a photographed image by the photographing unit 70 stored in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history of the prescription data displayed in the prescription display area A15. . 8 and 12, “Image 1” to “Image 4” are displayed as the thumbnail image names under the image display key K19, but “Rp number” and “Continuous” are displayed as the thumbnail image names. It is also conceivable that “No.” is used. For example, when the Rp number is “01”, the name of the first image is “01-1”, and the name of the second image is “01-2”. Further, the control unit 10 enlarges and displays the thumbnail image corresponding to the image display key K19 in accordance with the operation of the image display key K19.

 前記秤量表示領域A11~A14は、前記秤量部51~54にそれぞれ対応する表示領域であり、前記秤量表示領域A11~A14には、前記秤量部51~54による秤量結果が表示される。ここで、前記表示部20において、前記秤量表示領域A11~A14は、前記秤量部51~54と同じ配列で前記表示部20に表示されている。例えば、前記秤量部51に対応する前記秤量表示領域A11は、前記秤量部51と同じく左上に配置され、前記秤量部52に対応する前記秤量表示領域A12は、前記秤量部52と同じく右上に配置されている。このように、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54各々に対応する前記秤量表示領域A11~A14を前記秤量部51~54各々と同じ配列で前記表示部20に表示させる。係る表示処理は、前記制御部10の前記表示処理部17によって実行される。以下、本実施形態では、説明の便宜上、不特定の前記秤量表示領域A11~A14を示す場合に「秤量表示領域A1M」と称することがある。

The weighing display areas A11 to A14 are display areas corresponding to the weighing parts 51 to 54, respectively, and the weighing results by the weighing parts 51 to 54 are displayed in the weighing display areas A11 to A14. Here, in the display unit 20, the weighing display areas A11 to A14 are displayed on the display unit 20 in the same arrangement as the weighing units 51 to 54. For example, the weighing display area A11 corresponding to the weighing section 51 is arranged at the upper left as in the weighing section 51, and the weighing display area A12 corresponding to the weighing section 52 is arranged at the upper right as in the weighing section 52. Has been. Thus, the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display the weighing display areas A11 to A14 corresponding to the weighing units 51 to 54 in the same arrangement as the weighing units 51 to 54, respectively. Such display processing is executed by the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the unspecified weighing display areas A11 to A14 may be referred to as “weighing display areas A1M”.

 前記処方表示領域A15は、患者名及び患者コードと共に、表示対象のRpデータに含まれる処方薬品の薬品名称及び薬品画像の一覧が表示される表示領域である。なお、前記医薬品マスターに薬品画像が登録されていない薬品については薬品画像に代えて「画像なし」の文字が表示される。また、前記処方表示領域A15では、前記Rpデータに含まれる処方薬品が鑑査対象として選択可能であり、選択された一又は複数の処方薬品はチェックマークが付されて選択状態となる。また、前記情報読取部60によって薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合にも、その薬品識別情報に対応する処方薬品はチェックマークが付されて鑑査対象として選択された状態となる。なお、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている前記処方薬品のうち後述の目視鑑査処理で既に鑑査が行われた薬品は背景色が他の薬品とは異なる色で表示される。

The prescription display area A15 is a display area in which a list of medicine names and medicine images of prescription medicines included in Rp data to be displayed is displayed together with a patient name and a patient code. For a medicine whose medicine image is not registered in the medicine master, a character “no image” is displayed instead of the medicine image. In the prescription display area A15, prescription medicines included in the Rp data can be selected as inspection targets, and one or a plurality of selected prescription medicines are selected with a check mark. In addition, even when the drug identification information is read by the information reading unit 60, the prescription drug corresponding to the drug identification information is added with a check mark and selected as an inspection target. Of the prescription medicines displayed in the prescription display area A15, the medicines that have already been inspected by the visual inspection process described later are displayed in a color different from other medicines.

<ステップS12~S13>

 次に、ステップS12~S13において、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100における鑑査対象となる処方データを特定するための操作が実行されたか否かを判断する。具体的に、前記ステップS12において、前記制御部10は、薬袋に記載されている前記処方識別情報が前記情報読取部60によって読み取られたか否かを判断する。また、前記ステップS13において、前記制御部10は、未処理一覧から処方データを選択する操作が行われたか否かを判断する。そして、前記制御部10は、前記処方データが特定されると(S12又はS13:Yes側)、処理をステップS14に移行させる。

<Steps S12 to S13>

Next, in steps S12 to S13, the control unit 10 determines whether or not an operation for specifying prescription data to be inspected in the inspection support apparatus 100 has been executed. Specifically, in step S12, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the information reading unit 60 has read the prescription identification information described in the medicine bag. Moreover, in the said step S13, the said control part 10 judges whether operation which selects prescription data from an unprocessed list was performed. And the said control part 10 will transfer a process to step S14, if the said prescription data are specified (S12 or S13: Yes side).

<ステップS14>

 ステップS14において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS12又は前記ステップS13で特定された処方データを読み出す。具体的に、前記ステップS12で薬袋から前記処方識別情報が読み取られた場合、前記制御部10は、前記処方識別情報に対応する前記Rpデータを前記記憶部40から読み出す。即ち、前記制御部10は、前記情報読取部60で読み取られる薬袋の前記処方識別情報に基づいて鑑査対象の前記処方データを取得することができる。ここに、係る処理は、前記制御部10の前記照合処理部14によって実行される。なお、前記制御部10は、前記未処理表示領域A21の前記詳細表示キーK21の操作に応じて表示される前記詳細情報においてRpデータが選択された場合に、そのRpデータを鑑査対象として特定することも考えられる。

<Step S14>

In step S14, the control unit 10 reads the prescription data specified in step S12 or step S13. Specifically, when the prescription identification information is read from the medicine bag in step S12, the control unit 10 reads the Rp data corresponding to the prescription identification information from the storage unit 40. That is, the control unit 10 can acquire the prescription data to be inspected based on the prescription identification information of the medicine bag read by the information reading unit 60. This processing is executed by the verification processing unit 14 of the control unit 10. In addition, the said control part 10 specifies the Rp data as inspection object, when Rp data is selected in the said detailed information displayed according to operation of the said detailed display key K21 of the said unprocessed display area A21. It is also possible.

 また、前記ステップS13で未処理の処方データが選択された場合、前記制御部10は、その選択された処方データを前記記憶部40から読み出す。即ち、前記制御部10は、ユーザー操作に応じて複数の前記処方データから鑑査対象の前記処方データを選択することが可能である。ここに、係る処理は前記制御部10の照合処理部14によって実行される。

When unprocessed prescription data is selected in step S13, the control unit 10 reads the selected prescription data from the storage unit 40. That is, the control unit 10 can select the prescription data to be inspected from a plurality of the prescription data in accordance with a user operation. This processing is executed by the verification processing unit 14 of the control unit 10.

 なお、図8は、前記ステップS13で未処理の処方データが選択された場合の前記処方鑑査画面D10の表示例である。前記ステップS13で処方データが選択された場合には、前記処方データに複数のRpデータが含まれている場合でも鑑査対象のRpデータが特定されない。そのため、図8に示すように、前記処方表示領域A15には、前記処方データに含まれているRpデータのうち現在表示対象のRpデータを示すための指定RpNo.「1/3」が表示されている。

FIG. 8 is a display example of the prescription inspection screen D10 when unprocessed prescription data is selected in step S13. When the prescription data is selected in step S13, the Rp data to be inspected is not specified even when the prescription data includes a plurality of Rp data. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8, in the prescription display area A15, among the Rp data included in the prescription data, the designated RpNo. “1/3” is displayed.

 例えば、前記指定RpNo.「1/3」は、前記処方データに3つのRpデータが含まれており、現在1つ目のRpデータが表示されている状態を示している。そして、前記制御部10は、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている「+」及び「-」の操作、又は数値の直接入力操作によって前記指定RpNo.を変更し、変更後の前記指定RpNo.に対応するRpデータを前記処方表示領域A15に表示させる。また、前記制御部10は、前記情報読取部60によって薬品の包装材から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合に、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている処方データから、前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品を含むRpデータを検索し、そのRpデータを前記処方表示領域A15に表示させる。

For example, the designated RpNo. “1/3” indicates that the prescription data includes three Rp data, and the first Rp data is currently displayed. Then, the control unit 10 performs the designation RpNo. By the operation of “+” and “−” displayed in the prescription display area A15 or the direct input operation of the numerical value. And change the designated RpNo. Rp data corresponding to is displayed in the prescription display area A15. Further, the control unit 10 corresponds to the medicine identification information from the prescription data displayed in the prescription display area A15 when the medicine identification information is read from the medicine packaging material by the information reading unit 60. Rp data including the medicine to be searched is retrieved, and the Rp data is displayed in the prescription display area A15.

 一方、前記ステップS12で薬袋から前記処方識別情報が読み取られた場合には、前記処方識別情報により鑑査対象となるRpデータが特定可能である。そのため、前記ステップS12で薬袋から前記処方識別情報が読み取られた場合、前記処方鑑査画面D10では、前記処方識別情報に対応するRpデータが表示され、前記処方表示領域A15における前記指定RpNo.の表示は省略される。

On the other hand, when the prescription identification information is read from the medicine bag in the step S12, the Rp data to be inspected can be specified by the prescription identification information. Therefore, when the prescription identification information is read from the medicine bag in step S12, Rp data corresponding to the prescription identification information is displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10, and the designated RpNo. The display of is omitted.

<ステップS15>

 続いて、ステップS15において、前記制御部10は、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに予め目視鑑査処理で鑑査を行う薬品として設定された目視鑑査設定薬品が存在する場合に(S15:Yes側)、処理をステップS151に移行させ、後述の目視鑑査処理を実行する。この場合、前記目視鑑査設定薬品が目視鑑査の対象となる目視鑑査対象薬品として特定される。前記目視鑑査設定薬品は、例えば薬品の包装材にバーコードが付されていない薬品、又は、水物及び練り物などが混合調剤された薬品などである。なお、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに前記目視鑑査対象薬品として扱う薬品が存在しない場合(S15:No側)、処理はステップS16に移行する。また、前記ステップS15が省略されることも他の実施形態として考えられる。

<Step S15>

Subsequently, in step S15, when the control unit 10 has a visual inspection setting medicine set in advance as a medicine to be inspected by visual inspection processing in the prescription data or the Rp data (S15: Yes side), The process proceeds to step S151, and a visual inspection process described later is executed. In this case, the said visual inspection setting chemical | medical agent is specified as a visual inspection object chemical | medical agent used as the object of visual inspection. The visual inspection setting medicine is, for example, a medicine in which a barcode is not attached to a medicine packaging material, or a medicine in which water and kneaded materials are mixed and dispensed. In addition, when the chemical | medical agent handled as the said visual inspection object chemical | medical agent does not exist in the said prescription data or the said Rp data (S15: No side), a process transfers to step S16. Further, the omission of step S15 can be considered as another embodiment.

<ステップS16>

 ステップS16において、前記制御部10は、目視鑑査を開始するための操作が行われると(S16:Yes側)、処理をステップS151に移行させ、目視鑑査を開始するための操作が行われていなければ(S16:No側)、処理をステップS17に移行させる。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記処方鑑査画面D10に表示されている一又は複数の処方薬品が選択された状態で前記目視鑑査キーK13が操作された場合に、前記目視鑑査を開始するための操作が行われたと判断する。この場合、前記処方鑑査画面D10で選択された一又は複数の処方薬品が目視鑑査対象薬品として特定される。

<Step S16>

In step S16, when an operation for starting visual inspection is performed (S16: Yes side), the control unit 10 must move the process to step S151 and perform an operation for starting visual inspection. If it is (S16: No side), the process proceeds to step S17. Specifically, the control unit 10 starts the visual inspection when the visual inspection key K13 is operated in a state where one or more prescription medicines displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 are selected. It is determined that an operation has been performed. In this case, one or a plurality of prescription medicines selected on the prescription inspection screen D10 are specified as visual inspection target medicines.

<ステップS17>

 ステップS17において、前記制御部10は、薬品の包装材である分包紙から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合(S17:Yes側)、処理をステップS171に移行させ、後述の目視鑑査処理を実行する。なお、例えば前記分包紙には、前記分包紙で一包化された薬品に対応する前記薬品識別情報がQRコード(登録商標)などのコードによって記録されている。また、前記制御部10は、分包紙から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られていない場合(S17:No側)、処理をステップS18に移行させる。

<Step S17>

In step S17, when the medicine identification information is read from the wrapping paper that is a medicine packaging material (S17: Yes side), the control unit 10 shifts the process to step S171 and performs a visual inspection process described later. Execute. For example, the medicine identification information corresponding to the medicine packaged by the packaging paper is recorded on the packaging paper by a code such as a QR code (registered trademark). Moreover, the said control part 10 makes a process transfer to step S18, when the said chemical | drug | medicine identification information is not read from the wrapping paper (S17: No side).

<ステップS18>

 ステップS18において、前記制御部10は、薬品の包装材であるPTPシートから前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合(S18:Yes側)、前記薬品識別情報に対応する処方薬品を秤量鑑査対象薬品として特定し、処理をステップS19に移行させて後述の秤量鑑査処理を実行する。また、前記制御部10は、PTPシートから前記薬品識別情報が読み取られていない場合(S18:No側)、処理を前記ステップS16に戻す。なお、前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合であっても、前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品が秤量鑑査処理を行わない薬品として予め登録されている場合、又は前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品の単位量当たりの重量が前記医薬品マスターに記憶されていない場合には、前記制御部10が処理をステップS151に移行させることも他の実施形態として考えられる。

<Step S18>

In Step S18, when the medicine identification information is read from the PTP sheet which is a medicine packaging material (S18: Yes side), the control unit 10 sets the prescription medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information as a weighing inspection target medicine. The process is shifted to step S19, and a weighing inspection process described later is executed. Moreover, the said control part 10 returns a process to the said step S16, when the said chemical | drug | medicine identification information is not read from the PTP sheet (S18: No side). Even when the medicine identification information is read, the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information is registered in advance as a medicine that does not undergo weighing inspection processing, or the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information When the weight per unit amount is not stored in the pharmaceutical master, the control unit 10 may shift the process to step S151 as another embodiment.

 また、前記制御部10は、前記薬品識別情報が読み取られていない場合(S18:No側)であっても、前記処方鑑査画面D10に表示されている薬品が1つだけ選択され、予め定められた秤量鑑査処理の開始操作が行われた場合に、処理をステップS19に移行させてその薬品を対象として秤量鑑査処理を実行することも可能である。例えば、前記秤量鑑査処理の開始操作は、前記薬品の表示領域の長押し操作、又は前記処方鑑査画面D10に表示される秤量鑑査キー(不図示)の操作などである。一方、前記秤量鑑査処理の開始操作も行われない場合、処理は前記ステップS16に戻される。なお、前記秤量鑑査処理の開始操作が任意に行われる対象薬品は、例えば前記薬品識別情報が包装材に付されていない薬品、複数のシートが1つの包装体となっている薬品、及び錠剤分包機で一包化された分包後の薬品などである。

In addition, even when the medicine identification information is not read (S18: No side), the control unit 10 selects only one medicine displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 and is predetermined. When the weighing inspection processing start operation is performed, it is also possible to shift the processing to step S19 and execute the weighing inspection processing for the medicine. For example, the operation for starting the weighing inspection process is an operation of long-pressing the display area of the medicine or an operation of a weighing inspection key (not shown) displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10. On the other hand, if the weighing inspection process is not started, the process returns to step S16. The target drug for which the weighing inspection processing start operation is arbitrarily performed includes, for example, a drug in which the drug identification information is not attached to a packaging material, a drug in which a plurality of sheets are in one package, and a tablet component. This is medicine after packaging that is packaged by a packaging machine.

<ステップS151、S171>

 ステップS151又はステップS171において、前記制御部10は、前記目視鑑査対象薬品についてユーザーが薬品画像を目視で確認するための業務を支援する目視鑑査処理を実行する。ここに、前記目視鑑査処理は、前記制御部10の前記目視鑑査処理部15によって実行される。

<Steps S151 and S171>

In step S151 or step S171, the control unit 10 executes a visual inspection process that supports a task for a user to visually confirm a medicine image for the visual inspection target medicine. Here, the visual inspection processing is executed by the visual inspection processing unit 15 of the control unit 10.

 前記目視鑑査処理において、前記制御部10は、まず前記表示部20に前記目視鑑査画面D11(図10参照)を表示させる。前記制御部10は、前記ステップS15~S17で特定された一又は複数の処方薬品を前記目視鑑査対象薬品として、前記目視鑑査画面D11に表示させる。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS17で分包紙の前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合には、前記薬品識別情報に基づいて前記分包紙に収容されている一又は複数の薬品を前記目視鑑査対象薬品として特定する。そして、前記制御部10は、前記目視鑑査対象薬品の薬品名称、薬品画像(裸錠画像)、及び目標値などを、前記処方データ、前記Rpデータ、又は前記医薬品マスターから読み出して前記目視鑑査画面D11に表示する。その後、前記目視鑑査画面D11の前記確認キーK31が操作されると、前記制御部10は、前記目視鑑査画面D11に表示中の前記目視鑑査対象薬品の目視鑑査が終了したものとして処理し、前記記憶部40に鑑査履歴として記憶する。また、前記制御部10が、前記目視鑑査画面D11の表示後、予め設定された所定時間が経過した場合に目視鑑査が終了したものと判断して前記目視鑑査画面D11を自動で消すことも考えられる。さらに、前記制御部10が、前記目視鑑査画面D11を表示させた後、自動的に前記薬品画像各々の拡大画面を順にポップアップ表示させて所定時間後に消すことも考えられる。

In the visual inspection process, the control unit 10 first displays the visual inspection screen D11 (see FIG. 10) on the display unit 20. The control unit 10 causes the visual inspection screen D11 to display one or a plurality of prescription drugs specified in the steps S15 to S17 as the visual inspection target chemicals. Specifically, when the medicine identification information of the wrapping paper is read in the step S17, the control unit 10 includes one or a plurality of pieces stored in the wrapping paper based on the medicine identification information. A medicine is specified as the medicine to be visually inspected. And the said control part 10 reads the chemical | medical agent name of the said chemical | medical agent for visual inspection, a chemical | medical agent image (bare tablet image), a target value, etc. from the said prescription data, the said Rp data, or the said pharmaceutical master, and the said visual inspection screen D11 is displayed. Thereafter, when the confirmation key K31 on the visual inspection screen D11 is operated, the control unit 10 processes that the visual inspection of the visual inspection target drug being displayed on the visual inspection screen D11 is completed, It memorize | stores in the memory | storage part 40 as inspection history. In addition, the control unit 10 may automatically delete the visual inspection screen D11 by determining that the visual inspection has ended when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the visual inspection screen D11. It is done. Furthermore, after the said control part 10 displays the said visual inspection screen D11, it is also considered that the enlarged screen of each said medicine image is automatically popped up in order, and it erase | eliminates after predetermined time.

 ところで、前記制御部10が、前記目視鑑査画面D11の表示中に前記情報読取部60によってPTPシートから前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合に、前記目視鑑査画面D11に表示されている薬品のうち前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品について、前記薬品識別情報による照合が行われた旨を鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記憶させることが考えられる。これにより、例えばPTPシートから除包された薬品が錠剤分包機又は散薬分包機などで前記分包紙に分包された場合に、その除包後のPTPシートからGS1コードなどを前記情報読取部60によって読み取ることにより、前記分包紙で分包されている薬品のうち少なくとも一部の薬品についての目視鑑査の手間が軽減される。例えば、このように前記目視鑑査における前記薬品識別情報の照合処理の結果は、図12における前記履歴表示領域A53の「バーコード確認」の結果に反映される。

By the way, when the control unit 10 reads the medicine identification information from the PTP sheet by the information reading unit 60 during the display of the visual inspection screen D11, among the medicines displayed on the visual inspection screen D11 Regarding the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information, it may be possible to store in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history that the collation by the medicine identification information has been performed. Thereby, for example, when a medicine unpacked from a PTP sheet is packaged in the wrapping paper by a tablet wrapping machine or a powder wrapping machine, the GS1 code or the like is read from the PTP sheet after the wrapping. By reading by 60, the labor of visual inspection for at least some of the medicines packaged with the wrapping paper is reduced. For example, the result of the verification process of the medicine identification information in the visual inspection is reflected in the result of “bar code confirmation” in the history display area A53 in FIG.

 なお、前記ステップS17で分包紙の前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合には、前記目視鑑査処理において、ユーザーが分包紙内の薬品と前記目視鑑査画面D11とを参照して鑑査を行う必要がある。これに対し、例えば前記錠剤分包機又は前記散薬分包機のような調剤機器において前記分包紙に印刷される前記薬品識別情報に、前記分包紙に収容される全薬品の薬品名、剤形、調剤量(重量又は数量)、及び患者情報などの内容に関する分包情報が含まれていることが考えられる。そこで、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS17で分包紙の前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合に、前記薬品識別情報に含まれる前記分包情報と前記処方データとを照合し、その照合結果が一致した場合には、目視鑑査処理及び秤量鑑査処理を実行することなく、前記分包紙に収容されている薬品各々の鑑査を完了とすることが考えられる。これにより、前記調剤機器で分包紙に分包された薬品についての目視鑑査の手間を軽減することができる。

When the medicine identification information on the wrapping paper is read in step S17, in the visual inspection process, the user performs inspection with reference to the medicine in the wrapping paper and the visual inspection screen D11. There is a need. On the other hand, for example, in the medicine identification information printed on the wrapping paper in a dispensing device such as the tablet wrapping machine or the powder wrapping machine, the medicine names and dosage forms of all the medicines contained in the wrapping paper It is conceivable that packaging information regarding contents such as dispensing amount (weight or quantity) and patient information is included. Therefore, when the medicine identification information of the wrapping paper is read in step S17, the control unit 10 collates the packaging information included in the medicine identification information with the prescription data, and the collation result If they match, it is conceivable that the inspection of each medicine contained in the wrapping paper is completed without executing the visual inspection process and the weighing inspection process. Thereby, the labor of the visual inspection about the chemical | medical agent packaged by the said wrapping paper with the said dispensing apparatus can be reduced.

<ステップS172>

 前記ステップS171の実行後、ステップS172において、前記制御部10は、秤量鑑査設定がONに設定されているか否かを判断し、前記秤量鑑査設定がONに設定されている場合は(S172:Yes側)、処理をステップS19に移行させる。一方、前記秤量鑑査設定がOFFに設定されている場合(S172:No側)、前記制御部10は処理をステップS20に移行させる。前記秤量鑑査設定は、前記ステップS17で分包紙から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合に、前記目視鑑査処理と共に前記秤量装置50を用いる秤量鑑査処理を実行するか否かに関する設定である。前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100の環境設定時などにおけるユーザー操作に応じて前記秤量鑑査設定の内容を任意に変更可能である。また、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS17で分包紙から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合に、その後のユーザー操作に応じて前記秤量鑑査処理を実行するか否かを切り替えることも考えられる。さらに、前記秤量鑑査設定は、前記分包紙から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合に限らず、前記鑑査支援装置100で秤量可能な薬品として予め定められた薬品についても有効となることが考えられる。

<Step S172>

After execution of step S171, in step S172, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the weighing inspection setting is set to ON. If the weighing inspection setting is set to ON (S172: Yes) Side), the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, when the weighing inspection setting is set to OFF (S172: No side), the control unit 10 shifts the process to step S20. The weighing inspection setting is a setting relating to whether or not the weighing inspection processing using the weighing device 50 is executed together with the visual inspection processing when the medicine identification information is read from the wrapping paper in the step S17. The control unit 10 can arbitrarily change the contents of the weighing inspection setting according to a user operation at the time of setting the environment of the inspection support device 100. In addition, when the medicine identification information is read from the wrapping paper in the step S17, the control unit 10 may switch whether or not to execute the weighing inspection process according to a subsequent user operation. . Furthermore, it is considered that the weighing inspection setting is effective not only when the medicine identification information is read from the wrapping paper but also for a medicine that is predetermined as a medicine that can be weighed by the inspection support device 100. It is done.

<ステップS19>

 そして、ステップS19において、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果と前記処方データとを照合する照合処理を含む秤量鑑査処理を実行する。ここに、係る処理は、照合ステップの一例であって、前記照合処理部14によって実行される。具体的に、前記ステップS19において、前記制御部10は、前記薬品識別情報に対応する新たな前記秤量鑑査処理を起動した後、処理をステップS20に移行させる。即ち、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS18で前記薬品識別情報が読み取られるごとに、前記薬品識別情報に対応する前記秤量鑑査処理を個別に開始させる。従って、複数のPTPシートから前記薬品識別情報が順次読み取られた場合には、前記制御部10によって複数の前記秤量鑑査処理が起動され、それらの前記秤量鑑査処理が並列して実行されることになる。また、前記秤量鑑査設定がONである場合には、前記分包紙から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られる場合にも、その都度前記秤量鑑査処理が個別に開始されることになる。

<Step S19>

And in step S19, the said control part 10 performs the weighing | inspection inspection process including the collation process which collates the weighing result by the said weighing part 5N, and the said prescription data. This process is an example of a collation step, and is executed by the collation processing unit 14. Specifically, in step S19, the control unit 10 starts the new weighing inspection process corresponding to the medicine identification information, and then shifts the process to step S20. That is, the control unit 10 individually starts the weighing inspection process corresponding to the medicine identification information every time the medicine identification information is read in step S18. Therefore, when the medicine identification information is sequentially read from a plurality of PTP sheets, a plurality of the weighing inspection processes are started by the control unit 10, and the weighing inspection processes are executed in parallel. Become. Further, when the weighing inspection setting is ON, the weighing inspection processing is individually started each time the medicine identification information is read from the wrapping paper.

 ところで、前記分包紙の前記薬品識別情報に前記分包紙の重量込みの1包分の重量又は全ての前記分包紙の総重量が含まれている場合には、前記分包紙から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合に実行される前記ステップS19の前記秤量鑑査処理では、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果を、前記薬品識別情報に含まれている前記分包紙の重量込みの1包分の重量又は全ての前記分包紙の総重量と照合することが考えられる。なお、このように前記処方データに基づいて実行された調剤時の調剤データ又は分包データなども前記処方データの一例である。また、前記分包紙の前記薬品識別情報に前記分包紙の重量込みの1包分の重量又は全ての前記分包紙の総重量が含まれていない場合、前記制御部10は、前記分包紙選択キーK12の操作後に選択された分包紙の種類又は初期設定された分包紙の種類に応じて秤量鑑査対象薬品の分包数及び検薬用の分包紙に対応する重量を目標値に加算して前記秤量鑑査処理を実行することが考えられる。さらに、前記分包紙の前記薬品識別情報に前記分包紙の重量込みの1包分の重量又は全ての前記分包紙の総重量が含まれていない場合、前記制御部10は、前記分包紙に分包さている薬品名、YJコード、分数などに基づいて総重量を算出し、その値と前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果とを照合することも考えられる。

By the way, when the medicine identification information of the wrapping paper includes the weight of one wrap including the weight of the wrapping paper or the total weight of all the wrapping paper, In the weighing inspection process of step S19 executed when the medicine identification information is read, the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N is included in one package including the weight of the wrapping paper included in the medicine identification information. It is conceivable to check against the weight of the minute or the total weight of all the wrapping papers. The dispensing data or the packaging data at the time of dispensing executed based on the prescription data as described above is also an example of the prescription data. When the medicine identification information of the wrapping paper does not include the weight of one wrapping paper including the weight of the wrapping paper or the total weight of all the wrapping papers, the control unit 10 The number of wrapping paper selected after the operation of the wrapping paper selection key K12 or the initial setting of the wrapping paper type and the weight corresponding to the number of sachets to be weighed and the wrapping paper for inspection It is conceivable to execute the weighing inspection process by adding to the value. Further, when the medicine identification information of the wrapping paper does not include the weight of one wrap including the weight of the wrapping paper or the total weight of all the wrapping paper, the control unit 10 It is also conceivable to calculate the total weight based on the name of the medicine, YJ code, fraction, etc. packaged in the wrapping paper, and collate the value with the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N.

<ステップS20>

 その後、ステップS20において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS12で特定された前記Rpデータ、又は前記ステップS13で特定された前記処方データに含まれている処方薬品の全てについて鑑査が完了したか否かを判断する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記Rpデータ又は前記処方データに含まれる全ての薬品について前記目視鑑査処理及び前記秤量鑑査処理のいずれかよる鑑査が完了したか否かを判断する。ここで、前記制御部10は、前記処方薬品の全てについて鑑査が完了したと判断すると(S20:Yes側)、処理をステップS21に移行させる。また、前記制御部10は、鑑査が完了していない処方薬品が残存していると判断すると(S20:No側)、処理を前記ステップS16に戻す。

<Step S20>

Thereafter, in step S20, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the inspection has been completed for all of the prescription drugs included in the Rp data specified in step S12 or the prescription data specified in step S13. Determine whether. Specifically, the control unit 10 determines whether inspection by any of the visual inspection process and the weighing inspection process has been completed for all medicines included in the Rp data or the prescription data. Here, if the said control part 10 judges that the inspection was completed about all the said prescription medicines (S20: Yes side), it will transfer a process to step S21. Moreover, if the said control part 10 judges that the prescription medicine which inspection has not been completed remains (S20: No side), a process will be returned to said step S16.

<ステップS21>

 ステップS21において、前記制御部10は、前記Rpデータ又は前記処方データについての鑑査が完了した旨の鑑査完了通知を前記表示部20に表示させ、処理を前記ステップS11に戻す。ここに、係る処理は、前記制御部10の前記鑑査完了通知部16によって実行される。これにより、ユーザーは、前記表示部20の表示を参照することにより、前記Rpデータ又は前記処方データの鑑査が完了した旨を明確に把握することができる。また、前記鑑査支援装置100が、前記ネットワークN1を介してプリンターに接続されていることも考えられる。この場合、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS21において、前記鑑査が完了した前記Rpデータ又は前記処方データについての鑑査の実施記録を、前記プリンターを用いて印刷可能であることが考えられる。前記鑑査の実施記録には、例えば患者情報(患者氏名、患者ID、年齢、性別など)、用法、薬品、鑑査結果(秤量結果、目標値、照合結果など)などが含まれる。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS21において鑑査の実施記録を自動的に印刷すること、又は前記鑑査完了通知が表示されている画面におけるユーザー操作に応じて鑑査の実施記録を印刷することが考えられる。なお、前記制御部10は、鑑査の実施記録を自動的に印刷するか否かを予めユーザー操作に応じて設定することも可能である。また、前記制御部10は、前記プリンターを用いて前記Rpデータ又は前記処方データに基づいて薬袋が印刷可能であることも考えられる。

<Step S21>

In step S21, the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display an inspection completion notification indicating that the inspection of the Rp data or the prescription data has been completed, and returns the process to step S11. This processing is executed by the inspection completion notification unit 16 of the control unit 10. Thereby, the user can grasp | ascertain clearly that the inspection of the said Rp data or the said prescription data was completed by referring the display of the said display part 20. FIG. It is also conceivable that the inspection support device 100 is connected to a printer via the network N1. In this case, it is considered that the control unit 10 can print the inspection record of the Rp data or the prescription data for which the inspection is completed using the printer in the step S21. The inspection record includes, for example, patient information (patient name, patient ID, age, sex, etc.), usage, medicine, inspection result (weighing result, target value, verification result, etc.) and the like. Specifically, the control unit 10 automatically prints the inspection execution record in the step S21 or prints the inspection execution record in response to a user operation on the screen on which the inspection completion notification is displayed. It is possible. Note that the control unit 10 can also set in advance according to a user operation whether or not to automatically print the inspection execution record. Moreover, it is also conceivable that the control unit 10 can print a medicine bag based on the Rp data or the prescription data using the printer.

 なお、前記制御部10が、前記ステップS13で前記処方データが特定された場合に、前記処方データに含まれるRpデータについての鑑査が完了するごとに鑑査完了通知を前記表示部20に表示させることも考えられる。これにより、前記Rpデータの単位で鑑査が行われることになり、同一の薬袋に収容するべき処方薬品ごとに纏めて鑑査を行うことが可能となる。

In addition, when the said prescription data is specified by the said step S13, the said control part 10 displays the inspection completion notice on the said display part 20 whenever inspection about Rp data contained in the said prescription data is completed. Is also possible. As a result, the inspection is performed in units of the Rp data, and it is possible to perform the inspection collectively for each prescription drug to be accommodated in the same medicine bag.

[秤量鑑査処理]

 続いて、図13を参照しつつ、前記ステップS19で開始される秤量鑑査処理について説明する。

[Weighing inspection process]

Next, the weighing inspection process started in step S19 will be described with reference to FIG.

<ステップS30>

 まず、ステップS30において、前記制御部10は、前記PTPシート又は前記分包紙から読み取られた前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品が、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている鑑査対象の処方データ又はRpデータに含まれているか否かを判断する。ここで、前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品が鑑査対象の処方データ又はRpデータに含まれていると判断されると(S30:Yes側)、処理はステップS31に移行する。一方、前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品が鑑査対象の処方データ又はRpデータに含まれていないと判断されると(S30:No側)、前記制御部10は、処理をステップS301に移行する。なお、鑑査対象が処方データである場合であっても、予めRpデータごとに鑑査を実行する旨の設定が行われている場合には、前記制御部10が、前記ステップS30で読み取られた前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品が前記処方表示領域A15に現在表示中のRpデータに含まれているか否かを判断することが考えられる。

<Step S30>

First, in step S30, the control unit 10 determines that the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information read from the PTP sheet or the wrapping paper is the prescription data to be inspected displayed in the prescription display area A15 or It is determined whether it is included in the Rp data. Here, if it is determined that the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information is included in the prescription data or Rp data to be inspected (S30: Yes side), the process proceeds to step S31. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information is not included in the prescription data or Rp data to be inspected (S30: No side), the control unit 10 proceeds to step S301. In addition, even when the inspection target is prescription data, if the setting for executing the inspection for each Rp data has been performed in advance, the control unit 10 reads the step S30. It is conceivable to determine whether or not a medicine corresponding to medicine identification information is included in the Rp data currently displayed in the prescription display area A15.

<ステップS301>

 ステップS301において、前記制御部10は、エラーメッセージを前記表示部20に表示させた後、前記秤量鑑査処理を終了させる。例えば前記エラーメッセージには、前記情報読取部60で読み取られた前記薬品識別情報が前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータと一致しない旨の警告が含まれる。

<Step S301>

In step S301, the control unit 10 displays an error message on the display unit 20, and then ends the weighing inspection process. For example, the error message includes a warning that the medicine identification information read by the information reading unit 60 does not match the prescription data or the Rp data.

<ステップS31>

 ステップS31において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS17又は前記ステップS18で読み取られた前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品の単位量当たりの重量(以下「単位重量」という)を前記記憶部40に記憶されている前記医薬品マスターから取得する。ここに、係る処理は、前記制御部10の前記単位重量取得部12によって実行される。なお、前記制御部10は、外部の記憶装置から前記薬品の単位重量を取得するものであってもよい。例えば、前記薬品識別情報が錠剤である場合には、前記錠剤の単位量当たりの重量が前記医薬品マスターから読み出される。

<Step S31>

In step S31, the control unit 10 stores the weight per unit amount of medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information read in step S17 or step S18 (hereinafter referred to as “unit weight”) in the storage unit 40. Obtain from the said pharmaceutical master. This process is executed by the unit weight acquisition unit 12 of the control unit 10. The control unit 10 may acquire a unit weight of the medicine from an external storage device. For example, when the medicine identification information is a tablet, the weight per unit amount of the tablet is read from the medicine master.

 ところで、前記単位重量が1.6g未満である場合には誤差の影響が大きくなる。そこで、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS31で取得した単位重量が1.6gのような所定値未満である場合に、前記秤量表示領域A11~A14の背景色を予め定められた薄い黄色などに変更することが考えられる。これにより、ユーザーは、前記単位重量が小さいことに注意を払いつつ鑑査業務を行うことができる。また、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに服用量又は用法が異なる同一薬品が含まれることが考えられる。この場合、前記制御部10は、例えば初回は前記薬品識別情報に対応する同一薬品のうち前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている最上位の薬品を秤量鑑査対象薬品として特定し、次以降は鑑査が未完了の薬品のうち前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている最上位の薬品を秤量鑑査対象薬品として特定する。また、他の実施形態として、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS31で取得した単位重量が予め設定された許容最大値以上である場合にも同様に、前記秤量表示領域A11~A14の背景色を予め定められた薄い黄色などに変更することが考えられる。

By the way, when the unit weight is less than 1.6 g, the influence of error becomes large. Therefore, when the unit weight acquired in step S31 is less than a predetermined value such as 1.6 g, the control unit 10 sets the background color of the weighing display areas A11 to A14 to a light yellow color determined in advance. It is possible to change. Thereby, the user can perform inspection work paying attention to the fact that the unit weight is small. Moreover, it is possible that the same chemical | medical agent from which dosage or usage differs is contained in the said prescription data or the said Rp data. In this case, for example, the control unit 10 first specifies the topmost medicine displayed in the prescription display area A15 among the same medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information as the medicine to be weighed and the subsequent inspections. Among the unfinished medicines, the top medicine displayed in the prescription display area A15 is specified as the medicine for weighing inspection. As another embodiment, the control unit 10 similarly sets the background color of the weighing display areas A11 to A14 when the unit weight acquired in the step S31 is equal to or larger than a preset allowable maximum value. It is conceivable to change the color to a predetermined light yellow color.

<ステップS32>

 次に、ステップS32において、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nのいずれかの秤量値が0から増加したか否かを判断する。ここで、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54のいずれかの秤量部5Nの秤量値が0から増加したと判断した場合(S32:Yes側)、処理をステップS33に移行させる。一方、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54の秤量値が0から変化していないと判断した場合(S32:No側)、処理をステップS35に移行させる。

<Step S32>

Next, in step S32, the control unit 10 determines whether any of the weighing values of the weighing unit 5N has increased from zero. Here, when the control unit 10 determines that the weighing value of any of the weighing units 5N of the weighing units 51 to 54 has increased from 0 (S32: Yes side), the process proceeds to step S33. On the other hand, when the control unit 10 determines that the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 have not changed from 0 (S32: No side), the process proceeds to step S35.

<ステップS33>

 ステップS33において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS32で秤量値が0から増加した前記秤量部5Nを前記ステップS17又はS18で特定された前記薬品識別情報に対応付ける秤量部として特定する。即ち、前記制御部10は、前記情報読取部60による前記薬品識別情報の読み取り後に秤量値が0から増加した一又は複数の前記秤量部5Nを前記薬品識別情報に対応付ける秤量部として特定する。ここに、係る特定処理は、秤量特定ステップの一例であって、前記制御部10の前記秤量特定部11によって実行される。例えば、前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた後、次に前記薬品識別情報が読み取られるまでの間に複数の前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が0から増加した場合には、その複数の前記秤量部5Nが先に読み取られていた前記薬品識別情報に対応付けられる。これにより、ユーザーは、同種の薬品の束を複数に分けて前記秤量部5Nに載置させることが可能である。

<Step S33>

In step S33, the control unit 10 specifies the weighing unit 5N whose weighing value has increased from 0 in step S32 as the weighing unit associated with the medicine identification information identified in step S17 or S18. That is, the control unit 10 specifies one or a plurality of the weighing units 5N whose weighing values have increased from 0 after the reading of the drug identification information by the information reading unit 60 as the weighing units associated with the drug identification information. The specifying process is an example of a weighing specifying step, and is executed by the weighing specifying unit 11 of the control unit 10. For example, when the weighing values of the plurality of weighing units 5N increase from 0 after the medicine identification information is read and before the next medicine identification information is read, the plurality of weighing units 5N Is associated with the medicine identification information that has been read first. Thereby, the user can divide a bundle of the same kind of medicines into a plurality of parts and place them on the weighing unit 5N.

 このように構成された前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記制御部10が、前記秤量部5Nのうち秤量値が0よりも大きい値から増加した秤量部が存在する場合には(S32:No側)、その秤量部を前記薬品識別情報に対応付ける秤量部として特定しない。従って、前記制御部10は、一つ前に読み取られた前記薬品識別情報に対応付けるべき前記秤量部5Nによる秤量と、次に読み取られた前記薬品識別情報に対応付けるべき前記秤量部5Nによる秤量とが同時に進行する場合であっても、それらの秤量部5Nを区別して前記薬品識別情報に対応付けることが可能である。

In the inspection support apparatus 100 configured as described above, when the control unit 10 includes a weighing unit whose weighing value is increased from a value larger than 0 in the weighing unit 5N (S32: No side). The weighing unit is not specified as the weighing unit associated with the medicine identification information. Accordingly, the control unit 10 determines whether the weighing by the weighing unit 5N to be associated with the previously read medicine identification information and the weighing by the weighing unit 5N to be associated with the next medicine identification information read. Even when proceeding simultaneously, it is possible to distinguish these weighing parts 5N and associate them with the medicine identification information.

 また、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で前記薬品識別情報に対応する前記秤量部5Nが特定された後、後述のステップS35又S36で前記薬品識別情報に対応する前記秤量部5Nが確定するまでの間に前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が0に戻った場合には、前記秤量部5Nと前記薬品識別情報との対応付けを解除する。この場合、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nに対応する前記秤量表示領域A1Mにおける表示もリセットする。

In addition, after the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the medicine identification information is specified in the step S33, the control unit 10 determines the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the medicine identification information in a later-described step S35 or S36. If the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N returns to 0 in the meantime, the association between the weighing unit 5N and the medicine identification information is canceled. In this case, the control unit 10 also resets the display in the weighing display area A1M corresponding to the weighing unit 5N.

<ステップS34>

 ステップS34において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で特定された前記秤量部5Nによる秤量値に応じた薬品量の表示を開始する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果を予め定められた単位に換算し、前記秤量部5Nに対応する前記秤量表示領域A1Mに表示させる。その後、前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果は継続的に更新されて前記秤量表示領域A1Mに表示される。なお、前記秤量結果の表示のリアルタイム更新は、前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果が安定して確定するまで実行される。ここに、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果を前記ステップS31で取得された前記単位重量に基づいて予め定められた単位に換算する処理は、前記制御部10の前記単位換算処理部13によって実行される。また、予め定められた単位に換算された前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果を前記秤量表示領域A1Mに表示させる処理は、前記制御部10の前記表示処理部17によって実行される。なお、前記秤量結果の換算後の薬品の単位(錠、カプセル、包、枚、gなど)は、例えば前記処方データで用いられる薬品の単位(錠、カプセル、包、枚、gなど)と同じである。

<Step S34>

In step S34, the control unit 10 starts displaying the chemical amount according to the weighing value by the weighing unit 5N specified in step S33. Specifically, the control unit 10 converts the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N into a predetermined unit and displays it in the weighing display area A1M corresponding to the weighing unit 5N. Thereafter, the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is continuously updated and displayed in the weighing display area A1M. The real-time update of the weighing result display is executed until the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is stably determined. Here, the process of converting the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N into a predetermined unit based on the unit weight acquired in the step S31 is executed by the unit conversion processing unit 13 of the control unit 10. . Further, the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10 executes a process of displaying the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N converted into a predetermined unit in the weighing display area A1M. The unit of the drug after conversion of the weighing result (tablet, capsule, package, sheet, g, etc.) is the same as the unit of drug (tablet, capsule, package, sheet, g, etc.) used in the prescription data, for example. It is.

 ところで、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量の精度(レンジ)が切り替え可能であることが考えられる。具体的に、前記秤量部5Nは、前記ロードセル56を用いて秤量される秤量値を前記制御部10に入力する秤量制御部を備えることが考えられる。なお、前記秤量制御部は、例えばASIC又はMPUなどの制御部である。そして、前記秤量制御部は、前記制御部10からの制御指示に応じて、前記秤量部5Nの前記ロードセル56の秤量結果として前記制御部10に入力する秤量値の小数点の桁数を変更することが考えられる。例えば、前記秤量制御部は、前記制御部10からの制御指示に応じて、小数点第一位までの精度で秤量値を前記制御部10に入力する第1レンジモードと、小数点第二位までの精度で秤量値を前記制御部10に入力する第2レンジモードとを切り替えて実行可能であることが考えられる。

By the way, in the said inspection assistance apparatus 100, it is possible that the precision (range) of the weighing by the said weighing part 5N can be switched. Specifically, it is conceivable that the weighing unit 5N includes a weighing control unit that inputs a weighing value to be weighed using the load cell 56 to the control unit 10. The weighing control unit is a control unit such as ASIC or MPU. The weighing control unit changes the number of digits of the decimal point of the weighing value input to the control unit 10 as the weighing result of the load cell 56 of the weighing unit 5N according to the control instruction from the control unit 10. Can be considered. For example, the weighing control unit is configured to input a weighing value to the control unit 10 with accuracy up to the first decimal point in accordance with a control instruction from the control unit 10, and to the second decimal point. It is conceivable that the second range mode in which the weighing value is input to the control unit 10 with high accuracy can be switched and executed.

 このような構成では、前記制御部10が、前記秤量制御部の動作モードを、状況に応じて前記第1レンジモード又は前記第2レンジモードに切り替えることが可能である。例えば、前記制御部10は、通常は、前記秤量部5Nの前記秤量制御部を前記第2レンジモードで動作させることにより、前記秤量部5Nから小数点第二位までの精度で秤量値を取得する。一方、前記鑑査支援装置100の使用環境として、例えば風又は振動などの影響により前記秤量部5Nの秤量値の小数点第二位の値が安定しづらい環境も想定される。そこで、前記制御部10は、予め設定された所定時間が経過しても前記秤量部5Nの秤量値の小数点第二位の値が安定しない場合には、前記秤量部5Nの前記秤量制御部を前記第1レンジモードで動作させることにより、前記秤量部5Nから小数点第一位までの精度で秤量値を取得することが考えられる。この場合、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nの秤量値の小数点第一位が安定した場合に、その秤量値を秤量結果として取得することになる。また、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nの秤量値の小数点第二位の値が前記所定時間経過後も安定しない状況が、所定期間の間に所定回数繰り返し発生した場合には、前記秤量部5Nの前記秤量制御部の通常時の初期動作モードを前記第2レンジモードから前記第1レンジモードに変更することも考えられる。

In such a configuration, the control unit 10 can switch the operation mode of the weighing control unit to the first range mode or the second range mode depending on the situation. For example, the control unit 10 normally obtains a weighing value with accuracy from the weighing unit 5N to the second decimal place by operating the weighing control unit of the weighing unit 5N in the second range mode. . On the other hand, as the usage environment of the inspection support apparatus 100, for example, an environment in which the value of the second decimal place of the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is difficult to be stabilized due to the influence of wind or vibration is assumed. Therefore, if the second decimal place value of the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is not stable even after a preset predetermined time has elapsed, the control unit 10 turns the weighing control unit of the weighing unit 5N on. By operating in the first range mode, it is conceivable to obtain a weighing value with accuracy from the weighing unit 5N to the first decimal place. In this case, when the first decimal place of the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is stabilized, the control unit 10 acquires the weighing value as a weighing result. In addition, when the situation where the value of the second decimal place of the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is not stable after the lapse of the predetermined time has occurred repeatedly for a predetermined number of times during the predetermined period, the control unit 10 It is also conceivable to change the normal initial operation mode of the weighing control unit of the unit 5N from the second range mode to the first range mode.

<ステップS35>

 ステップS35において、前記制御部10は、前記情報読取部60によって他の薬品に対応する前記薬品識別情報が読み取られたか否かを判断する。ここで、前記制御部10は、他の薬品に対応する前記薬品識別情報が読み取られたと判断すると(S35:Yes側)、処理をステップS351に移行させる。

<Step S35>

In step S <b> 35, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the drug identification information corresponding to another drug has been read by the information reading unit 60. Here, if the said control part 10 judges that the said chemical | medical agent identification information corresponding to another chemical | medical agent was read (S35: Yes side), it will transfer a process to step S351.

 また、前記制御部10は、他の薬品に対応する前記薬品識別情報が読み取られていないと判断すると(S35:No側)、処理をステップS36に移行させる。これにより、前記秤量鑑査処理において、前記制御部10は、前記情報読取部60による前記薬品識別情報の読み取り後、前記情報読取部60により異なる前記薬品識別情報が読み取られるまでの間に(S35:Yes側)、秤量値が0から増加した一又は複数の前記秤量部5Nを前記薬品識別情報に対応する秤量部として特定することになる(S33)。ここに、係る処理は前記制御部10の前記秤量特定部11によって実行される。

Moreover, if the said control part 10 judges that the said chemical | medical agent identification information corresponding to another chemical | medical agent is not read (S35: No side), a process will be transferred to step S36. Thereby, in the said weighing | inspection inspection process, the said control part 10 is after the said chemical | medical agent identification information is read by the said information reading part 60 after the said chemical | medical agent identification information is read by the said information reading part 60 (S35: Yes side), one or a plurality of the weighing parts 5N whose weighing values have increased from 0 are specified as weighing parts corresponding to the medicine identification information (S33). This processing is executed by the weighing specifying unit 11 of the control unit 10.

<ステップS36>

 ステップS36において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で前記薬品識別情報に対応する前記秤量部5Nが特定されてから予め設定された所定時間が経過したか否かを判断する。ここで、前記制御部10は、前記所定時間が経過したと判断すると(S36:Yes側)、処理をステップS351に移行させ、前記所定時間が経過するまでの間は(S36:No側)、処理を前記ステップS32に戻す。

<Step S36>

In step S36, the control unit 10 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the medicine identification information is specified in step S33. Here, if the said control part 10 judges that the said predetermined time passed (S36: Yes side), it will transfer a process to step S351, and until the said predetermined time passes (S36: No side), The process returns to step S32.

 なお、本実施形態では、前記所定時間が経過した場合にも前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に前記秤量部5Nを割り当てるための処理(S33)が実行されなくなり、前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応する前記秤量部5Nが確定する場合について説明するが、これに限らない。例えば、前記制御部10が、所定の確定キーなどの操作に応じて前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応する前記秤量部5Nを確定可能な構成も考えられる。また、前記制御部10が、前記ステップS37における後述の照合処理を前記ステップS33以後から随時実行し、前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応する前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果が前記処方データに一致したことを条件に前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応する前記秤量部5Nを確定可能な構成も考えられる。

In the present embodiment, even when the predetermined time has elapsed, the process (S33) for assigning the weighing unit 5N to the weighing inspection target drug is not executed, and the weighing unit corresponding to the weighing inspection target drug Although the case where 5N is determined will be described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is also conceivable in which the control unit 10 can determine the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the weighing inspection target medicine in accordance with an operation of a predetermined confirmation key or the like. In addition, the control unit 10 executes a verification process described later in step S37 from time to time after step S33, and confirms that the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the drug for weighing inspection matches the prescription data. A configuration is also conceivable in which the weighing section 5N corresponding to the drug for weighing inspection can be determined under conditions.

<ステップS351>

 ステップS351において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で前記薬品識別情報に対応する秤量部として特定された一又は複数の前記秤量部5Nの全ての秤量値が確定したか否かを判断する。なお、前記秤量部5Nの秤量値は、例えば前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が所定時間変動せず安定していた場合に確定する。ここで、前記制御部10は、全ての前記秤量部の秤量値が確定したと判断すると(S351:Yes側)、処理をステップS37に移行させ、全ての前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が確定するまでの間は(S351:No側)、前記ステップS351の判断を繰り返し実行する。

<Step S351>

In step S351, the control unit 10 determines whether or not all the weighing values of one or a plurality of the weighing units 5N specified as the weighing unit corresponding to the medicine identification information in the step S33 have been determined. The weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is determined, for example, when the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is stable without fluctuation for a predetermined time. Here, if the said control part 10 judges that the weighing value of all the said weighing parts was decided (S351: Yes side), it will transfer a process to step S37 and the weighing value of all the said weighing parts 5N will be decided. Until (S351: No side), the determination in step S351 is repeatedly executed.

<ステップS37>

 ステップS37において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で同一の薬品に対応する秤量部として特定された一又は複数の前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果の合計を算出し、その合計値と前記処方データとを照合する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS34で予め定められた単位に換算された前記秤量部5N各々の秤量結果の合計が前記処方データで示された目標値である処方数量と一致するか否かを判断する。

<Step S37>

In step S37, the control unit 10 calculates the total of the weighing results by the one or more weighing units 5N specified as the weighing unit corresponding to the same medicine in step S33, and the total value and the prescription data And match. Specifically, the control unit 10 matches the prescription quantity, which is the target value indicated by the prescription data, in which the total weighing result of each of the weighing units 5N converted into the unit predetermined in step S34. Determine whether or not.

 例えば、前記処方データに示されている前記秤量鑑査対象薬品の目標値が9錠である場合であって、前記秤量鑑査対象薬品の単位重量が2.2gである場合、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量値が19.8gである場合に前記秤量部5Nに載置されている薬品数量が9錠となる。これに対し、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量値と前記単位重量とに基づいて算出される薬品数量が8.5錠以上9.4錠以下である場合には照合結果が一致であると判断し、8.4錠以下又は9.5錠以上である場合には照合結果が不一致であると判断することが考えられる。即ち、前記制御部10は、前記薬品数量の小数点第一位を四捨五入して照合を行うことが考えられる。なお、前記制御部10が前記照合処理において許容する誤差は予め設定することが可能であり、前記小数点第一位の四捨五入はその一例に過ぎない。例えば、前記制御部10が、前記秤量結果が目標値±0.1錠又は目標値±0.2錠などである場合に照合結果が一致であると判断することが考えられる。

For example, when the target value of the weighing inspection target drug shown in the prescription data is 9 tablets and the unit weight of the weighing inspection target drug is 2.2 g, the weighing by the weighing unit 5N When the value is 19.8 g, the number of medicines placed on the weighing unit 5N is 9 tablets. On the other hand, the control unit 10 matches the collation result when the drug quantity calculated based on the weighing value by the weighing unit 5N and the unit weight is 8.5 to 9.4 tablets. If it is 8.4 tablets or less or 9.5 tablets or more, it may be determined that the verification results are inconsistent. That is, the control unit 10 may perform verification by rounding off the first decimal place of the chemical quantity. The error allowed by the control unit 10 in the verification process can be set in advance, and rounding off to the first decimal place is just one example. For example, it is conceivable that the control unit 10 determines that the collation results are the same when the weighing result is a target value ± 0.1 tablet or a target value ± 0.2 tablet.

 また、前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応付けられた前記秤量部5Nが複数存在する場合、前記制御部10は、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータにおける前記秤量鑑査対象薬品の総錠数と、複数の前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が換算された錠数の合計とを照合する。これにより、ユーザーは、1つの前記秤量鑑査対象薬品について複数の前記秤量部5Nを用いる場合でも、特別な操作を必要とすることなく、1つの前記秤量部5Nを用いる場合と同様の手順で任意の数の前記秤量部5Nに前記秤量鑑査対象薬品を載置して簡単に秤量鑑査を行うことができる。なお、前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応付けられた前記秤量部5Nが複数存在する場合の照合手法として、前記制御部10は、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータにおける前記秤量鑑査対象薬品の総錠数を前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応するPTPシート1枚当たりの個数で除算することにより求められたPTPシートの枚数にPTPシート1枚当たりの重量を乗算した総重量値と、複数の前記秤量部5Nの秤量値の合計との差が予め定められた許容誤差未満であるか否かを判断することも考えられる。

In addition, when there are a plurality of weighing units 5N associated with the weighing inspection target drug, the control unit 10 includes the total number of tablets of the weighing inspection target drug in the prescription data or the Rp data, The total of the number of tablets into which the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is converted is collated. As a result, even when a plurality of weighing units 5N are used for one drug to be weighed and inspected, the user can arbitrarily perform the same procedure as in the case of using one weighing unit 5N without requiring a special operation. It is possible to easily perform the weighing inspection by placing the weighing inspection target chemicals on the weighing portions 5N. As a verification method when there are a plurality of weighing units 5N associated with the weighing inspection target drug, the control unit 10 calculates the total number of tablets of the weighing inspection target drug in the prescription data or the Rp data. The total weight value obtained by multiplying the number of PTP sheets obtained by dividing by the number of PTP sheets corresponding to the drug to be weighed and inspected by the weight per PTP sheet, and the plurality of weighing units 5N It is also conceivable to determine whether or not the difference from the total weighing value is less than a predetermined tolerance.

 ところで、前記秤量鑑査対象薬品が錠剤又はカプセルである場合、前記制御部10は、前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応して前記医薬品マスターに記憶されている前記PTPシート1枚当たりの個数と前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータとに基づいて前記秤量鑑査対象薬品のPTPシートの枚数及び1枚に満たない端数の有無を算出することが考えられる。そして、前記制御部10は、前記PTPシートの枚数と端数の有無とに応じて、前記PTPシートの耳の重量として予め設定された所定値を前記目標値に加算することが考えられる。

By the way, when the medicine for weighing inspection is a tablet or a capsule, the control unit 10 stores the number per one PTP sheet stored in the medicine master corresponding to the medicine for weighing inspection and the prescription data. Alternatively, it is conceivable to calculate the number of PTP sheets of the drug to be weighed and the presence or absence of fractions less than one based on the Rp data. The control unit 10 may add a predetermined value set in advance as the weight of the ear of the PTP sheet to the target value in accordance with the number of PTP sheets and the presence or absence of fractions.

 例えば、前記制御部10は、前記端数が存在する場合には耳ありと判断して耳の重量を加算することが考えられる。これにより、前記目標値が前記PTPシートの耳の重量を考慮した値に近似し、前記照合が高い精度で実行される。なお、PTPシートの端数が存在する場合に、耳あり又は耳なしのいずれで計算するかが予め選択可能な構成も考えられる。また、前記制御部10は、前記PTPシートの端数について、常に耳ありで前記目標値への加算値を変更し、照合結果が一致でない場合に、「端数に耳が存在しますか」のように耳ありの設定が行われているために照合結果が不一致である可能性を示唆するメッセージを表示させることも考えられる。

For example, when the fraction exists, the control unit 10 may determine that there is an ear and add the weight of the ear. Thereby, the target value approximates to a value considering the weight of the ear of the PTP sheet, and the matching is executed with high accuracy. In addition, when the fraction of a PTP sheet exists, the structure which can select beforehand whether it calculates with an ear | edge or without an ear | edge is also considered. In addition, the control unit 10 always changes the addition value to the target value with the ears with respect to the fraction of the PTP sheet. It is also conceivable to display a message suggesting the possibility that the collation result is inconsistent because the setting with the ear is set.

 また、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記制御部10により、前記表示部20に端数のPTPシートにおける耳の有無の状態を入力するための「耳なし」及び「耳あり」の操作キーが表示されることが考えられる。そして、「耳なし」の操作キーの操作が前記操作部30で検出された場合には、前記制御部10が、端数が生じているPTPシートに耳が存在しないものとし、「耳あり」の操作キーの操作が前記操作部30で検出された場合には、前記制御部10が、端数が生じているPTPシートに耳が存在するものとして秤量値と目標値との照合を行うことが考えられる。

Further, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 displays “without ear” and “with ear” operation keys for inputting the presence / absence state of the ear in the fractional PTP sheet on the display unit 20. It can be considered. When an operation of the operation key “without ear” is detected by the operation unit 30, the control unit 10 assumes that there is no ear on the PTP sheet in which the fraction is generated, When operation of the operation key is detected by the operation unit 30, it is considered that the control unit 10 collates the measured value with the target value on the assumption that there is an ear in the PTP sheet having a fraction. It is done.

 さらに、前記制御部10は、前記PTPシートの枚数に応じて、予め輪ゴムの重量として設定された所定値を前記目標値に加算することが考えられる。例えば、前記PTPシートの枚数が0枚以上2枚以下である場合は予め定められた小サイズの輪ゴムの重量、記PTPシートの枚数が3枚以上5枚以下である場合は予め定められた中サイズの輪ゴムの重量、記PTPシートの枚数が6枚以上10枚以下である場合は予め定められた大サイズの輪ゴムの重量を前記所定値として前記目標値に加算することが考えられる。これにより、前記目標値が前記PTPシートを束ねる輪ゴムの重量を考慮した値に近似し、前記照合が高い精度で実行される。例えば、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100の初期設定として、「耳の重量(0-99.99)」、「輪ゴム(大)の重量(0-99.99)」、「輪ゴム(中)の重量(0-99.99)」、「輪ゴム(小)の重量(0-99.99)」、「輪ゴム適用シート数(小:0.0-2.0、中:3.0-5.0、大:6.0-10.0など)」、「1包化の重量鑑査(行う、行わないなど)」、「QR重量データ(1日当り、1包当りなど)」、「鑑査単位(RP単位、処方単位など)」、「g表示時の小数第3位の扱い(四捨五入、切り捨てなど)」、「分包品QR読込時の輪ゴム重量(加算する、加算しないなど)」などをユーザー操作に応じて設定可能である。また、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100の初期設定として、前記秤量部51~前記秤量部54各々による秤量時の輪ゴムの初期選択状態を示す「秤1輪ゴム選択デフォルト値」、「秤2輪ゴム選択デフォルト値」、「秤3輪ゴム選択デフォルト値」、「秤4輪ゴム選択デフォルト値」、前記大皿58を使用する秤量時の輪ゴムの初期選択状態を示す「大皿輪ゴム選択デフォルト値」、前記秤量部51~前記秤量部54各々による秤量時の端数の有無の初期選択状態を示す「秤1端数有無選択デフォルト値」、「秤2端数有無選択デフォルト値」、「秤3端数有無選択デフォルト値」、「秤4端数有無選択デフォルト値」、薬品の単位量(単一)当りの値を計測するときに秤量される薬品の個数を示す「薬品単一当りの計測時の秤量個数(0-999)」などをユーザー操作に応じて設定可能である。

Further, it is conceivable that the control unit 10 adds a predetermined value set in advance as the weight of the rubber band to the target value according to the number of the PTP sheets. For example, when the number of PTP sheets is 0 or more and 2 or less, the weight of a predetermined small rubber band is set. When the number of PTP sheets is 3 or more and 5 or less, When the weight of the rubber band of the size and the number of PTP sheets are 6 or more and 10 or less, it is conceivable to add the weight of a predetermined large rubber band to the target value as the predetermined value. As a result, the target value approximates to a value that takes into account the weight of the rubber band that bundles the PTP sheets, and the verification is performed with high accuracy. For example, as an initial setting of the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 sets “weight of ear (0-99.99)”, “weight of rubber band (large) (0-99.99)”, “band rubber ( "Middle weight" (0-99.99) "," Rubber rubber (small) weight (0-99.99) "," Number of rubber band application sheets (small: 0.0-2.0, Medium: 3.0) -5.0, large: 6.0-10.0, etc.) "," single-pack weight inspection (performed, not performed, etc.) "," QR weight data (per day, per packet, etc.) "," “Inspection unit (RP unit, prescription unit, etc.)”, “Treatment of third decimal place when displaying g (rounding off, rounding off, etc.)”, “Rubber weight when reading packaged QR (adding, not adding, etc.)” Etc. can be set according to user operations. In addition, as an initial setting of the inspection support device 100, the control unit 10 sets the initial selection state of the rubber band at the time of weighing by each of the weighing unit 51 to the weighing unit 54, and “balance one wheel rubber selection default value”, “balance”. “2 wheel rubber selection default value”, “balance 3 wheel rubber selection default value”, “balance 4 wheel rubber selection default value”, “large dish rubber selection default value” indicating the initial selection state of rubber bands when weighing using the platter 58, “Weighing 1 fraction selection default value”, “Balance 2 fraction selection default value”, “Balance 3 fraction selection default value” indicating the initial selection state of the presence or absence of fractions when weighing by each of the weighing unit 51 to the weighing unit 54 ”,“ Balse 4 fraction selection default value ”, the number of drugs to be weighed when measuring the value per unit amount (single) of medicine“ Weighing when measuring per unit of medicine ” The number (0-999) "can be set and in response to a user operation.

 また、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記制御部10により、前記表示部20にPTPシートを束ねる輪ゴムの大きさ又は種類などを入力するための「ゴム大」、「ゴム中」、「ゴム小」、「ゴムなし」などの操作キーが表示されることが考えられる。この場合、「ゴム大」、「ゴム中」、「ゴム小」、「ゴムなし」などの操作キーの操作に応じて、前記制御部10がPTPシートに使用されている輪ゴムの大きさを切り替えることが考えられる。これにより、PTPシートと共に前記秤量部5Nに載置された輪ゴムの重量を考慮して秤量値と目標値との照合を行うことができる。特に、PTPシートを束ねる際に使用する輪ゴムの大きさ又は種類は、PTPシートの枚数だけではなく、PTPシートの大きさに応じて異なることも考えられる。そのため、PTPシートの枚数だけで輪ゴムの大きさ又は種類などが一義的に定まらない場合がある。これに対し、前述したように「ゴム大」、「ゴム中」、「ゴム小」、「ゴムなし」などの操作キーの操作に応じて輪ゴムの大きさ又は種類を任意に選択可能な構成では、ユーザーが実際のPTPシートに使用されている輪ゴムを見て輪ゴムの大きさ又は種類などを設定することができる。また、例えば複数のPTPシートを輪ゴムで束ねている場合に、そのPTPシートの束を複数に分けて複数の前記秤量部5Nに載置させる場合には、いずれかの秤量部5Nだけに輪ゴムが載置されることが考えられる。特に、輪ゴムを必要としない枚数のPTPシートが載置される前記秤量部5Nに輪ゴムが載置されることが考えられる。また、PTPシートの枚数が「ゴム小」に対応するものであっても、そのPTPシートが「ゴム大」の輪ゴムと共に前記秤量部5Nに載置されることが考えられる。この場合でも、前述したように「ゴム大」、「ゴム中」、「ゴム小」、「ゴムなし」などの操作キーの操作に応じて輪ゴムの大きさ又は種類を任意に選択可能な構成では、ユーザーが実際のPTPシートと共に輪ゴムが載置されているか否かに応じて前記秤量部5N各々に対応する輪ゴムの有無、大きさ又は種類などを設定することができる。

Further, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 inputs “size of rubber”, “medium rubber”, “small rubber” for inputting the size or type of the rubber band for binding the PTP sheet to the display unit 20. An operation key such as “no rubber” may be displayed. In this case, the control unit 10 switches the size of the rubber band used for the PTP sheet in accordance with the operation of operation keys such as “large rubber”, “medium rubber”, “small rubber”, “no rubber”, and the like. It is possible. Thereby, the weighing value and the target value can be collated in consideration of the weight of the rubber band placed on the weighing unit 5N together with the PTP sheet. In particular, the size or type of the rubber band used for bundling the PTP sheets may differ depending on not only the number of PTP sheets but also the size of the PTP sheets. For this reason, the size or type of rubber band may not be uniquely determined only by the number of PTP sheets. On the other hand, as described above, in the configuration in which the size or type of the rubber band can be arbitrarily selected according to the operation of the operation keys such as “large rubber”, “medium rubber”, “small rubber”, “no rubber”, etc. The user can set the size or type of the rubber band by looking at the rubber band used in the actual PTP sheet. In addition, for example, when a plurality of PTP sheets are bundled with rubber bands, when the PTP sheet bundle is divided into a plurality of parts and placed on the plurality of weighing parts 5N, the rubber bands are provided only on one of the weighing parts 5N. It is possible to be placed. In particular, it is conceivable that the rubber band is placed on the weighing unit 5N where the number of PTP sheets not requiring the rubber band is placed. Further, even if the number of PTP sheets corresponds to “small rubber”, it is conceivable that the PTP sheet is placed on the weighing unit 5N together with the rubber rubber of “large rubber”. Even in this case, as described above, the size or type of the rubber band can be arbitrarily selected according to the operation of the operation keys such as “large rubber”, “medium rubber”, “small rubber”, “no rubber”, etc. Depending on whether or not the user puts the rubber band together with the actual PTP sheet, the presence / absence, size or type of the rubber band corresponding to each weighing unit 5N can be set.

 なお、前記PTPシートの耳の重量の前記目標値に対する反映方法(計算方法)、及び前記輪ゴムの重量の前記目標値に対する反映方法(計算方法)は、薬局又は医療機関ごとに異なるため、これらの反映方法が予め設定可能であることが考えられる。例えば、前記PTPシートの耳の重量の前記目標値の反映方法として耳付きに対応する第1内規に基づく第1演算式と、耳なしに対応する第2内規に基づく第2演算式とが設定されており、前記制御部10が、前記PTPシートの耳付きが選択された場合は前記第1内規に対応する前記第1演算式に基づいて前記目標値又は秤量値を補正し、前記PTPシートの耳なしが選択された場合は前記第2内規に対応する前記第2演算式に基づいて前記目標値又は秤量値を補正することが考えられる。また、前記PTPシートの調剤方法として、例えば「1錠の場合には耳を残す」のように耳の残し方が規定されていることがある。そのため、前記PTPシートの耳の残し方に従って秤量値と目標値との照合を行った結果、適正でなかった場合には、耳の残し方が適正でない可能性を前記表示部20への表示などによって報知することが考えられる。例えば、処方データに基づいて調剤するべきPTPシートの枚数に1錠分の端数が生じている場合には、その1錠分のPTPシートには耳が残っているはずであるため、1錠分のPTPシートに耳が存在するものとして秤量値と目標値との照合を行うことが考えられる。これにより、前記PTPシートの耳の残し方が遵守されていない可能性がある旨をユーザーに伝えることができ、教育的機能を実現することができる。

In addition, since the reflection method (calculation method) with respect to the target value of the weight of the ear of the PTP sheet and the reflection method (calculation method) with respect to the target value of the weight of the rubber band are different for each pharmacy or medical institution, these It is conceivable that the reflection method can be set in advance. For example, as a method for reflecting the target value of the weight of the ear of the PTP sheet, a first arithmetic expression based on a first internal rule corresponding to the ear and a second arithmetic expression based on a second internal rule corresponding to the absence of the ear are set. And the control unit 10 corrects the target value or the weighing value based on the first arithmetic expression corresponding to the first internal rule when the PTP sheet is selected to have the ear, and the PTP sheet If no ear is selected, it is conceivable to correct the target value or the weighing value based on the second arithmetic expression corresponding to the second internal rule. In addition, as a method for dispensing the PTP sheet, for example, a method of leaving an ear may be defined such as “leave an ear in the case of one tablet”. Therefore, if the result of the comparison between the measured value and the target value is not appropriate according to the method of leaving the ears of the PTP sheet, the possibility that the method of leaving the ears is not appropriate is displayed on the display unit 20. It is conceivable to notify by For example, if there is a fraction of one tablet in the number of PTP sheets to be dispensed based on the prescription data, the ears should remain on the one tablet PTP sheet, so one tablet It is conceivable that the weighed value and the target value are collated on the assumption that there is an ear in the PTP sheet. Accordingly, it is possible to inform the user that there is a possibility that the method of leaving the ear of the PTP sheet is not observed, and an educational function can be realized.

<ステップS38>

 ステップS38において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS37における照合結果が一致である場合には(S38:Yes側)、処理をステップS39に移行させ、前記ステップS37における照合結果が一致しない場合には(S38:No側)、処理をステップS381に移行させる。

<Step S38>

In step S38, if the collation result in step S37 is coincident (S38: Yes side), the control unit 10 moves the process to step S39, and if the collation result in step S37 is not coincident. (S38: No side), the process proceeds to step S381.

<ステップS381>

 ステップS381において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で同一の薬品に対応する秤量部として特定された一又は複数の秤量部5N各々に対応する前記秤量表示領域A1Mにエラーメッセージを表示させる。例えば、前記エラーメッセージは、「鑑査対象薬品の実測値が、上限値又は下限値を超過(又は不足)しています。鑑査を承認する場合はOKキーを押して下さい。再秤量を行う場合は、キャンセルキーを押して下さい」などである。また、前記制御部10は、前記エラーメッセージと共に、OKキー及びキャンセルキーを前記表示部20に表示させる。そして、前記制御部10は、前記OKキーが操作された場合には、前記秤量鑑査対象薬品の鑑査が完了したと判断する。一方、前記キャンセルキーが操作された場合、前記制御部10は、「鑑査対象薬品を取り出し、再度秤量して下さい」のようなメッセージを表示させ、処理を前記ステップS31に移行させる。

<Step S381>

In step S381, the control unit 10 displays an error message in the weighing display area A1M corresponding to each of the one or more weighing units 5N specified as the weighing unit corresponding to the same medicine in step S33. For example, the error message is “The measured value of the drug to be inspected exceeds (or is insufficient) the upper or lower limit value. Press the OK key to approve the inspection. Please press the cancel key ". The control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display an OK key and a cancel key together with the error message. Then, when the OK key is operated, the control unit 10 determines that the inspection of the weighing inspection target medicine is completed. On the other hand, when the cancel key is operated, the control unit 10 displays a message such as “Please take out the medicine to be inspected and weigh it again”, and the process proceeds to step S31.

<ステップS39>

 ステップS39において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で同一の薬品に対応する秤量部として特定された一又は複数の前記秤量部5N各々に対応する前記秤量表示領域A1Mに、秤量値確定後の前記秤量部5Nに対応する秤量結果を予め定められた単位に換算した数量を表示させると共に、照合結果が一致である旨を表示させる。このように、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果及び前記ステップS38による照合結果を前記秤量表示領域A1Mに表示させる処理は前記制御部10の前記表示処理部17によって実行される。なお、前記大皿58を用いている場合、前記制御部10は、前記秤量表示領域A41(図11参照)に前記照合結果を表示させる。また、前記ステップS39において、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果である秤量値、及びその秤量値を薬品の単位に換算した換算値(錠、カプセル、枚などの単位の値)のいずれか一方又は両方を前記処方データと共に鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記憶する。これにより、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12に前記鑑査履歴を表示させる際に、前記処方データの内容と共に前記秤量値又は前記換算値などを表示させることが可能である。

<Step S39>

In step S39, the control unit 10 determines the weighing value in the weighing display area A1M corresponding to each of the weighing units 5N identified as the weighing unit corresponding to the same medicine in step S33. The quantity obtained by converting the weighing result corresponding to the weighing unit 5N into a predetermined unit is displayed, and the fact that the collation result is coincident is displayed. As described above, the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10 executes the process of displaying the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N and the collation result by the step S38 in the weighing display area A1M. In addition, when the said platter 58 is used, the said control part 10 displays the said collation result on the said weighing display area A41 (refer FIG. 11). In step S39, the control unit 10 determines the weighing value as a weighing result of the weighing unit 5N, and a converted value obtained by converting the weighing value into a unit of medicine (value of units such as tablets, capsules, and sheets). Either or both of these are stored in the storage unit 40 together with the prescription data as an inspection history. Thereby, the said control part 10 can display the said measured value, the said conversion value, etc. with the content of the said prescription data, when displaying the said inspection history on the said inspection history inquiry screen D12.

 ところで、前記鑑査支援装置100に、USB、RS232C、又はBluetooth(登録商標)などの通信規格に従ってプリンターが接続されることも考えられる。この場合、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS39又はステップS381において、前記プリンターに前記ステップS37による秤量結果を印字出力させることが考えられる。なお、前記印字出力で出力されるジャーナルには、例えば、鑑査開始日時、処方番号、引換券番号、患者ID、患者氏名、診療科、鑑査者、処方データ、及びRpデータが印字される。また、前記ジャーナルでは、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに含まれる薬品識別情報としてJANコードが印刷されることが考えられる。なお、前記制御部10が、GS1コードをJANコードに変換して印字出力可能な構成も考えられる。

Incidentally, it is conceivable that a printer is connected to the inspection support apparatus 100 in accordance with a communication standard such as USB, RS232C, or Bluetooth (registered trademark). In this case, it is conceivable that the control unit 10 causes the printer to print out the weighing result obtained in step S37 in step S39 or step S381. In addition, for example, inspection start date and time, prescription number, voucher number, patient ID, patient name, medical department, examiner, prescription data, and Rp data are printed in the journal output by the printout. In the journal, a JAN code may be printed as medicine identification information included in the prescription data or the Rp data. A configuration in which the control unit 10 can convert the GS1 code into a JAN code and print it out is also conceivable.

<ステップS40>

 続いて、ステップS40において、前記制御部10は、前記撮影部70による撮影画像の記録タイミングを待ち受ける(S40:No側)。具体的に、前記制御部10は、4つの前記秤量部51~54の全ての秤量値が確定した場合、或いは、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに処方薬として含まれる全ての薬品について前記秤量鑑査処理が終了した場合(前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに他の薬品が鑑査対象として残っていない場合)に、前記撮影部70による撮影画像を記録すると判断し(S40:Yes側)、処理をステップS41に移行させる。前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに処方薬として含まれる全ての薬品について前記秤量鑑査処理が終了した場合とは、例えば前記Rpデータに6種類の処方薬が含まれる場合であって、まず4つの前記秤量部51~54を用いて4種類の処方薬についての秤量が行われた後、残りの2種類の処方薬について2つの前記秤量部5Nを用いた秤量が行われた場合である。なお、全ての前記秤量部51~54の照合処理が完了した後に代えて、全ての前記秤量部51~54の秤量値が安定した時点で前記撮影部70による撮影が行われることも考えられる。

<Step S40>

Subsequently, in step S40, the control unit 10 waits for the recording timing of the captured image by the imaging unit 70 (S40: No side). Specifically, the control unit 10 performs the weighing inspection when all the weighing values of the four weighing units 51 to 54 are determined, or for all drugs included as prescription drugs in the prescription data or the Rp data. When the process is completed (when no other medicine remains in the prescription data or the Rp data as an inspection target), it is determined to record the captured image by the imaging unit 70 (S40: Yes side), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S41. The case where the weighing inspection process is completed for all drugs included as prescription drugs in the prescription data or the Rp data is, for example, a case where six types of prescription drugs are included in the Rp data. This is a case where, after weighing the four types of prescription drugs using the weighing units 51 to 54, the remaining two types of prescription drugs are weighed using the two weighing units 5N. It is also conceivable that photographing by the photographing unit 70 is performed when the weighing values of all the weighing units 51 to 54 are stabilized instead of after the collation processing of all the weighing units 51 to 54 is completed.

<ステップS41>

 ステップS41において、前記制御部10は、前記撮影部70による撮影画像を記録し、前記撮影画像を前記処方鑑査画面D10に表示されている前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに対応付けて前記鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記憶させる。なお、前記撮影部70は、全ての前記秤量部51~54の前記秤量皿55を同時に撮影する。また、前記秤量部51~54に前記大皿58が載置されている場合には、前記大皿58が撮影される。ここに、係る処理は前記制御部10の前記撮影処理部18によって実行される。これにより、前述したように、前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12などによって前記鑑査履歴を参照する際に前記撮影画像を確認することが可能である。ところで、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS40で前記記録タイミングが到来したと判断した場合、前記表示部20に「撮影を開始します」のような撮影開始の旨を表示させた後、予め定められた待機時間(例えば2秒程度)が経過してから前記撮影部70に前記秤量部51~54を撮影させることが考えられる。これにより、ユーザーが手などを前記撮影部70による撮影範囲の外に退避させることが期待され、無駄な撮影を抑制することができる。なお、前記秤量鑑査処理は前記秤量部5N各々について個別に実行されるが、前記ステップS41の撮影処理は共通の処理として実行される。このように全ての前記秤量部51~54の秤量値が安定した後に全ての前記秤量部51~54が同時に撮影されるため、前記鑑査支援装置100による鑑査の証拠として有効な撮影画像が記憶される。即ち、前記記録タイミングが到来した時点では1度の撮影のみが実行される。なお、前記秤量鑑査処理ごとに個別のタイミングで前記撮影部70による撮影が行われることも他の実施形態として考えられる。この場合には、前記秤量部51~54各々と前記薬品識別情報との対応付けが個別に解除される。例えば、前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が確定して前記照合処理が終了した後、前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が減少した場合に、前記秤量部5Nと前記薬品識別情報との対応付けが解除されることが考えられる。さらに、前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が安定した後に前記撮影キーK18が操作されるタイミングで前記撮影部70による撮影が行われると共に、前記秤量部5Nの前記薬品識別情報との対応付けが解除されることも考えられる。

<Step S41>

In step S41, the control unit 10 records a photographed image by the photographing unit 70, and associates the photographed image with the prescription data or the Rp data displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 as the inspection history. The data is stored in the storage unit 40. Note that the photographing unit 70 photographs the weighing dishes 55 of all the weighing units 51 to 54 at the same time. When the platter 58 is placed on the weighing units 51 to 54, the platter 58 is photographed. This processing is executed by the photographing processing unit 18 of the control unit 10. Thereby, as described above, the photographed image can be confirmed when referring to the inspection history on the inspection history inquiry screen D12 or the like. By the way, when the control unit 10 determines that the recording timing has arrived in step S40, the control unit 10 displays on the display unit 20 a start of shooting such as “starts shooting” and then determines in advance. It is conceivable that the weighing unit 51 to 54 is photographed by the photographing unit 70 after a predetermined waiting time (for example, about 2 seconds) has elapsed. Thereby, it is expected that the user retreats the hand or the like out of the shooting range by the shooting unit 70, and useless shooting can be suppressed. The weighing inspection process is individually executed for each weighing unit 5N, but the photographing process in step S41 is executed as a common process. Since all the weighing units 51 to 54 are photographed at the same time after the weighing values of all the weighing units 51 to 54 are stabilized in this way, an effective photographed image is stored as evidence of inspection by the inspection support device 100. The That is, at the time when the recording timing comes, only one shooting is performed. In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that photographing by the photographing unit 70 is performed at an individual timing for each weighing inspection process. In this case, the association between each of the weighing units 51 to 54 and the medicine identification information is individually released. For example, when the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is decreased after the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is confirmed and the collation process is completed, the association between the weighing unit 5N and the medicine identification information is released. It can be considered. Further, the photographing by the photographing unit 70 is performed at the timing when the photographing key K18 is operated after the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is stabilized, and the association with the medicine identification information of the weighing unit 5N is released. It is also conceivable.

 また、前記制御部10は、前記撮影部70による撮影画像を記録した後、前記撮影画像から前記秤量部51~54各々に対応して予め定められた領域の画像を抽出することも他の実施形態として考えられる。この場合、前記制御部10は、前記秤量表示領域A11~A14各々に対応して予め定められた領域各々の画像も抽出する。そして、前記秤量部51~54各々に対応する画像及び前記秤量表示領域A11~A14各々に対応する画像を個別の画像データとして前記記憶部40に記憶させる。なお、前記制御部10は、前記撮影部70から受信する動画情報を鑑査履歴として前記処方データに対応付けて前記記憶部40に記憶させることも考えられる。

Further, the control unit 10 may record an image of a predetermined region corresponding to each of the weighing units 51 to 54 from the captured image after recording the image captured by the imaging unit 70. Considered as a form. In this case, the control unit 10 also extracts an image of each predetermined region corresponding to each of the weighing display regions A11 to A14. Then, the image corresponding to each of the weighing units 51 to 54 and the image corresponding to each of the weighing display areas A11 to A14 are stored in the storage unit 40 as individual image data. Note that the control unit 10 may store the moving image information received from the imaging unit 70 in the storage unit 40 in association with the prescription data as an inspection history.

 また、前記照合処理の終了後、前記ステップS40において、前記処方鑑査画面D10に表示されている前記撮影キーK18が操作されたと判断された場合に、前記制御部10が、前記撮影部70による撮影画像を記録することが考えられる。なお、前記薬品識別情報に対応する前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果の処方データとの照合が終了したことを条件に前記撮影部70による撮影画像が記録されることも考えられる。

In addition, after the collation process is completed, when it is determined in step S40 that the photographing key K18 displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 has been operated, the control unit 10 performs photographing by the photographing unit 70. It is conceivable to record an image. In addition, it is also conceivable that a photographed image by the photographing unit 70 is recorded on the condition that collation with the prescription data of the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the medicine identification information is completed.

 さらに、前記鑑査支援装置100を使用するユーザーが薬品を薬袋に入れるための作業を行う範囲が前記撮影部70の撮影範囲に含まれており、前記記録タイミングの事象の発生から所定時間経過後に前記撮影部70による撮影画像が記録されることも考えられる。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100で鑑査した後の薬品を薬袋に投入する作業を前記撮影部70で撮影することが可能である。

Further, a range in which a user using the inspection support apparatus 100 performs an operation for putting a medicine in a medicine bag is included in the imaging range of the imaging unit 70, and the predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the event of the recording timing. It is also conceivable that a photographed image by the photographing unit 70 is recorded. Thereby, it is possible to image | photograph the operation | work which throws the chemical | medical agent inspected with the said inspection assistance apparatus 100 into a medicine bag with the said imaging | photography part 70. FIG.

<ステップS42>

 その後、ステップS42において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33において行われた全ての前記薬品識別情報と前記秤量部5Nとの対応付けを解除する。これにより、前記制御部10は、前記薬品識別情報との対応付けが解除された前記秤量部5Nを用いて、次の薬品についての秤量鑑査処理を実行することが可能となる。なお、前記制御部10は、前記薬品識別情報との対応付けが解除された前記秤量部5Nに対応する前記秤量表示領域A1Mの表示をリセット(消去)する。

<Step S42>

Thereafter, in step S42, the control unit 10 cancels the association between all the medicine identification information performed in step S33 and the weighing unit 5N. Thereby, the control unit 10 can execute the weighing inspection process for the next medicine by using the weighing unit 5N whose association with the medicine identification information is released. The control unit 10 resets (erases) the display of the weighing display area A1M corresponding to the weighing unit 5N that has been released from the association with the medicine identification information.

 以上説明したように、前記鑑査支援装置100を用いれば、薬品のPTPシートなどの包装材から薬品識別情報が読み取られるごとに前記秤量鑑査処理(S19)が開始され、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに含まれる処方薬品の鑑査を連続且つ並列で行うことが可能である。そのため、例えば前記処方薬品各々の鑑査作業及び前記処方薬品各々の薬袋への収容作業を効率的且つ正確に行うことが可能となる。

As described above, when the inspection support apparatus 100 is used, the weighing inspection process (S19) is started each time medicine identification information is read from a packaging material such as a medicine PTP sheet, and the prescription data or the Rp data is read. It is possible to carry out inspection of prescription medicines contained in a continuous and in parallel. Therefore, for example, it is possible to efficiently and accurately perform the inspection operation for each of the prescription drugs and the storage operation for each prescription drug in the medicine bag.

 また、前記秤量鑑査処理では、薬品の包装材から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた後、異なる薬品の包装材から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られるまでの間に秤量値が0から増加した前記秤量部が前記秤量鑑査対象薬品に対応する秤量部として特定される。そのため、一の前記薬品識別情報に対応する前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が安定する前に、他の前記薬品識別情報を前記情報読取部60で読み取らせて他の前記秤量部5Nによる秤量を開始させることが可能である。従って、ユーザーは、前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータに含まれる複数種類の薬品についての鑑査を効率的且つ正確に実行することができる。

Further, in the weighing inspection process, the weighing unit in which the weighing value is increased from 0 after the medicine identification information is read from the medicine packaging material and before the medicine identification information is read from the different medicine packaging material. Is specified as a weighing unit corresponding to the drug for weighing inspection. Therefore, before the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N corresponding to the one medicine identification information is stabilized, the other reading information is read by the information reading unit 60 and the weighing by the other weighing unit 5N is started. It is possible to make it. Therefore, the user can efficiently and accurately perform inspection on a plurality of types of medicines included in the prescription data or the Rp data.

 具体的に、前記鑑査支援装置100は、4つの前記秤量部51~54を備える構成であるが、前記秤量部51~54を用いる前記秤量鑑査処理が個別に実行される。例えば、前記Rpデータに4種類の錠剤が処方薬として含まれている場合、ユーザーは、1つ目の錠剤のPTPシートの前記薬品識別情報を前記情報読取部60で読み取って前記秤量部5NにPTPシートを載置する。その後、ユーザーは、2つ目の錠剤のPTPシートの前記薬品識別情報を前記情報読取部60で読み取って前記秤量部5NにPTPシートを載置する。このとき、2つ目の錠剤のPTPシートの前記薬品識別情報の読み取りは、1つ目の秤量部5Nの秤量値が安定する前であってもよい。そして、前記薬品識別情報各々について開始された前記秤量鑑査処理各々では、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果に基づく鑑査結果が前記秤量表示領域A1Mに表示される。また、ユーザーは、その後も続けて3つ目の錠剤のPTPシートの前記薬品識別情報を前記情報読取部60で読み取って前記秤量部5NにPTPシートを載置し、4つ目の錠剤のPTPシートの前記薬品識別情報を前記情報読取部60で読み取って前記秤量部5NにPTPシートを載置する。このとき、前記秤量部5N各々による秤量結果と前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータとの照合は、前記薬品識別情報が読み取られたときに個別に開始される。そのため、前記秤量部5N各々による照合処理が順次終了することになる。従って、4種類全ての錠剤のPTPシートを前記秤量部5Nに載置してから全ての前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果の照合を行う場合に比べて、最後(4番目)のPTPシートを前記秤量部5Nに載置させてから前記鑑査支援装置100による秤量鑑査処理が終了するまでの時間を短縮することができる。

Specifically, the inspection support apparatus 100 includes four weighing units 51 to 54, and the weighing inspection process using the weighing units 51 to 54 is individually executed. For example, when four types of tablets are included as prescription drugs in the Rp data, the user reads the drug identification information of the PTP sheet of the first tablet with the information reading unit 60 and stores it in the weighing unit 5N. Place the PTP sheet. Thereafter, the user reads the drug identification information of the PTP sheet of the second tablet by the information reading unit 60 and places the PTP sheet on the weighing unit 5N. At this time, the medicine identification information on the PTP sheet of the second tablet may be read before the weighing value of the first weighing unit 5N is stabilized. In each of the weighing inspection processes started for each medicine identification information, the inspection result based on the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N is displayed in the weighing display area A1M. In addition, the user continues to read the medicine identification information of the PTP sheet of the third tablet by the information reading unit 60 and place the PTP sheet on the weighing unit 5N, and the PTP of the fourth tablet The medicine reading information of the sheet is read by the information reading unit 60, and the PTP sheet is placed on the weighing unit 5N. At this time, the comparison between the weighing result by each weighing unit 5N and the prescription data or the Rp data is started individually when the medicine identification information is read. Therefore, the collation process by each of the weighing units 5N is sequentially terminated. Accordingly, the last (fourth) PTP sheet is weighed as compared with the case where all the four types of PTP sheets are placed on the weighing unit 5N and the weighing results of all the weighing units 5N are compared. It is possible to shorten the time from the placement on the unit 5N to the end of the weighing inspection process by the inspection support device 100.

 一方、前記鑑査支援装置100は、4つの前記秤量部51~54を備えるものであるため、そのままでは5種類の薬品が前記Rpデータに含まれる場合に、5つ目の薬品のPTPシートの前記薬品識別情報を前記情報読取部60で読み取ってもそのPTPシートを載置することができない。そこで、前記制御部10が、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果と前記処方データ又は前記Rpデータとの照合が終了するごとに前記秤量部5Nと前記薬品識別情報との対応付けを解除することが他の実施形態として考えられる。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100が有する前記秤量部51~54の数より多い5種類以上の薬品が前記Rpデータに含まれる場合であっても、前記秤量部51~54を繰り返し使用することにより5種類以上の薬品の秤量鑑査を並行して順次実行することが可能である。即ち、ユーザーは、1つ目~4つ目のいずれかの薬品に対応する前記秤量鑑査処理が終了した時点で5つ目の薬品の前記薬品識別情報を前記情報読取部60で読み取って前記秤量部5NにPTPシートを載置することができ、先に鑑査が終了した薬品については先に薬袋に収容していくことが可能である。従って、ユーザーは、前記秤量部5Nの数よりも多い種類の前記PTPシートの鑑査を効率的且つ正確に実行することができる。但し、この場合には、前記ステップS40~S41における撮影を行うことができない。そのため、この種の構成は、例えば前記鑑査支援装置100が前記撮影部70による撮影画像の記録機能を有していない場合、前記記録機能が無効に設定されている場合、前記撮影画像の記録タイミングが前記撮影キーK18の操作である場合、又は前記撮影画像の記録タイミングが前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果の処方データとの照合が終了することである場合などに好適である。

On the other hand, since the inspection support device 100 includes the four weighing units 51 to 54, when the five types of medicines are included in the Rp data as they are, the PTP sheet of the fifth medicine is the above-mentioned. Even if the medicine identification information is read by the information reading unit 60, the PTP sheet cannot be placed. Therefore, the control unit 10 may cancel the association between the weighing unit 5N and the medicine identification information every time the comparison between the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N and the prescription data or the Rp data is completed. It can be considered as an embodiment. As a result, even when five or more kinds of medicines more than the number of the weighing units 51 to 54 included in the inspection support device 100 are included in the Rp data, the weighing units 51 to 54 are repeatedly used. It is possible to sequentially carry out weighing inspections of five or more kinds of chemicals in parallel. That is, when the weighing inspection process corresponding to any one of the first to fourth medicines is completed, the user reads the medicine identification information of the fifth medicine by the information reading unit 60 and reads the weighing. The PTP sheet can be placed on the part 5N, and the medicine that has been inspected first can be stored in the medicine bag first. Therefore, the user can efficiently and accurately execute inspection of the types of the PTP sheets larger than the number of the weighing units 5N. However, in this case, it is not possible to perform photographing in steps S40 to S41. Therefore, this type of configuration is, for example, when the inspection support apparatus 100 does not have a recording function for recording a photographed image by the photographing unit 70, or when the recording function is set to be invalid, Is an operation of the photographing key K18, or when the recording timing of the photographed image is that the collation with the prescription data of the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is completed.

[他の機能]

 以下、前記鑑査支援装置100が備える他の機能について説明する。なお、前記鑑査支援装置100は、下記の複数の機能のうち一又は複数の機能を備えるものであればよい。

[Other functions]

Hereinafter, other functions provided in the inspection support apparatus 100 will be described. In addition, the said inspection assistance apparatus 100 should just be provided with one or several functions among the following several functions.

[包装鑑査機能]

 前記鑑査支援装置100では、薬品が複数収容されているPTP(press through pack)シート又はヒートシールのような第1包装材で収容された状態で前記秤量鑑査処理を実行することが可能である。一方、前記秤量鑑査処理の対象が、複数の前記第1包装材がアルミ包装材又は薬箱のような第2包装材に収容されている薬品であることも考えられる。この場合、薬剤師などの作業者は、前記鑑査支援装置100を用いた鑑査作業において、前記第2包装材から前記第1包装材を取り出すことになる。

[Packaging inspection function]

In the inspection support apparatus 100, the weighing inspection process can be executed in a state of being accommodated in a first packaging material such as a PTP (press through pack) sheet or a heat seal in which a plurality of medicines are accommodated. On the other hand, it is also conceivable that the object of the weighing inspection process is a medicine in which a plurality of the first packaging materials are accommodated in a second packaging material such as an aluminum packaging material or a medicine box. In this case, an operator such as a pharmacist takes out the first packaging material from the second packaging material in the inspection work using the inspection support device 100.

 これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100が、複数の前記第1包装材が前記第2包装材に収容された状態のままで前記秤量鑑査処理を実行可能な包装鑑査機能を備えることが考えられる。具体的には、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って各種の処理を実行することにより、前記包装鑑査機能を具現する。なお、以下の説明で用いる「第1包装材」の単語は前記第1包装材のみではなく前記第1包装材に複数の薬品が収容されている状態を意味するものであり、「第2包装材」の単語は前記第2包装材のみではなく前記第2包装材に複数の前記第1包装材が収容されている状態を意味する。

On the other hand, it is conceivable that the inspection support device 100 has a packaging inspection function capable of executing the weighing inspection process while a plurality of the first packaging materials are accommodated in the second packaging material. Specifically, the control unit 10 implements the package inspection function by executing various processes according to the inspection support program. Note that the word “first packaging material” used in the following description means a state in which a plurality of medicines are contained in the first packaging material as well as the first packaging material. The word “material” means not only the second packaging material but also a plurality of the first packaging materials contained in the second packaging material.

 まず、前記第1包装材及び前記第2包装材には、例えば同一のGS1コードのような前記薬品識別情報が付与されている。そのため、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理ステップS18において、前記第1包装材又は前記第2包装材から前記薬品識別情報が読み取られた場合に、前記薬品識別情報に対応する処方薬品を秤量鑑査対象薬品として選択することが可能である。また、前記制御部10は、前記表示部20及び前記操作部30を用いたユーザー操作に応じて前記秤量鑑査対象薬品を選択することも可能である。このように、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量対象の薬品である前記秤量対象薬品を選択するための処理を実行するときの前記制御部10が選択処理部の一例である。

First, the medicine identification information such as the same GS1 code is given to the first packaging material and the second packaging material. Therefore, the control unit 10 weighs the prescription medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information when the medicine identification information is read from the first packaging material or the second packaging material in the inspection support processing step S18. It is possible to select it as a drug subject to inspection. In addition, the control unit 10 can select the drug for weighing inspection according to a user operation using the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30. Thus, the said control part 10 when performing the process for selecting the said measurement object chemical | medical agent which is the chemical | medical agent of the weighing object by the said weighing part 5N is an example of a selection process part.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100における初期設定時又は秤量鑑査開始時に、前記表示部20及び前記操作部30を用いたユーザーの操作入力に応じて、前記秤量部51~54ごとに前記包装鑑査機能の有効及び無効を切り換えることが可能である。以下、前記包装鑑査機能が有効な状態を包装鑑査モードと称し、前記包装鑑査機能が無効な状態を通常モードと称する。

Then, the control unit 10 sets the weighing units 51 to 54 in response to a user's operation input using the display unit 20 and the operation unit 30 at the time of initial setting in the inspection support device 100 or at the start of weighing inspection. It is possible to switch between valid and invalid of the package inspection function. Hereinafter, a state in which the packaging inspection function is valid is referred to as a packaging inspection mode, and a state in which the packaging inspection function is invalid is referred to as a normal mode.

 例えば、図15に示されるように、前記処方鑑査画面D10の前記秤量表示領域A11~A14に「包装有り」及び「包装無し」を切り換えるための操作キーK51が表示されている。そして、前記制御部10は、前記秤量表示領域A11~A14各々における前記操作キーK51の操作に応じて、前記秤量部51~54ごとの前記包装鑑査機能の有効及び無効を交互に切り換える。

For example, as shown in FIG. 15, an operation key K51 for switching between “with packaging” and “without packaging” is displayed in the weighing display areas A11 to A14 of the prescription inspection screen D10. Then, the control unit 10 switches between enabling and disabling the packaging inspection function for each of the weighing units 51 to 54 in accordance with the operation of the operation key K51 in each of the weighing display areas A11 to A14.

 一方、前記医薬品マスターでは、薬品ごとに対応する情報として、前記第2包装材の単位重量(総重量)を示す包装重量、及び前記第2包装材に収容されている薬品の数を示す包装内個数が記憶されている。ここに、図16は、前記医薬品マスターにおけるバーコード情報を登録するための登録画面D14の一例を示す図である。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13(図14参照)においてバーコード情報の登録を開始するための操作キーが操作された場合に前記登録画面D14を表示する。なお、図16では、マグラックス錠330mgの薬品について3つのバーコード情報が登録されている状態が示されている。前記バーコード情報には、バーコードの種別、バーコードの内容、規格、単位、PTP内個数、単一重量、包装内個数、包装重量、画像、及び区分の各項目の情報が薬品の個別情報として含まれている。

On the other hand, in the medicine master, as information corresponding to each medicine, the packaging weight indicating the unit weight (total weight) of the second packaging material and the number of medicines contained in the second packaging material The number is stored. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a registration screen D14 for registering barcode information in the pharmaceutical master. Specifically, the control unit 10 displays the registration screen D14 when an operation key for starting registration of barcode information is operated on the master maintenance screen D13 (see FIG. 14). In addition, in FIG. 16, the state in which three barcode information is registered about the medicine of the Magrax tablet 330 mg is shown. In the barcode information, information on each item of the type of barcode, the content of the barcode, the standard, the unit, the number in the PTP, the single weight, the number in the package, the package weight, the image, and the classification is the individual information of the medicine Included as

 例えば、図16に示されている前記登録画面D14の1レコード目では、一つの前記第1包装材に収容されている薬品の数を示すPTP内個数が「10.00」に設定されており、一つの前記第1包装材の重量を示す単一重量が「5.72g」に設定されている。また、同じく前記1レコード目では、一つの前記第2包装材に収容されている薬品の数を示す包装内個数が「100」に設定されており、一つの前記第2包装材の重量を示す包装重量が「62.20g」に設定されている。

For example, in the first record of the registration screen D14 shown in FIG. 16, the number in the PTP indicating the number of medicines contained in one first packaging material is set to “10.00”. The single weight indicating the weight of one of the first packaging materials is set to “5.72 g”. Similarly, in the first record, the number in the packaging indicating the number of medicines contained in one second packaging material is set to “100”, indicating the weight of one second packaging material. The packaging weight is set to “62.20 g”.

 前記制御部10は、前記登録画面D14におけるユーザー操作に応じて、前記PTP内個数、前記単一重量、前記包装内個数、及び前記包装重量などを設定可能である。例えば、前記PTP内個数、前記単一重量、前記包装内個数、及び前記包装重量などは、ユーザーによる数値入力操作に応じて設定され、又は予め指定されるマザーマスターの情報に基づいて更新されてもよい。

The control unit 10 can set the number in the PTP, the single weight, the number in the packaging, the packaging weight, and the like according to a user operation on the registration screen D14. For example, the number in the PTP, the single weight, the number in the package, the package weight, etc. are set according to the numerical input operation by the user or updated based on the information of the mother master specified in advance. Also good.

 なお、前記包装内個数に代えて一つの前記第2包装材に収容されている前記第1包装材の数が設定されていてもよい。この場合、前記制御部10は、一つの前記第2包装材に収容されている前記第1包装材の数と、前記PTP内個数とに基づいて一つの前記第2包装材に収容されている薬品の数を算出することが可能である。

In addition, it may replace with the number in the said package, and the number of the said 1st packaging materials accommodated in one said 2nd packaging material may be set. In this case, the control unit 10 is accommodated in one second packaging material based on the number of the first packaging materials accommodated in one second packaging material and the number in the PTP. It is possible to calculate the number of drugs.

 また、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記秤量部5Nを用いて前記第1包装材の前記単一重量及び前記第2包装材の前記包装重量などを設定することが可能である。具体的に、前記登録画面D14では、前記第1包装材の前記単一重量の設定を開始するための操作キーK141、及び前記第2包装材の前記包装重量の設定を開始するための操作キーK142が各レコードに対応して表示されている。前記登録画面D14に示される例では、各レコードに対応する前記単一重量及び前記包装重量各々のセルが前記操作キーK141、K142として機能する。

Further, in the inspection support apparatus 100, it is possible to set the single weight of the first packaging material, the packaging weight of the second packaging material, and the like using the weighing unit 5N. Specifically, on the registration screen D14, an operation key K141 for starting the setting of the single weight of the first packaging material and an operation key for starting the setting of the packaging weight of the second packaging material. K142 is displayed corresponding to each record. In the example shown on the registration screen D14, the cells of the single weight and the package weight corresponding to each record function as the operation keys K141 and K142.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記登録画面D14において、前記操作キーK141が操作されると、図17に示されるように、前記操作キーK141に対応するレコードの薬品の前記第1包装材を二つだけ前記秤量部5Nに乗せることを促すメッセージを含む報知画面D141が表示される。これにより、作業者によって前記第1包装材が二つだけ前記秤量部5Nに載置される。その後、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果が確定すると、その秤量結果を二で割ることにより前記第1包装材の単一当たりの重量を算出し、前記単一重量として設定する。なお、前記制御部10は、前記単一重量の設定時に秤量する前記第1包装材の数は二つに限らず、前記登録画面D14におけるユーザー操作に応じて予め任意に設定可能である。また、前記制御部10は、前記単一重量を日常の前記鑑査支援装置100による前記秤量部51~54の秤量結果に基づいて更新する学習機能を有していてもよい。例えば、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54を用いて秤量される薬品各々の秤量結果から算出される単一重量を薬品ごとに平均化した値を前記単一重量として前記バーコード情報に登録することが考えられる。

Then, when the operation key K141 is operated on the registration screen D14, the control unit 10 stores the first packaging material of the medicine in the record corresponding to the operation key K141 as shown in FIG. A notification screen D141 including a message that prompts the user to place only one on the weighing unit 5N is displayed. Accordingly, only two of the first packaging materials are placed on the weighing unit 5N by the operator. Thereafter, when the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is determined, the control unit 10 calculates the weight per unit of the first packaging material by dividing the weighing result by two, and sets it as the single weight. . In addition, the said control part 10 can set arbitrarily the number of the said 1st packaging materials measured at the time of the setting of the said single weight beforehand according to user operation in the said registration screen D14. Further, the control unit 10 may have a learning function for updating the single weight based on the weighing results of the weighing units 51 to 54 by the daily inspection support apparatus 100. For example, the control unit 10 uses the bar code information as a single weight obtained by averaging a single weight calculated from a weighing result of each drug weighed using the weighing units 51 to 54 for each drug. Can be registered.

 同じく、前記制御部10は、前記登録画面D14において、前記操作キーK142が操作されると、図18に示されるように、前記操作キーK142に対応するレコードの薬品の前記第2包装材を一つだけ前記秤量部5Nに乗せることを促すメッセージを含む報知画面D142が表示される。これにより、作業者によって前記第2包装材が一つだけ前記秤量部5Nに載置される。その後、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果が確定すると、その秤量結果を前記第2包装材の前記包装重量として設定する。また、前記制御部10は、前記包装重量を日常の前記鑑査支援装置100による前記秤量部51~54の秤量結果に基づいて更新する学習機能を有していてもよい。例えば、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54を用いて秤量される薬品各々の秤量結果から算出される包装重量を薬品ごとに平均化した値を前記包装重量として前記バーコード情報に登録することが考えられる。

Similarly, when the operation key K142 is operated on the registration screen D14, the control unit 10 sets the second packaging material for the medicine in the record corresponding to the operation key K142 as shown in FIG. A notification screen D142 including a message prompting to put the weighing unit 5N on the weighing unit 5N is displayed. Accordingly, only one second packaging material is placed on the weighing unit 5N by the operator. Thereafter, when the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is determined, the control unit 10 sets the weighing result as the packaging weight of the second packaging material. Further, the control unit 10 may have a learning function for updating the package weight based on the weighing results of the weighing units 51 to 54 by the daily inspection support apparatus 100. For example, the control unit 10 registers, in the barcode information, the value obtained by averaging the packaging weight calculated from the weighing result of each drug weighed using the weighing units 51 to 54 for each drug as the packaging weight. It is possible to do.

<通常モード>

 そして、前記通常モードでは、前記秤量鑑査処理(図13参照)の前記ステップS31において、前記制御部10が、前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品の前記単一重量及び前記PTP内個数を前記医薬品マスターから取得する。そして、前記ステップS34において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で特定された前記秤量部5Nによる秤量値と前記単一重量及び前記PTP内個数とに応じた薬品量の表示を開始する。例えば、前記制御部10は、図15の前記秤量表示部A14に示されているように、前記通常モードに設定されている前記秤量部54の秤量結果として「35錠」を表示する。そして、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS37において、前記秤量部54の秤量結果と前記Rpデータとを照合する。

<Normal mode>

In the normal mode, in step S31 of the weighing inspection process (see FIG. 13), the control unit 10 determines the single weight and the number in the PTP of the medicine corresponding to the medicine identification information as the medicine master. Get from. In step S34, the control unit 10 starts displaying the chemical amount according to the weighing value, the single weight, and the number in the PTP by the weighing unit 5N specified in step S33. For example, as shown in the weighing display unit A14 in FIG. 15, the control unit 10 displays “35 tablets” as the weighing result of the weighing unit 54 set in the normal mode. And the said control part 10 collates the weighing result of the said weighing part 54, and the said Rp data in the said step S37.

<包装鑑査モード>

 一方、前記包装鑑査モードでは、前記秤量鑑査処理(図13参照)の前記ステップS31において、前記制御部10が、前記薬品識別情報に対応する薬品の前記包装内個数及び前記包装重量を前記医薬品マスターから取得する。ここに、係る取得処理を実行するときの前記制御部10が取得処理部の一例である。

<Packaging inspection mode>

On the other hand, in the packaging inspection mode, in the step S31 of the weighing inspection process (see FIG. 13), the control unit 10 determines the number of medicines in the packaging corresponding to the medicine identification information and the packaging weight. Get from. The said control part 10 when performing the acquisition process which concerns here is an example of an acquisition process part.

 そして、前記ステップS34において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS33で特定された前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果と前前記包装内個数及び前記包装重量とに応じた薬品量の表示を開始する。なお、前記表示処理は、前記制御部10の前記表示処理部17によって実行される。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量値と前記第2包装材の総重量である前記包装重量のn倍(nは1以上の整数)の重量のうち前記秤量部5Nによる秤量値に最も近い近似重量との差が予め設定された許容範囲内であるか否かを判断する。

In step S34, the control unit 10 starts displaying the amount of medicine according to the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N specified in step S33, the previous number in the package, and the package weight. The display processing is executed by the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10. Specifically, the control unit 10 includes the weighing unit 5N out of the weight of the weighing unit 5N and the weight of the packaging weight n times (n is an integer of 1 or more) that is the total weight of the second packaging material. It is determined whether or not the difference from the approximate weight closest to the weighed value is within a preset allowable range.

 なお、前記許容範囲は、前記第2包装材の総重量のn倍の重量に対する比率で設定されていることが考えられる。例えば、前記許容範囲は、前記第2包装材の総重量のn倍の重量に対して±10%の範囲として設定されていることが考えられる。即ち、前記許容範囲の下限許容値は前記近似重量に対して-10%の値、上限許容値は前記近似重量に対して+10%の値である。ここで、前記許容範囲である±10%は、一般に製薬メーカーが保証する一つの前記第2包装材の重量誤差が±5%であることに鑑みて予め設定された値であり、具体的には、その重量誤差である±5%に、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果に生じる誤差として許容する値である±5%を加算した値である。また、製薬メーカー又は薬品ごとに保証されている前記第2包装材の重量誤差が異なる場合には、製薬メーカー又は薬品ごとに前記許容範囲が設定されていてもよい。なお、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100の初期設定時又は前記鑑査支援処理の開始時などにおけるユーザー操作に応じて前記許容範囲を任意に設定することも可能である。ここに、係る設定処理を実行するときの前記制御部10が設定処理部の一例である。

In addition, it is possible that the said tolerance | permissible_range is set by the ratio with respect to the weight of n times the total weight of a said 2nd packaging material. For example, it is conceivable that the allowable range is set as a range of ± 10% with respect to a weight n times the total weight of the second packaging material. That is, the lower limit allowable value of the allowable range is -10% of the approximate weight, and the upper limit allowable value is + 10% of the approximate weight. Here, the allowable range of ± 10% is a value set in advance in view of the fact that the weight error of one second packaging material generally guaranteed by a pharmaceutical manufacturer is ± 5%. Is a value obtained by adding ± 5% which is a value allowed as an error generated in the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N to ± 5% which is the weight error. Moreover, when the weight error of the said 2nd packaging material guaranteed for every pharmaceutical manufacturer or chemical | medical agent differs, the said tolerance | permissible_range may be set for every pharmaceutical manufacturer or chemical | medical agent. The control unit 10 can arbitrarily set the permissible range according to a user operation at the time of initial setting of the inspection support apparatus 100 or at the start of the inspection support process. The said control part 10 when performing the setting process which concerns here is an example of a setting process part.

 図15の前記秤量表示部A13に示されているように、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部53による秤量値と前記近似重量との差が前記許容範囲内である場合には、前記包装鑑査モードに設定されている前記秤量部53の秤量結果として、前記包装内個数のn倍の薬品量が表示される。一方、前記秤量部53の秤量値が前記近似重量より小さく、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量値と前記近似重量との差が前記許容範囲外である場合には、そのn倍に対応するnの数よりも一つ少ない数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数が前記秤量部53の秤量結果として表示される。また、前記秤量部53の秤量値が前記近似重量より大きく、前記近似重量と前記秤量部53の秤量値との差が前記許容範囲外である場合は、そのn倍に対応するnの数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数が前記秤量結果として表示される。

As shown in the weighing display unit A13 in FIG. 15, the control unit 10 determines that the packaging inspection is performed when the difference between the weighing value by the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is within the allowable range. As the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 set in the mode, a chemical amount n times the number in the package is displayed. On the other hand, when the weighing value of the weighing unit 53 is smaller than the approximate weight and the difference between the measured value by the weighing unit 5N and the approximate weight is outside the allowable range, the number of n corresponding to n times that number. The total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material, which is one less than the second packaging material, is displayed as the weighing result of the weighing unit 53. Further, when the weighing value of the weighing unit 53 is larger than the approximate weight and the difference between the approximate weight and the weighing value of the weighing unit 53 is out of the allowable range, the number of n corresponding to n times the number The total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material is displayed as the weighing result.

 例えば、前述したように前記包装内個数が100錠である場合(図16参照)の秤量結果の表示例について考える。まず、前記近似重量が前記包装重量の1倍の重量である場合であって、前記秤量部53の秤量結果が前記近似重量より小さく、前記秤量部53の秤量結果と前記近似重量との差が前記近似重量の10%を超えている場合には、前記秤量表示部A13に前記秤量部53の秤量結果として前記包装内個数の0倍(nである1より一つ少ない数)である「0錠」が表示される。また、前記近似重量が前記包装重量の2倍の重量である場合であって、前記秤量部53の秤量結果が前記近似重量より小さく、前記秤量部53の秤量結果と前記近似重量との差が前記近似重量の10%を超えている場合には、前記秤量表示部A13に前記秤量部53の秤量結果として前記包装内個数の1倍(nである2より一つ少ない数)である「100錠」が表示される。

For example, consider the display example of the weighing result when the number in the package is 100 tablets as described above (see FIG. 16). First, in the case where the approximate weight is one time the package weight, the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is smaller than the approximate weight, and the difference between the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is When it exceeds 10% of the approximate weight, the weighing display unit A13 shows that the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is 0 times the number in the package (a number smaller than 1 which is n) “0”. "Lock" is displayed. The approximate weight is twice the package weight, and the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is smaller than the approximate weight, and the difference between the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is When it exceeds 10% of the approximate weight, the weighing display unit A13 has the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 as 1 times the number in the package (one less than 2 which is n) “100”. "Lock" is displayed.

 また、前記近似重量が前記包装重量の1倍の重量である場合であって、前記秤量部53の秤量結果が前記近似重量より大きく、前記秤量部53の秤量結果と前記近似重量との差が前記近似重量の10%を超えている場合には、前記秤量表示部A13に前記秤量部53の秤量結果として「100錠」が表示される。また、前記近似重量が前記包装重量の2倍の重量である場合であって、前記秤量部53の秤量結果が前記近似重量より大きく、前記秤量部53の秤量結果と前記近似重量との差が前記近似重量の10%を超えている場合には、前記秤量表示部A13に前記秤量部53の秤量結果として「200錠」が表示される。

Further, in the case where the approximate weight is one time the package weight, the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is larger than the approximate weight, and the difference between the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is When it exceeds 10% of the approximate weight, “100 tablets” is displayed as the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 on the weighing display unit A13. The approximate weight is twice the package weight, and the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 is larger than the approximate weight, and the difference between the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 and the approximate weight is If it exceeds 10% of the approximate weight, “200 tablets” is displayed as the weighing result of the weighing unit 53 on the weighing display unit A13.

 その後、前記ステップS37において、前記制御部10は、一又は複数の前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果と前記処方データとを照合する際には、前記ステップS34で秤量結果として表示される前記薬品の総数と前記処方データとを照合する。即ち、前記制御部10は、前記包装内個数と前記包装重量とに基づいて、前記近似重量と前記秤量部5Nの秤量値との差が予め設定された許容範囲内である場合には、前記整数倍に対応する数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数を秤量結果として前記処方データと照合することになる。一方、前記近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が前記許容範囲外である場合には、前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が前記近似重量より小さい場合は前記整数倍に対応する数よりも一つ少ない数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数が前記秤量結果として前記処方データと照合され、前記秤量部5Nの秤量値が前記近似重量より大きい場合は前記整数倍に対応する数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数が前記秤量結果として前記処方データと照合される。

Thereafter, in the step S37, when the control unit 10 collates the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N with the prescription data, the total number of the medicines displayed as the weighing result in the step S34. And the prescription data. That is, when the difference between the approximate weight and the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is within a preset allowable range based on the number in the package and the package weight, the control unit 10 The total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material corresponding to an integer multiple is collated with the prescription data as a weighing result. On the other hand, when the difference between the approximate weight and the weighed value of the weighing unit is outside the allowable range, when the weighed value of the weighing unit 5N is smaller than the approximate weight, the number corresponding to the integral multiple is larger than The total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material having a smaller number is collated with the prescription data as the weighing result, and when the weighing value of the weighing unit 5N is larger than the approximate weight, the integral multiple is used. The total number of the medicines contained in the corresponding number of the second packaging materials is collated with the prescription data as the weighing result.

 そして、前記ステップS37において、前記制御部10は、前記薬品の総数と前記処方データのRpデータにおける前記薬品の目標値(処方量)とが一致する場合に照合結果が一致であると判断する。また、前記薬品の総数と前記目標値とが一致しない場合には照合結果が不一致であると判断する。但し、前記ステップS37において、前記制御部10は、前記照合結果が一致であると判断した場合であっても、前記秤量部5Nの秤量結果の重量が前記許容範囲外である場合には、予め設定された警告メッセージを前記表示部20に表示して作業者に報知する。

And in the said step S37, the said control part 10 judges that a collation result is in agreement, when the total number of the said medicine and the target value (prescription amount) of the said medicine in Rp data of the said prescription data correspond. Further, when the total number of the medicines does not match the target value, it is determined that the matching results do not match. However, even if the control unit 10 determines in the step S37 that the collation result is the same, if the weight of the weighing result of the weighing unit 5N is outside the allowable range, The set warning message is displayed on the display unit 20 to notify the operator.

 なお、図15にも示されるように、複数の前記秤量部5Nを用いて秤量が行われる場合には、複数の前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果に対応する薬品数の合計が前記Rpデータにおける前記薬品の目標値と一致する場合に照合結果が一致となる。例えば、前記Rpデータにおける前記薬品の目標値が135錠であり、前記薬品の単一重量が5.72g、PTP内個数が10錠、包装重量が24.45g、包装内個数が100錠であって、二つの前記秤量部53及び前記秤量部54を用いて鑑査作業が行われる場合を考える。また、前記秤量部53は前記包装鑑査モードに設定され、前記秤量部54は前記通常モードに設定されているとする。この場合、前記秤量部53による秤量値が23.98gである場合、前記制御部10は、前記包装重量の24.45の+10%の重量である26.895を上限許容値として算出し、-10%の重量である22.005gを下限許容値として算出する。そして、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部53による秤量値である23.98gが前記上限許容値及び前記下限許容値の間に収まるため(22.005<23.98<26.895)、前記薬品の前記包装内個数である100錠を前記秤量部53による秤量結果として特定する。一方、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部54による秤量値が20.02gである場合には、20.02g(秤量値)/5.72g(単一重量)×10(PTP内個数)の演算結果である35錠を前記秤量部54による秤量結果として特定する。そして、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部53及び前記秤量部54の秤量結果の合計である135錠を算出し、前記Rpデータにおける前記薬品の目標値である135と一致するか否かの照合処理を実行する。即ち、ここで説明した例では、前記照合結果として一致と判断されることになる。これに対し、前記秤量部53による秤量値が前記上限許容値及び前記下限許容値の間に収まっていなければ、前記秤量部53による秤量結果が0錠になるため、前記秤量部53及び前記秤量部54の秤量結果の合計が35錠となり、前記Rpデータにおける前記薬品の目標値である135錠と一致せず、前記照合結果として不一致と判断される。もちろん、前記秤量部54による秤量結果が35錠でない場合にも、前記Rpデータにおける前記薬品の目標値である135錠と一致しないため、前記照合結果として不一致と判断されることになる。

As shown in FIG. 15, when weighing is performed using a plurality of the weighing units 5N, the total number of chemicals corresponding to the weighing results by the plurality of weighing units 5N is the Rp data. The matching result is matched when it matches the target value of the medicine. For example, the target value of the drug in the Rp data is 135 tablets, the single weight of the drug is 5.72 g, the number in the PTP is 10 tablets, the package weight is 24.45 g, and the number in the package is 100 tablets. Consider a case where inspection work is performed using the two weighing units 53 and the weighing units 54. Further, it is assumed that the weighing unit 53 is set in the package inspection mode and the weighing unit 54 is set in the normal mode. In this case, when the weighing value by the weighing unit 53 is 23.98 g, the control unit 10 calculates 26.895, which is a weight of + 10% of 24.45 of the packaging weight, as an upper limit allowable value, The weight of 10% is calculated as 22.005 g as the lower limit allowable value. And since the 23.98 g which is the weighing value by the weighing unit 53 falls within the upper limit allowable value and the lower limit allowable value (22.005 <23.98 <26.895), the control unit 10 100 tablets, which are the number of medicines in the package, are specified as a result of weighing by the weighing unit 53. On the other hand, the control unit 10 calculates 20.02 g (weighing value) /5.72 g (single weight) × 10 (number in the PTP) when the weighing value by the weighing unit 54 is 20.02 g. The 35 tablets that are the results are specified as the results of weighing by the weighing unit 54. And the said control part 10 calculates 135 tablets which are the total of the weighing result of the said weighing part 53 and the said weighing part 54, and collation whether it corresponds with 135 which is the target value of the said medicine in the said Rp data Execute the process. That is, in the example described here, the matching result is determined to be coincident. On the other hand, if the weighing value by the weighing unit 53 does not fall between the upper limit allowable value and the lower limit allowable value, the weighing result by the weighing unit 53 becomes 0 tablets. The total weighing result of the unit 54 is 35 tablets, which does not coincide with 135 tablets, which is the target value of the medicine in the Rp data, and is determined to be inconsistent as the collation result. Of course, even if the weighing result by the weighing unit 54 is not 35 tablets, it does not coincide with 135 tablets which is the target value of the medicine in the Rp data.

 以上説明したように、前記鑑査支援装置100では、複数の薬品が収容されている前記第1包装材が複数まとめて前記第2包装材に収容されている状態でその薬品を鑑査する鑑査作業を支援することが可能である。従って、作業者は、前記第2包装材から前記第1包装材を取り出す必要がなく鑑査作業の手間が軽減される。

As described above, in the inspection support apparatus 100, an inspection operation for inspecting a medicine in a state where a plurality of the first packaging materials containing a plurality of medicines are accommodated in the second packaging material is performed. It is possible to support. Therefore, the operator does not need to take out the first packaging material from the second packaging material, and the labor of inspection work is reduced.

[処方単位鑑査機能]

 前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記処方データに複数の前記Rpデータが含まれる場合、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている「+」及び「-」の操作キーの操作、又は数値の直接入力操作によって前記指定RpNo.が変更され、変更後の前記指定RpNo.に対応するRpデータが前記処方表示領域A15に表示される。そして、選択されている前記Rpデータの鑑査が終了すると、次の前記Rpデータが選択されて同様に鑑査が行われることになる。例えば、前記処方データに10の前記Rpデータが含まれる場合には、前記Rpデータの鑑査が終了するごとに「+」の操作キーを操作する必要があり、「+」の操作キーを少なくとも9回操作することになる。

[Prescription unit inspection function]

In the inspection support device 100, when the prescription data includes a plurality of Rp data, operation of the “+” and “−” operation keys displayed in the prescription display area A15, or direct numerical input operation The designated RpNo. Is changed, and the designated RpNo. Rp data corresponding to is displayed in the prescription display area A15. When the inspection of the selected Rp data is completed, the next Rp data is selected and the inspection is performed in the same manner. For example, when the Rp data of 10 is included in the prescription data, it is necessary to operate the “+” operation key every time the inspection of the Rp data is completed. Will be operated once.

 これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100が、前記処方データに複数の前記Rpデータが含まれる場合であっても、前記処方データ単位で鑑査を行うことが可能な処方単位鑑査機能を有することが考えられる。具体的には、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って各種の処理を実行することにより、前記処方単位鑑査機能が具現される。

On the other hand, it is considered that the inspection support device 100 has a prescription unit inspection function capable of performing inspection in units of the prescription data even when the prescription data includes a plurality of the Rp data. It is done. Specifically, the said prescription unit inspection function is embodied by the said control part 10 performing various processes according to the said inspection assistance program.

 なお、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100における初期設定時又は秤量鑑査開始時に、前記表示部20及び前記操作部30を用いたユーザーの操作入力に応じて、前記処方単位鑑査機能の有効及び無効を切り換えることが可能である。

In addition, the said control part 10 is effective in the said prescription unit inspection function according to the user's operation input using the said display part 20 and the said operation part 30 at the time of the initialization in the said inspection assistance apparatus 100, or the time of the start of the weighing inspection. And invalid can be switched.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記処方単位鑑査機能が有効である場合には、前記鑑査支援処理(図7参照)及び前記秤量鑑査処理(図13参照)において下記の処理を実行する。なお、ここでは前記鑑査支援処理(図7参照)及び前記秤量鑑査処理(図13参照)と異なる点についてのみ説明する。

And when the said prescription unit inspection function is effective, the said control part 10 performs the following process in the said inspection assistance process (refer FIG. 7) and the said weighing inspection process (refer FIG. 13). Here, only differences from the inspection support process (see FIG. 7) and the weighing inspection process (see FIG. 13) will be described.

<鑑査支援処理の他の例>

 前記制御部10は、前記ステップS12又は前記ステップS13で前記処方データが特定された場合に、前記ステップS14において、前記処方データに含まれる全ての前記Rpデータ内の薬品を鑑査対象として選択する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記処方データに含まれる全ての前記Rpデータ内の薬品の情報を前記処方表示領域A15に一覧表示させる。即ち、前記Rpデータ各々に含まれる薬品が前記処方データ単位で一覧表示される。係る処理は、前記制御部10の前記照合処理部14によって実行される。なお、前記薬品各々の情報が前記処方表示領域A15内に一度に表示できない場合には、前記処方表示領域A15にスクロールバー等が表示され、前記スクロールバー等の操作により前記薬品各々の情報がスクロール表示される。

<Other examples of inspection support processing>

When the prescription data is specified in step S12 or step S13, the control unit 10 selects medicines in all the Rp data included in the prescription data as inspection targets in the step S14. Specifically, the control unit 10 displays a list of information on medicines in all the Rp data included in the prescription data in the prescription display area A15. That is, the medicines included in each of the Rp data are displayed as a list in the prescription data unit. Such processing is executed by the verification processing unit 14 of the control unit 10. If the information about each medicine cannot be displayed in the prescription display area A15 at one time, a scroll bar or the like is displayed in the prescription display area A15, and the information about each medicine is scrolled by operating the scroll bar or the like. Is displayed.

<秤量鑑査処理の他の例>

 そして、前記ステップS40において、前記制御部10は、4つの前記秤量部51~54の全ての秤量値が確定した場合、或いは、前記処方データに処方薬として含まれる全ての薬品について前記秤量鑑査処理が終了した場合に、前記撮影部70による撮影画像の記録タイミングであると判断し、前記撮影部70で前記秤量部51~54を撮影する。即ち、前記Rpデータに含まれる全ての薬品について前記秤量鑑査処理が終了しただけでは撮影画像の記録タイミングであると判断されない。そのため、前記撮影部70によって撮影される撮影画像には、一つの前記Rpデータに対応する薬品の画像に限らず、複数の前記Rpデータに亘った薬品の画像が含まれることがある。

<Other examples of weighing inspection processing>

In step S40, the control unit 10 performs the weighing inspection process when all the weighing values of the four weighing units 51 to 54 are confirmed, or for all the drugs included in the prescription data as prescription drugs. Is completed, it is determined that it is the recording timing of the photographed image by the photographing unit 70, and the weighing units 51 to 54 are photographed by the photographing unit 70. That is, it is not determined that it is the recording timing of the photographed image just by completing the weighing inspection process for all the drugs included in the Rp data. Therefore, the photographed image photographed by the photographing unit 70 is not limited to a medicine image corresponding to one piece of Rp data, and may contain medicine images over a plurality of pieces of Rp data.

 以上説明したように、前記処方単位鑑査機能によれば、前記Rpデータの単位で前記秤量鑑査処理が実行されていた場合に比べて、作業者が前記Rpデータを順に選択する操作が不要となり、作業者の作業負担が軽減される。また、作業者は、4つの前記秤量部51~54の全ての秤量値が確定した場合、或いは、前記処方データに処方薬として含まれる全ての薬品について前記秤量鑑査処理が終了した場合に、前記秤量部51~54上の薬品をまとめて取り出すことになる。従って、前記Rpデータ単位で前記秤量鑑査処理が実行される場合に比べて前記秤量部51~54上の薬品を取り出す工程の実行回数が減少する。さらに、前記制御部10は、4つの前記秤量部51~54の全ての秤量値が確定した場合、或いは、前記処方データに処方薬として含まれる全ての薬品について前記秤量鑑査処理が終了した場合に、前記撮影部70による撮影を実行する。そのため、前記Rpデータの単位で前記撮影部70による撮影が実行されていた場合に比べて前記鑑査支援処理の所要時間も短縮される。

As explained above, according to the prescription unit inspection function, compared to the case where the weighing inspection process is executed in units of the Rp data, an operation for the operator to sequentially select the Rp data becomes unnecessary. The burden on the operator is reduced. Further, when all the weighing values of the four weighing units 51 to 54 are confirmed, or when the weighing inspection process is completed for all the drugs included in the prescription data as the prescription drug, The chemicals on the weighing units 51 to 54 are taken out together. Accordingly, the number of executions of the step of taking out the medicines on the weighing units 51 to 54 is reduced as compared with the case where the weighing inspection process is executed in Rp data units. Further, the control unit 10 determines when all the weighing values of the four weighing units 51 to 54 are confirmed, or when the weighing inspection process is completed for all drugs included in the prescription data as prescription drugs. The photographing by the photographing unit 70 is executed. Therefore, the time required for the inspection support process is shortened as compared with the case where photographing by the photographing unit 70 is executed in units of the Rp data.

 例えば、前記処方データに3つのRpデータが含まれており、そのRpデータ各々に一つの薬品が含まれる場合について考える。まず、前記処方単位鑑査機能が無効であり、前記Rpデータ単位で前記秤量鑑査処理が実行される場合には、図19に示されるように、前記Rpデータごとに前記秤量鑑査処理が実行されるため、前記Rpデータ各々に対応する薬品が前記Rpデータ単位で前記処方表示領域A15に順次表示されることになる。この場合、前記秤量部51~54から薬品を取り出す作業、前記Rpデータの切り替え操作、前記撮影部70による撮影がそれぞれ2回行われる。

For example, consider a case where three Rp data are included in the prescription data, and one drug is included in each Rp data. First, when the prescription unit inspection function is invalid and the weighing inspection process is executed in Rp data units, as shown in FIG. 19, the weighing inspection process is executed for each Rp data. Therefore, the medicine corresponding to each Rp data is sequentially displayed in the prescription display area A15 in the Rp data unit. In this case, the operation of taking out the medicine from the weighing units 51 to 54, the switching operation of the Rp data, and the imaging by the imaging unit 70 are performed twice.

 これに対し、前記処方単位鑑査機能が有効であり、前記処方データ単位で前記秤量鑑査処理が実行される場合には、図20に示されるように、3つの前記Rpデータに対応する薬品が前記処方データ単位で前記処方表示領域A15に同時に表示される。そのため、薬品を前記秤量部51~54から取り出す作業、及び前記撮影部70による撮影は1回だけ実行され、前記Rpデータの切り替え操作は不要である。なお、前記処方データにおける3つの前記Rpデータに合計で4つ以上の薬品が含まれる場合には、4つ分の薬品の前記秤量鑑査処理の終了タイミングで前記秤量部51~54から薬品を取り出す作業、前記Rpデータの切り替え操作、前記撮影部70による撮影が実行されるが、その回数は、前記Rpデータ単位で前記秤量鑑査処理が実行される場合に比べて少なくなる。

On the other hand, when the prescription unit inspection function is effective and the weighing inspection process is executed in the prescription data unit, as shown in FIG. 20, the medicines corresponding to the three Rp data are Simultaneously displayed in the prescription display area A15 in units of prescription data. Therefore, the operation of taking out the medicine from the weighing units 51 to 54 and the imaging by the imaging unit 70 are executed only once, and the switching operation of the Rp data is unnecessary. In the case where three or more Rp data in the prescription data include four or more medicines in total, the medicines are taken out from the weighing units 51 to 54 at the end timing of the weighing inspection process for four medicines. The work, the switching operation of the Rp data, and the photographing by the photographing unit 70 are performed, but the number of times is smaller than that in the case where the weighing inspection process is performed in units of the Rp data.

[鑑査保留機能]

 薬剤師は、前記鑑査支援装置100を用いて前記処方データについての鑑査作業を開始した後、前記処方データに含まれる薬品に欠品などが生じていた場合には、前記処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理を中止した後、前記処方データに対応する薬品が揃った時点で、前記処方データについて再度、前記鑑査支援処理を開始することが考えられる。しかしながら、この場合には、最初に実行していた前記鑑査支援処理が中止されるため、前記処方データに含まれる一部の薬品についての前記鑑査支援処理が終了している場合でも、最初から前記処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理を実行する必要が生じる。

[Inspection pending function]

The pharmacist starts the inspection work for the prescription data using the inspection support device 100, and if there is a missing item in the medicine included in the prescription data, the inspection support for the prescription data It is conceivable that the inspection support process is started again for the prescription data when the medicines corresponding to the prescription data are prepared after the process is stopped. However, in this case, since the inspection support process that was initially executed is stopped, even if the inspection support process for some medicines included in the prescription data has been completed, The inspection support process for prescription data needs to be executed.

 これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100が、前記鑑査支援処理を中断して保留し、前記鑑査支援処理を途中から再開することが可能な鑑査保留機能を備えることが考えられる。具体的には、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って各種の処理を実行することにより、前記鑑査保留機能が具現される。

On the other hand, it is conceivable that the inspection support device 100 has an inspection hold function capable of interrupting and holding the inspection support processing and resuming the inspection support processing from the middle. Specifically, the inspection suspension function is implemented by the control unit 10 executing various processes according to the inspection support program.

 ここに、図21は、前記処方鑑査画面D10の他の例を示す図である。図21に示されるように、前記処方鑑査画面D10では、鑑査保留キーK41が表示されている。そして、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査保留キーK41の操作により保留要求が行われたと判断した場合、図22に示されるように、現在実行中の前記鑑査支援処理の対象になっている処方データを保留にするか否かを確認するための操作画面D61が表示される。

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the prescription inspection screen D10. As shown in FIG. 21, an inspection hold key K41 is displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10. And when the said control part 10 judges that the hold request | requirement was performed by operation of the said inspection hold key K41, as shown in FIG. 22, the prescription data which is the object of the said inspection support process currently being performed An operation screen D61 for confirming whether or not to put on-hold is displayed.

 前記操作画面D61には、操作キーK61~K63が表示されている。前記操作キーK61は、前記撮影部70による撮影後に前記処方データの前記鑑査支援処理を中断する際に操作される。前記操作キーK62は、前記撮影部70による撮影を実行せずに前記処方データの前記鑑査支援処理を中断する際に操作される。前記操作キーK63は、前記処方データ前記鑑査支援処理の中断をキャンセルする際に操作される。

On the operation screen D61, operation keys K61 to K63 are displayed. The operation key K61 is operated when the inspection support process for the prescription data is interrupted after the photographing by the photographing unit 70. The operation key K62 is operated when the inspection support process for the prescription data is interrupted without performing the photographing by the photographing unit 70. The operation key K63 is operated when canceling the interruption of the prescription data inspection support process.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記操作キーK61が操作された場合、前記撮影部70により前記秤量部51~54を撮影し、その撮影画像を前記処方データと対応付けて前記記憶部40に記憶する。ここに、係る撮影処理は、前記制御部10の撮影処理部18によって実行される。また、前記制御部10は、前記処方データの前記鑑査支援処理の実行中の情報を前記記憶部40に保留情報として記憶し、前記処方データの処理状態を保留状態に設定する。前記鑑査支援処理の実行中の情報には、現時点までに実行された一部の薬品についての前記秤量鑑査処理の実行結果などが含まれる。これにより、前記制御部10は、他の前記処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理を実行することが可能となる。なお、前記操作キーK62が操作された場合、前記制御部10は、前記撮影部70による撮影を行うことなく、前記処方データの前記鑑査支援処理の実行中の情報を前記記憶部40に保留情報として記憶し、前記処方データの処理状態を保留状態に設定する。

Then, when the operation key K61 is operated, the control unit 10 photographs the weighing units 51 to 54 by the photographing unit 70 and stores the photographed images in the storage unit 40 in association with the prescription data. To do. Here, the photographing process is executed by the photographing processing unit 18 of the control unit 10. Moreover, the said control part 10 memorize | stores the information under execution of the said inspection assistance process of the said prescription data as said hold information in the said memory | storage part 40, and sets the process state of the said prescription data to a hold state. The information during execution of the inspection support process includes the execution result of the weighing inspection process for some medicines executed up to the present time. Thereby, the control unit 10 can execute the inspection support process for the other prescription data. In addition, when the operation key K62 is operated, the control unit 10 stores information during execution of the inspection support process of the prescription data in the storage unit 40 without performing imaging by the imaging unit 70. And the processing state of the prescription data is set to the hold state.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記未処理表示領域A21が表示される際には、図23に示されるように、前記鑑査保留機能によって保留状態に設定されている前記処方データを他の処方データと識別可能な表示態様(背景色又は文字色など)で表示する。また、前記未処理表示領域A21では、表示対象の処方データを前記保留状態の処方データに限定するための保留選択キーK42が表示されている。前記制御部10は、前記保留選択キーK42が操作されると、前記保留状態であった前記処方データ一覧を前記未処理表示領域A21に表示する。なお、前記未処理表示領域A21において保留状態の前記Rpデータは他の前記Rpデータと識別可能な表示態様で表示される。

When the unprocessed display area A21 is displayed, the control unit 10 converts the prescription data set in the hold state by the inspection hold function to other prescription data as shown in FIG. And a display mode (background color or character color) that can be identified. In the unprocessed display area A21, a hold selection key K42 for limiting prescription data to be displayed to the prescription data in the hold state is displayed. When the hold selection key K42 is operated, the control unit 10 displays the prescription data list in the hold state in the unprocessed display area A21. In the unprocessed display area A21, the pending Rp data is displayed in a display mode that can be distinguished from other Rp data.

 その後、前記未処理表示領域A21において前記保留状態の処方データの選択操作が行われると、前記制御部10は、前記記憶部40に記憶されている前記処方データに関する前記処理状態に基づいて前記鑑査支援処理を再開させる。このとき、前記制御部10は、前記処方データの中断時に撮影されている撮影画像が存在する場合には、図24に示されるように、前記撮影画像に対応する前記画像表示キーK19を表示させる。そして、前記制御部10は、前記画像表示キーK19が操作されると、前記画像表示キーK19に対応する前記撮影画像を前記表示部20に拡大して表示させる。これにより、作業者は、前記処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理の保留状況を容易に把握することが可能である。

Thereafter, when the prescription data in the pending state is selected in the unprocessed display area A21, the control unit 10 performs the inspection based on the processing state relating to the prescription data stored in the storage unit 40. Resume support processing. At this time, if there is a photographed image photographed when the prescription data is interrupted, the control unit 10 displays the image display key K19 corresponding to the photographed image as shown in FIG. . When the image display key K19 is operated, the control unit 10 enlarges and displays the captured image corresponding to the image display key K19 on the display unit 20. Thereby, the worker can easily grasp the suspension status of the inspection support processing for the prescription data.

 以上説明したように、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記鑑査保留機能により一の処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理を中断して他の一又は複数の処方データの前記鑑査支援処理を実行した後で、前記一の処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理を途中から再開することが可能であり、鑑査作業の効率化を図ることが可能である。

As described above, in the inspection support apparatus 100, after the inspection support processing for one prescription data is interrupted by the inspection hold function and the inspection support processing for one or more other prescription data is executed. The inspection support process for the one prescription data can be resumed from the middle, and the efficiency of the inspection work can be improved.

[規格選択機能]

 前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記情報読取部60によって前記PTPシートのような包装材からバーコードのような前記薬品識別情報が読み取られることによって鑑査対象の薬品が選択される。一方、前記PTPシートのような包装材に前記薬品識別情報が付されていないことがある。この場合、作業者は、前記鑑査支援処理の実行に際して、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている薬品を選択するための操作を行うことになる。一方、前記医薬品マスターにおいて、一つの薬品について複数の前記薬品識別情報が登録されると共に、その複数の前記薬品識別情報のいずれかが代表の薬品識別情報として設定されることがある。そして、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理の実行に際して、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている薬品が選択され、その選択された薬品に対応する前記薬品識別情報が前記医薬品マスターにおいて複数登録されている場合には、前記代表の薬品識別情報を選択し、前記鑑査支援処理を実行することが考えられる。

[Standard selection function]

In the inspection support apparatus 100, the medicine to be inspected is selected by the information reading unit 60 reading the medicine identification information such as a barcode from the packaging material such as the PTP sheet. On the other hand, the medicine identification information may not be attached to a packaging material such as the PTP sheet. In this case, the operator performs an operation for selecting a medicine displayed in the prescription display area A15 when executing the inspection support process. On the other hand, in the medicine master, a plurality of medicine identification information are registered for one medicine, and any of the plurality of medicine identification information may be set as representative medicine identification information. And the said control part 10 selects the chemical | medical agent currently displayed on the said prescription display area | region A15 in the case of execution of the said inspection assistance process, and the said chemical | medical agent identification information corresponding to the selected chemical | medical agent is registered more than once in the said pharmaceutical master. If it is, the representative medicine identification information is selected and the inspection support process is executed.

 しかしながら、前記代表の薬品識別情報が予め設定される構成では、例えば同一の薬品について複数の規格が存在する場合にも、予め設定された一つの前記代表の薬品識別情報が選択されることになる。そこで、前記鑑査支援装置100が、前記鑑査支援処理の実行に際して、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている薬品が選択され、その選択された薬品について複数の前記薬品識別情報が前記医薬品マスターに登録されている場合には、ユーザー操作に応じて、その複数の前記薬品識別情報のいずれかを前記照合処理で使用される情報として任意に選択可能な規格選択機能を備えることが考えられる。具体的には、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って各種の処理を実行することにより、前記規格選択機能が具現される。

However, in the configuration in which the representative medicine identification information is set in advance, even when there are a plurality of standards for the same medicine, for example, one preset representative medicine identification information is selected. . Therefore, when the inspection support apparatus 100 executes the inspection support process, a medicine displayed in the prescription display area A15 is selected, and a plurality of the medicine identification information is registered in the medicine master for the selected medicine. In the case where the information is used, it is conceivable to provide a standard selection function capable of arbitrarily selecting any one of the plurality of medicine identification information as information used in the collation process according to a user operation. Specifically, the standard selection function is implemented by the control unit 10 executing various processes according to the inspection support program.

 例えば、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスターにおいて、一つの薬品の前記薬品識別情報として複数の薬品識別情報が登録される場合でも、前記代表の薬品識別情報を設定しないことが可能である。そして、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理の実行に際して、前記処方表示領域A15に表示されている薬品が選択され、その選択された薬品に対応する前記薬品識別情報が前記医薬品マスターにおいて複数登録されている場合には、その複数の前記薬品識別情報のいずれかを選択するための操作画面D62を前記表示部20に表示させる。

For example, the control unit 10 can not set the representative medicine identification information even when a plurality of medicine identification information is registered as the medicine identification information of one medicine in the medicine master. And the said control part 10 selects the chemical | medical agent currently displayed on the said prescription display area | region A15 in the case of execution of the said inspection assistance process, and the said chemical | medical agent identification information corresponding to the selected chemical | medical agent is registered more than once in the said pharmaceutical master. If it is, an operation screen D62 for selecting any one of the plurality of medicine identification information is displayed on the display unit 20.

 ここに、図25は、前記操作画面D62の一例を示す図である。図25に示されるように、前記操作画面D62には、複数の前記薬品識別情報に対応する複数の規格が表示される。そして、前記制御部10は、前記操作画面D62における前記複数の規格のいずれかを選択するための操作を受け付け、その選択された規格に対応する前記薬品識別情報を前記鑑査支援処理の対象となる薬品の前記薬品識別情報として選択する。これにより、前記秤量鑑査処理では、前記ステップS33において、前記制御部10が、前記ステップS32で秤量値が0から増加した前記秤量部5Nを前記特定された前記薬品識別情報に対応付ける秤量部として特定する。

FIG. 25 shows an example of the operation screen D62. As shown in FIG. 25, the operation screen D62 displays a plurality of standards corresponding to a plurality of the medicine identification information. Then, the control unit 10 receives an operation for selecting any of the plurality of standards on the operation screen D62, and the medicine identification information corresponding to the selected standard is subjected to the inspection support process. It is selected as the medicine identification information of the medicine. Accordingly, in the weighing inspection process, in step S33, the control unit 10 specifies the weighing unit 5N whose weighing value has increased from 0 in step S32 as the weighing unit associated with the specified medicine identification information. To do.

 以上説明したように、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記規格選択機能により、例えば同一の薬品について複数の規格が存在しており、複数の前記薬品識別情報が前記医薬品マスターに登録されている場合に、その複数の規格から適正な規格を選択することが可能となり、前記鑑査支援処理を適切に実行することが可能になる。

As described above, in the inspection support device 100, when the standard selection function, for example, there are a plurality of standards for the same medicine, and a plurality of the medicine identification information is registered in the medicine master. It is possible to select an appropriate standard from the plurality of standards, and it is possible to appropriately execute the inspection support process.

[排他制御機能]

 ところで、図1にも示されるように、前記医療システム1には、複数の前記鑑査支援装置100が接続されることがある。このように構成された前記医療システム1では、前記鑑査支援装置100各々で個別に前記鑑査支援処理が実行されることも考えられるが、その場合には、異なる前記鑑査支援装置100を用いて同一の前記処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理が実行されるおそれがあり作業効率が低下するおそれがある。

[Exclusive control function]

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of the inspection support devices 100 may be connected to the medical system 1. In the medical system 1 configured as described above, the inspection support processing may be executed individually by each of the inspection support devices 100. In this case, the same inspection support device 100 is used. There is a possibility that the inspection support process for the prescription data may be executed and work efficiency may be reduced.

 これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100の各々において、自機がメイン装置であるかサブ装置であるかの設定が可能であることが考えられる。なお、任意の前記鑑査支援装置100において、前記鑑査支援装置100各々がメイン装置又はサブ装置のいずれであるかの設定が可能であり、その設定内容が前記鑑査支援装置100各々に送信されてもよい。以下、前記メイン装置として設定された前記鑑査支援装置100をメイン鑑査支援装置100Aと称し、前記サブ装置として設定された前記鑑査支援装置100をサブ鑑査支援装置100Bと称する。

On the other hand, in each of the inspection support devices 100, it is possible to set whether the own device is a main device or a sub device. In any of the inspection support devices 100, it is possible to set whether each of the inspection support devices 100 is a main device or a sub device, and the setting contents may be transmitted to each of the inspection support devices 100. Good. Hereinafter, the inspection support device 100 set as the main device is referred to as a main inspection support device 100A, and the inspection support device 100 set as the sub device is referred to as a sub-inspection support device 100B.

 なお、例えば前記鑑査支援装置100各々では、前記制御部10が、前記メイン装置としての登録操作が行われた場合に、前記医療システム1に既に前記メイン装置が登録されているか否かを前記鑑査支援装置100各々に問い合せることが考えられる。そして、前記制御部10は、前記メイン装置が登録されていない場合にのみ自機を前記メイン装置として設定することを許可する。これにより、前記メイン装置の重複登録が防止される。

For example, in each of the inspection support devices 100, the control unit 10 determines whether the main device is already registered in the medical system 1 when a registration operation as the main device is performed. It is conceivable to make an inquiry to each support device 100. And the said control part 10 permits setting an own machine as the said main apparatus, only when the said main apparatus is not registered. This prevents duplicate registration of the main device.

 そして、前記メイン鑑査支援装置100Aは、前記処方データを前記調剤支援システム200及び前記レセプトシステム300から取得して前記記憶部40に記憶させる。一方、前記サブ鑑査支援装置100Bの前記制御部10は、前記メイン鑑査支援装置100Aの前記記憶部40にアクセスし、前記記憶部40に記憶される前記処方データを対象とする前記鑑査支援処理又は前記処方データの削除処理などを実行することが可能である。即ち、前記サブ鑑査支援装置100B各々は、前記処方データを前記調剤支援システム200及び前記レセプトシステム300から取得しないことが考えられる。

Then, the main inspection support device 100A acquires the prescription data from the dispensing support system 200 and the receipt system 300 and stores the prescription data in the storage unit 40. On the other hand, the control unit 10 of the sub-inspection support device 100B accesses the storage unit 40 of the main inspection support device 100A and performs the inspection support process for the prescription data stored in the storage unit 40 or The prescription data can be deleted. That is, it is conceivable that each of the sub-inspection support devices 100B does not acquire the prescription data from the dispensing support system 200 and the reception system 300.

 但し、この場合でも、前記メイン鑑査支援装置100A及び前記サブ鑑査支援装置100Bなどの複数の端末から同一の前記処方データについての鑑査作業が並行して実行されるおそれがある。そこで、前記医療システム1は、同一の前記処方データに対する複数の前記鑑査支援装置100からのアクセスを排他的に制御する排他制御機能を備えることが考えられる。例えば、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って各種の処理を実行することにより、前記排他制御機能が具現される。

However, even in this case, there is a possibility that inspection work for the same prescription data may be executed in parallel from a plurality of terminals such as the main inspection support device 100A and the sub inspection support device 100B. Therefore, it is conceivable that the medical system 1 includes an exclusive control function that exclusively controls access from the plurality of inspection support apparatuses 100 to the same prescription data. For example, the exclusive control function is implemented by the control unit 10 executing various processes according to the inspection support program.

 具体的に、前記メイン鑑査支援装置100Aの前記記憶部40に処理中フォルダ及び処理済フォルダが設けられることが考えられる。そして、前記鑑査支援装置100各々の前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理又は前記削除処理などの処理対象として前記処方データが選択された場合に、その選択された前記処方データを示す前記処方識別情報を前記処理中フォルダに記憶する。

Specifically, a processing folder and a processed folder may be provided in the storage unit 40 of the main inspection support apparatus 100A. And the said control part 10 of each said inspection assistance apparatus 100 is the said prescription identification which shows the selected said prescription data, when the said prescription data are selected as processing objects, such as the said inspection assistance process or the said deletion process Information is stored in the processing folder.

 これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100各々の前記制御部10は、前記処理中フォルダ内の前記処方識別情報に基づいて前記処方データが処理中であると判断することが可能である。従って、前記鑑査支援装置100各々では、前記制御部10が、前記処方鑑査画面D10(図9参照)に未処理の処方データの一覧を表示させる場合、他の端末からアクセスされている処方データを表示させないことが可能である。

Accordingly, the control unit 10 of each of the inspection support devices 100 can determine that the prescription data is being processed based on the prescription identification information in the processing folder. Accordingly, in each of the inspection support devices 100, when the control unit 10 displays a list of unprocessed prescription data on the prescription inspection screen D10 (see FIG. 9), prescription data accessed from other terminals is displayed. It is possible not to display.

 即ち、前記制御部10は、処理対象となる前記処方データを示す前記処方識別情報が前記処理中フォルダ内に記憶されている場合には、その処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理又は前記削除処理などを実行することができない。また、前記制御部10は、処理対象となる前記処方データを示す前記処方識別情報が前記処理中フォルダ内に記憶されていない場合には、その処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理又は前記削除処理などを実行することが可能である。

That is, when the prescription identification information indicating the prescription data to be processed is stored in the processing folder, the control unit 10 performs the inspection support process or the deletion process for the prescription data. Can not run. In addition, when the prescription identification information indicating the prescription data to be processed is not stored in the processing folder, the control unit 10 performs the inspection support process or the deletion process for the prescription data. Can be performed.

 そして、前記制御部10各々は、前記処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理又は前記削除処理などが終了すると、前記処方データを示す前記処方識別情報を前記処理中フォルダから前記処理済フォルダに移動させる。また、前記制御部10各々は、前記処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理又は前記削除処理などが終了すると、前記処方データに対する処理内容及び処理結果などを前記鑑査履歴として前記メイン鑑査支援装置100Aの前記記憶部40に記憶させる。

And each of the said control part 10 will move the said prescription identification information which shows the said prescription data to the said processed folder from the said folder during a process, when the said inspection support process or the said deletion process about the said prescription data is complete | finished. In addition, when the inspection support process or the deletion process for the prescription data is completed, the control unit 10 each sets the processing content and the processing result for the prescription data as the inspection history as the inspection history of the main inspection support apparatus 100A. The data is stored in the storage unit 40.

 以上説明したように、前記医療システム1では、前記排他制御機能により、前記メイン鑑査支援装置100Aの前記記憶部40に記憶されている前記処方データについて排他制御が実行されるため、複数の前記鑑査支援装置100を用いて同一の前記処方データに対する処理が並行して実行されることが防止される。

As described above, in the medical system 1, exclusive control is performed on the prescription data stored in the storage unit 40 of the main inspection support apparatus 100A by the exclusive control function, and thus a plurality of the inspections are performed. It is possible to prevent the processing for the same prescription data from being executed in parallel using the support device 100.

 なお、他の実施形態として、前記メイン鑑査支援装置100Aの前記制御部10が、前記医療システム1に接続された前記鑑査支援装置100各々による前記処方データへのアクセスの有無を管理することも考えられる。この場合、前記メイン鑑査支援装置100Aの前記制御部10は、いずれか一つの前記鑑査支援装置100が前記処方データにアクセスした場合には、その処方データへの端末からのアクセスを制限する。これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100各々では、前記制御部10が、前記処方鑑査画面D10(図9参照)に未処理の処方データの一覧を表示させる場合、他の端末からアクセスされている処方データを表示させないことが可能である。

As another embodiment, the control unit 10 of the main inspection support apparatus 100A may manage the presence / absence of access to the prescription data by each of the inspection support apparatuses 100 connected to the medical system 1. It is done. In this case, when any one of the inspection support devices 100 accesses the prescription data, the control unit 10 of the main inspection support device 100A restricts access from the terminal to the prescription data. Thereby, in each said inspection assistance apparatus 100, when the said control part 10 displays the list of unprocessed prescription data on the said prescription inspection screen D10 (refer FIG. 9), the prescription data currently accessed from the other terminal Can not be displayed.

[大皿分割機能]

 前述したように、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記大皿58を用いることにより前記秤量部5Nの定格容量を超える重量の薬品について鑑査作業を行うことが可能である。しかしながら、前記大皿58を用いた場合であっても、4つの前記秤量部5Nの定格容量の合計を超える超過重量の薬品についての鑑査作業を行うことはできない。特に、前記大皿58を用いて前記秤量鑑査処理が実行可能な最大重量(以下、「大皿最大重量」と称する)としては、4つの前記秤量部5Nの定格容量の合計未満の予め定められた値が用いられる。例えば、前記秤量部5Nの定格容量が200gである場合、4つの前記秤量皿5Nの定格容量の合計は800gであるが、それに対して前記大皿最大重量は600g程度に設定されることが考えられる。

[Dish division function]

As described above, in the inspection support apparatus 100, by using the platter 58, it is possible to perform inspection work for drugs having a weight exceeding the rated capacity of the weighing unit 5N. However, even when the platter 58 is used, it is not possible to perform inspection work for drugs with an excess weight exceeding the total rated capacity of the four weighing units 5N. In particular, the maximum weight that can be used for the weighing inspection process using the platter 58 (hereinafter referred to as “maximum platter maximum weight”) is a predetermined value that is less than the total of the rated capacities of the four weighing units 5N. Is used. For example, when the rated capacity of the weighing unit 5N is 200 g, the total rated capacity of the four weighing dishes 5N is 800 g, whereas the maximum weight of the platter is set to about 600 g. .

 これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100が、前記大皿58を利用して前記大皿最大重量を超える薬品について前記秤量鑑査処理を実行可能な大皿分割機能を備えることが考えられる。具体的には、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って各種の処理を実行することにより、前記大皿分割機能を具現する。なお、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100の初期設定などにおけるユーザー操作に応じて、前記大皿分割秤量機能の有効及び無効を設定可能である。また、前記制御部10が、前記秤量鑑査処理の実行中に前記大皿分割秤量機能の有効及び無効をユーザー操作に応じて切り換えてもよい。

On the other hand, it is conceivable that the inspection support apparatus 100 includes a platter dividing function that can execute the weighing inspection process for a medicine that exceeds the maximum weight of the platter using the platter 58. Specifically, the control unit 10 implements the platter dividing function by executing various processes according to the inspection support program. In addition, the control unit 10 can set validity and invalidity of the platter division weighing function according to a user operation in the initial setting of the inspection support apparatus 100 or the like. In addition, the control unit 10 may switch between enabling and disabling the platter divided weighing function according to a user operation during the execution of the weighing inspection process.

 具体的に、前記大皿分割秤量機能が有効である場合、前記制御部10は、前記秤量鑑査処理の対象として選択された前記Rpデータに基づいて、前記大皿最大重量を超える薬品(以下、「重量超過薬品」と称する)が処方薬品として含まれているか否かを判断する。そして、前記制御部10は、前記重量超過薬品が処方薬品として含まれている場合、前記重量超過薬品についての前記秤量鑑査処理の実行モードを大皿分割秤量モードに設定する。

Specifically, when the platter divided weighing function is valid, the control unit 10 determines the medicine exceeding the platter maximum weight (hereinafter, “weight” based on the Rp data selected as an object of the weighing inspection process. It is determined whether or not “excess medicine” is included as a prescription medicine. And when the said overweight chemical | medical agent is contained as a prescription chemical | medical agent, the said control part 10 sets the execution mode of the said weighing | inspection inspection process about the said overweight chemical | medical agent to platter division | segmentation weighing mode.

 そして、前記大皿分割秤量モードにおいて、前記制御部10は、前記重量超過薬品が前記大皿58に載置されて前記秤量部51~54による秤量結果が確定するごとに、その秤量結果に対応する薬品量を前記秤量表示領域A41に表示させる。また、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54による秤量結果に対応する前記薬品量を前記Rpデータにおける前記重量超過薬品の目標値から累積して引いた残りの薬品量を算出して表示させる。

In the platter divided weighing mode, the control unit 10 sets the drug corresponding to the weighing result every time the weighing drug is placed on the platter 58 and the weighing result by the weighing units 51 to 54 is determined. The amount is displayed in the weighing display area A41. In addition, the control unit 10 calculates and displays the remaining drug amount obtained by accumulating the drug amount corresponding to the weighing result by the weighing units 51 to 54 from the target value of the overweight drug in the Rp data. Let me.

 ここに、図26~図28は、前記大皿分割秤量モードにおいて前記処方鑑査画面D10に順に表示される前記秤量表示領域A41の表示例を示す図である。

FIG. 26 to FIG. 28 are diagrams showing display examples of the weighing display area A41 sequentially displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 in the platter divided weighing mode.

 図26に示されるように、前記制御部10は、前記重量超過薬品に対応する重量を前記重量超過薬品の単位に換算した薬品量を算出し、その薬品量を秤量結果として前記表示部20の前記処方鑑査画面D10の秤量表示領域A41に表示させる。さらに、図27、図28に示されるように、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54による秤量結果が確定するごとに、前記Rpデータにおける前記重量超過薬品の目標値から前記秤量結果の薬品量を累積して引いた後の残りの薬品量を、目標数量として前記秤量表示領域A41に表示させる。なお、図26~図28に示されるように、前記制御部10が、前記大皿58を用いて秤量可能な最大の薬品数を算出し、その薬品数を分割最大数として前記秤量表示領域A41に表示させることも考えられる。

As shown in FIG. 26, the control unit 10 calculates the amount of medicine obtained by converting the weight corresponding to the overweight medicine into the unit of the overweight medicine, and uses the amount of medicine as a weighing result to display the weight of the display unit 20. It is displayed in the weighing display area A41 of the prescription inspection screen D10. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the control unit 10 calculates the weighing result from the target value of the overweighted drug in the Rp data every time the weighing result by the weighing units 51 to 54 is determined. The remaining amount of medicine after accumulating the amount of medicine is displayed in the weighing display area A41 as a target quantity. As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the control unit 10 calculates the maximum number of medicines that can be weighed using the platter 58, and sets the number of medicines in the weighing display area A41 as the divided maximum number. It can also be displayed.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記重量超過薬品について前記大皿58を用いた秤量が繰り返し実行されて前記残りの薬品量が0に達したか否かを判断し、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果と前記処方データとの照合結果が一致したと判断する。なお、前記制御部10は、前記照合結果が一致であると判断するとその旨を前記表示部20に表示させた後、前記大皿分割秤量モードを終了し、前記照合結果が不一致であると判断している間は前記大皿58を用いた前記秤量部5Nによる秤量を繰り返す。即ち、前記制御部10は、前記大皿58が載置された複数の前記秤量部51~54による複数回の秤量結果と前記処方データとを照合することが可能である。

And the said control part 10 judges whether the weighing using the said platter 58 was repeatedly performed about the said overweight chemical | medical agent, and judged whether the said remaining chemical quantity reached | attained 0, and the weighing result by the said weighing part 5N and It is determined that the collation result with the prescription data matches. When the control unit 10 determines that the collation results are the same, the control unit 10 displays the fact on the display unit 20 and then ends the platter divided weighing mode, and determines that the collation results are inconsistent. While weighing, the weighing by the weighing unit 5N using the platter 58 is repeated. That is, the control unit 10 can collate the results of weighing a plurality of times by the plurality of weighing units 51 to 54 on which the platter 58 is placed with the prescription data.

 以上説明したように、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記大皿分割機能により、前記大皿最大重量を超える前記重量超過薬品についても前記大皿58を用いて前記秤量鑑査処理を実行することが可能となる。また、前記制御部10は、前記処方鑑査画面D10の前記秤量表示領域A41に、前記重量超過薬品の目標値に対する残りの薬品量が表示されるため、薬剤師は、前記重量超過薬品についての鑑査作業を容易に行うことが可能である。

As described above, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the weighing inspection process can be executed using the platter 58 for the overweight medicine exceeding the maximum weight of the platter by the platter dividing function. In addition, the control unit 10 displays the remaining amount of medicine with respect to the target value of the overweight medicine in the weighing display area A41 of the prescription inspection screen D10. Can be easily performed.

 なお、前記秤量鑑査処理において、前記制御部10が、前記重量超過薬品について、一回当たりの秤量目標値が前記大皿最大重量以下となるように、前記重量超過薬品のデータを分割することも考えられる。例えば、前記重量超過薬品が単位重量160g(1袋10枚)で払出量が60枚であり、前記大皿最大重量が600gである場合について考える。この場合、前記重量超過薬品に対応する重量は960g(160g×6袋)となる。この場合、前記制御部10は、前記大皿最大重量である600gと残りの360gとを二回の秤量目標値として設定することが考えられる。また、前記制御部10は、前記大皿最大重量である600g未満であって前記最小払出単位の整数倍である480g(3袋)と残りの480g(3袋)とを二回の秤量目標値として均等に分割することも考えられる。

In the weighing inspection process, the control unit 10 may divide the data of the overweight medicine so that the weighing target value per time is not more than the maximum weight of the platter for the overweight medicine. It is done. For example, let us consider a case where the overweight medicine is a unit weight of 160 g (10 per bag), the amount to be dispensed is 60, and the maximum weight of the platter is 600 g. In this case, the weight corresponding to the excess drug is 960 g (160 g × 6 bags). In this case, it is conceivable that the control unit 10 sets the maximum weight of the platter 600 g and the remaining 360 g as two weighing target values. Further, the control unit 10 uses 480 g (3 bags) which is less than 600 g which is the maximum weight of the platter and is an integral multiple of the minimum payout unit, and the remaining 480 g (3 bags) as a target value for weighing twice. Dividing evenly is also conceivable.

 また、本実施形態では、複数の前記秤量部5Nに亘って載置される前記大皿58を用いる場合を例に挙げて説明した。一方、一つの前記秤量部5Nに前記秤量皿55又は前記大皿58が載置される場合に、前記制御部10が、その一つの前記秤量部5Nによる複数回の秤量結果と前記処方データとを照合可能であることも他の実施形態として考えられる。

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the platter 58 placed over the plurality of weighing units 5N is used is described as an example. On the other hand, when the weighing pan 55 or the platter 58 is placed on one weighing unit 5N, the control unit 10 obtains a plurality of weighing results obtained by the one weighing unit 5N and the prescription data. It is also conceivable as another embodiment that collation is possible.

[マスター更新機能]

 前記秤量鑑査処理の前記ステップS31では、薬品の単位重量が取得されるが、前記医薬品マスターに前記薬品の単位重量が登録されていないことが考えられる。例えば、新薬についての単位重量の情報が未登録であることがある。これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100が、前記医薬品マスターを更新するマスター更新機能を備えることが考えられる。具体的に、前記マスター更新機能は、前記制御部10が前記ステップS31において後述のマスター更新処理(図29参照)を実行することによって実現される。ここで、図29を参照しつつ前記マスター更新処理について説明する。なお、前記マスター更新処理は、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品各々について個別に実行される処理である。

[Master update function]

In step S31 of the weighing inspection process, the unit weight of the medicine is acquired, but it is considered that the unit weight of the medicine is not registered in the medicine master. For example, unit weight information for a new drug may not be registered. On the other hand, it is conceivable that the inspection support device 100 has a master update function for updating the drug master. Specifically, the master update function is realized when the control unit 10 executes a master update process (see FIG. 29) described later in step S31. Here, the master update process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the said master update process is a process performed separately about each chemical | medical agent used as inspection object by the said weighing | inspection inspection process.

<ステップS51>

 ステップS51において、前記制御部10は、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品の情報が前記医薬品マスターに記憶されているか否かを判断する。なお、前記ステップS51では、前記薬品について、例えば前記秤量鑑査処理で用いる前記薬品の単位重量、PTPシート1枚当たりの重量、PTPシート1枚当たりの個数などの情報が前記医薬品マスターに記憶されているか否かが判断される。ここで、前記薬品の情報が前記医薬品マスターに記憶されていると判断されると(S51:Yes)、処理がステップS55に移行し、前記薬品の情報が前記医薬品マスターに記憶されていないと判断されると(S51:No)、処理がステップS52に移行する。

<Step S51>

In step S51, the control unit 10 determines whether or not information on a medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process is stored in the medicine master. In step S51, for the medicine, for example, information such as the unit weight of the medicine used in the weighing inspection process, the weight per PTP sheet, and the number per PTP sheet is stored in the medicine master. It is determined whether or not. Here, if it is determined that the drug information is stored in the drug master (S51: Yes), the process proceeds to step S55, and it is determined that the drug information is not stored in the drug master. If so (S51: No), the process proceeds to step S52.

<ステップS52>

 ステップS52において、前記制御部10は、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品について、前記医薬品マスター(第1マスターの一例)と予め設定される参照先に記憶されているマザーマスター(第2マスターの一例)とに差が生じているか否かを判断する。前記マザーマスターは、前記医薬品マスターと同種の情報を含み、例えばWebサイトから予めダウンロードされ、又はCDなどの記録媒体から読み取られて前記記憶部40に記憶される。また、前記マザーマスターは、前記調剤支援システム200又は前記レセプトシステム300などに記憶されていてもよい。なお、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100の初期設定又は秤量鑑査処理の開始時などにおけるユーザー操作に応じて、予め前記マザーマスターの参照先を設定することが可能である。例えば、前記鑑査支援装置100の前記記憶部40、前記調剤支援システム200、又は前記レセプトシステム300などが前記参照先として設定される。さらに、前記マザーマスターは、前記鑑査支援装置100のメーカー又は薬品メーカーなどが有するサーバー装置400(図1参照)から定期的に又は任意のタイミングで前記通信網N1を介して前記鑑査支援装置100に自動配信されて前記記憶部40に記憶されてもよい。

<Step S52>

In step S <b> 52, the control unit 10, with respect to the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process, the mother master (second master) stored in the medicine master (an example of the first master) and a preset reference destination. It is determined whether or not there is a difference. The mother master includes the same type of information as the pharmaceutical master, and is downloaded in advance from a website, for example, or read from a recording medium such as a CD and stored in the storage unit 40. The mother master may be stored in the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300. The control unit 10 can set the reference destination of the mother master in advance according to a user operation at the initial setting of the inspection support apparatus 100 or at the start of the weighing inspection process. For example, the storage unit 40, the dispensing support system 200, the receipt system 300, or the like of the inspection support device 100 is set as the reference destination. Furthermore, the mother master sends the inspection support apparatus 100 to the inspection support apparatus 100 via the communication network N1 periodically or at an arbitrary timing from a server apparatus 400 (see FIG. 1) of the inspection support apparatus 100 or a drug manufacturer. It may be automatically distributed and stored in the storage unit 40.

 例えば、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスターについて、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品のYJコードなどの薬品の識別情報に薬品の個別情報として対応付けられたバーコード情報の数を抽出する。また、前記制御部10は、前記マザーマスターについても、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品の識別情報に対応付けられた前記バーコード情報の数を抽出する。そして、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスター及び前記マザーマスター各々における前記バーコード情報の数が一致しない場合に差が生じていると判断する。例えばある薬品のYJコードに対応付けられた前記バーコード情報が、前記医薬品マスターでは3つあり、前記マザーマスターでは5つある場合には、その差である2つの前記バーコード情報が前記医薬品マスターに不足していることになる。また、前記制御部10は、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品のYJコードなどの薬品の識別情報に対応する前記バーコード情報が、前記医薬品マスターには登録されておらず、前記マザーマスターに登録されている場合にも差が生じていると判断する。なお、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとの間で、前記薬品に対応する前記バーコード情報の内容(包装重量又は包装内個数など)について差が生じている場合にも差が生じていると判断する。

For example, the control unit 10 extracts the number of barcode information associated with the medicine identification information such as the YJ code of the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process as the individual information of the medicine for the medicine master. . Moreover, the said control part 10 extracts the number of the said barcode information matched with the identification information of the chemical | medical agent used as inspection object by the said weighing | inspection inspection process also about the said mother master. And the said control part 10 judges that the difference has arisen when the number of the said barcode information in each of the said pharmaceutical master and the said mother master does not correspond. For example, when there are three barcode information associated with the YJ code of a certain medicine in the medicine master and five in the mother master, the two barcode information that is the difference between them is the medicine master. Will be lacking. Further, the control unit 10 does not register the barcode information corresponding to the medicine identification information such as the YJ code of the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process in the medicine master, and the mother master It is determined that there is a difference even if registered in. In addition, the control unit 10 is different even when there is a difference between the pharmaceutical master and the mother master in the content of the barcode information corresponding to the medicine (packaging weight or number in the packaging). Is determined to have occurred.

 ここで、前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとに差が生じていると判断されると(S52:Yes)、処理がステップS53に移行し、前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとに差が生じていないと判断されると(S52:No)、処理がステップS55に移行する。なお、前記ステップS52は、前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとに差が生じているか否かに代えて、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品の情報が前記マザーマスターに登録されているか否かを判断する簡素な処理であってもよい。

Here, if it is determined that there is a difference between the drug master and the mother master (S52: Yes), the process proceeds to step S53, and there is no difference between the drug master and the mother master. If it is determined (S52: No), the process proceeds to step S55. Note that, in step S52, instead of whether or not there is a difference between the pharmaceutical master and the mother master, whether or not information on the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process is registered in the mother master. Simple processing for determining

<ステップS53>

 ステップS53において、前記制御部10は、前記マザーマスターに基づいて前記医薬品マスターを更新するか否かを判断する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記表示部20に、前記薬品マスターの更新の有無の問い合せを表示させ、前記問い合せに対するユーザー操作に応じて前記薬品マスターの更新の有無を判断する。ここで、前記医薬品マスターを更新すると判断されると(S53:Yes)、処理がステップS54に移行し、前記医薬品マスターを更新しないと判断されると(S53:No)、処理がステップS55に移行する。

<Step S53>

In step S53, the control unit 10 determines whether or not to update the medicine master based on the mother master. Specifically, the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display an inquiry about whether or not the medicine master is updated, and determines whether or not the medicine master is updated according to a user operation for the inquiry. If it is determined that the pharmaceutical master is to be updated (S53: Yes), the process proceeds to step S54. If it is determined that the pharmaceutical master is not to be updated (S53: No), the process proceeds to step S55. To do.

<ステップS54>

 ステップS54において、前記制御部10は、前記マザーマスターに基づいて前記医薬品マスターを更新する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスターにおいて、前記マザーマスターとの間に差が生じている項目の情報を前記マザーマスターの情報に更新することにより、前記医薬品マスターを前記マザーマスターと同期させる。即ち、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとの間の差分を抽出する。そして、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとの間で前記薬品に対応付けて登録された前記バーコード情報の数が異なる場合には、前記医薬品マスターに不足している前記バーコード情報を前記マザーマスターから読み出して前記医薬品マスターに登録する。また、前記制御部10は、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品のYJコードなどの薬品の識別情報に対応する前記バーコード情報が、前記医薬品マスターには登録されておらず前記マザーマスターに登録されている場合には、前記マザーマスターから前記バーコード情報を読み出して前記医薬品マスターに登録する。また、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとの間で、前記薬品に対応する前記バーコード情報の内容(包装重量又は包装内個数など)について差が生じている場合に、前記マザーマスターにおける前記バーコード情報の内容を採用して前記医薬品マスターにおける前記バーコード情報の内容を更新することも考えられる。なお、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS53~S54において、前記マザーマスターと前記医薬品マスターとの間に差が生じている薬品ごとにユーザー操作に応じて個別の有無を変更可能であってもよい。さらに、前記制御部10は、ユーザー操作に応じて任意に選択された薬品のみについて前記医薬品マスター内の情報を前記マザーマスター内の情報に更新すること、又は前記医薬品マスター内の情報を任意に編集することが可能であってもよい。

<Step S54>

In step S54, the control unit 10 updates the medicine master based on the mother master. Specifically, the control unit 10 updates the information on the item that is different from the mother master to the information on the mother master by updating the information on the medicine master with the mother master. Synchronize. That is, the control unit 10 extracts a difference between the medicine master and the mother master. And when the number of the barcode information registered in association with the medicine is different between the medicine master and the mother master, the control unit 10 has the bar that the medicine master lacks. Code information is read from the mother master and registered in the pharmaceutical master. In addition, the control unit 10 does not register the barcode information corresponding to the medicine identification information such as the YJ code of the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection processing in the medicine master, and does not register it in the mother master. If registered, the barcode information is read from the mother master and registered in the pharmaceutical master. In addition, the control unit 10, when there is a difference between the drug master and the mother master, the content of the barcode information corresponding to the drug (packaging weight or number in the package), It is also possible to adopt the content of the barcode information in the mother master and update the content of the barcode information in the pharmaceutical master. The control unit 10 may be able to change the presence / absence of individual medicines in steps S53 to S54 according to a user operation for each medicine for which there is a difference between the mother master and the medicine master. . Further, the control unit 10 updates the information in the drug master to the information in the mother master only for the drug arbitrarily selected according to the user operation, or arbitrarily edits the information in the drug master. It may be possible.

 なお、前記マザーマスターに基づいて前記医薬品マスターが更新された場合、前記制御部10は、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品について、前記医薬品マスターにおいて前記薬品識別情報に対応付けられているYJコード又は名称等の情報が、前記処方データに含まれる薬品のYJコード又は名称などの情報と一致するか否かの照合処理を実行することが考えられる。これにより、前記マザーマスターに基づく前記医薬品マスターの更新によって前記医薬品マスターにおける前記薬品識別情報と薬品との対応関係に誤りが生じた場合でも、その誤りを前記鑑査支援処理において発見することが可能である。

In addition, when the said pharmaceutical master is updated based on the said mother master, the said control part 10 is matched with the said chemical | drug | medicine identification information in the said pharmaceutical master about the chemical | medical agent which becomes the inspection object by the said weighing | inspection inspection process. It is conceivable to perform a collation process to determine whether information such as a code or name matches information such as a YJ code or name of a medicine included in the prescription data. Thus, even if an error occurs in the correspondence between the medicine identification information and the medicine in the medicine master due to the update of the medicine master based on the mother master, the error can be found in the inspection support process. is there.

<ステップS55>

 その後、ステップS55において、前記制御部10は、前記医薬品マスターから前記薬品の単位重量を取得する。なお、前記薬品マスター及び前記マザーマスターのいずれにも前記薬品の単位重量が記憶されていない場合には、予め設定されたエラーメッセージ等が表示される。例えば、前記制御部10は、前記秤量鑑査処理で鑑査対象となる薬品について前記バーコード情報が前記医薬品マスター及び前記マザーマスターのいずれにも登録されていない場合には、前記バーコード情報を手動で登録する旨を促す警告を前記表示部20に表示させてもよい。この場合、前記制御部10は、続いて前記登録画面D14を表示させることにより、前記操作部30のユーザー操作に応じて前記バーコード情報の登録処理を開始してもよい。

<Step S55>

Thereafter, in step S55, the control unit 10 acquires the unit weight of the medicine from the medicine master. In addition, when the unit weight of the medicine is not stored in either the medicine master or the mother master, a preset error message or the like is displayed. For example, if the barcode information is not registered in either the pharmaceutical master or the mother master for the medicine to be inspected in the weighing inspection process, the control unit 10 manually stores the barcode information. A warning prompting registration may be displayed on the display unit 20. In this case, the control unit 10 may start the registration process of the barcode information in response to a user operation of the operation unit 30 by subsequently displaying the registration screen D14.

 このように、前記マスター更新処理では、前記医薬品マスターに前記薬品の単位重量などの情報が記憶されていない場合には、前記医薬品マスターを前記マザーマスターに基づいて更新することが可能である。従って、前記秤量鑑査処理を中断することなく前記薬品の単位重量などの情報を更新することが可能であり、前記秤量鑑査処理を継続することが可能である。

As described above, in the master update process, when the information such as the unit weight of the medicine is not stored in the medicine master, the medicine master can be updated based on the mother master. Therefore, it is possible to update information such as the unit weight of the medicine without interrupting the weighing inspection process, and it is possible to continue the weighing inspection process.

 なお、前記ステップS51が省略されて、前記秤量鑑査処理の度に前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとの差の有無が判断されることも考えられる。また、前記ステップS53が省略されて、前記秤量鑑査処理の途中におけるユーザー操作なしに前記医薬品マスターが自動的に更新されてもよい。さらに、前記医薬品マスターと前記マザーマスターとの比較及び前記マザーマスターに基づく前記医薬品マスターの更新が予め設定された期間ごとに自動的に実行されることも他の実施形態として考えられる。

It is also conceivable that the step S51 is omitted and whether or not there is a difference between the pharmaceutical master and the mother master each time the weighing inspection process is performed. Further, the step S53 may be omitted, and the medicine master may be automatically updated without a user operation during the weighing inspection process. Furthermore, the comparison between the drug master and the mother master and the update of the drug master based on the mother master may be automatically executed every preset period.

[事前秤量鑑査機能]

 病院又は薬局等の医療関連施設では、過去に患者に処方された薬品と同一の薬品が患者に処方されることがある(Do処方)。このような場合、薬剤師などの作業者は、前記鑑査支援装置100に前記処方データが入力される前に、患者の来院予定(予約)又は来院頻度などに基づいて薬品の調剤作業及び鑑査作業を実行することがある。しかしながら、前記鑑査支援装置100に前記処方データが入力されていなければ前記鑑査作業に前記鑑査支援装置100を用いることができない。

[Preliminary weighing inspection function]

In a medical facility such as a hospital or a pharmacy, the same medicine as that prescribed to the patient in the past may be prescribed to the patient (Do prescription). In such a case, an operator such as a pharmacist performs a medicine dispensing operation and an inspection operation based on a patient's visit schedule (reservation) or a visit frequency before the prescription data is input to the inspection support device 100. May be executed. However, if the prescription data is not input to the inspection support device 100, the inspection support device 100 cannot be used for the inspection work.

 そこで、前記鑑査支援装置100は、新たに前記処方データが発行される前に、過去の前記処方データに基づいて前記鑑査支援処理を実行可能な事前秤量鑑査機能を備えることが考えられる。具体的には、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援プログラムに従って各種の処理を実行することにより、前記事前秤量鑑査機能を具現する。以下、図30を参照しつつ、前記事前秤量鑑査機能を具現するために前記制御部10によって実行される事前鑑査制御処理及び事前照合適用処理の手順の一例について説明する。なお、前記事前鑑査制御処理は、例えば患者の診察前などのように新規の処方データが登録される前に実行される処理であり、過去の処方データに基づいて事前に調剤した結果を鑑査するための処理である。また、前記事前照合適合処理は、前記秤量部5Nを用いた秤量を要することなく過去の処方データと新規の処方データとを照合して、前記事前鑑査制御処理で事前に鑑査された結果を新規の処方データの鑑査結果として採用するための処理である。

Therefore, it is conceivable that the inspection support apparatus 100 has a pre-weighing inspection function capable of executing the inspection support processing based on the past prescription data before the prescription data is newly issued. Specifically, the control unit 10 implements the pre-weighing inspection function by executing various processes in accordance with the inspection support program. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the pre-inspection control process and the pre-verification application process executed by the control unit 10 to implement the pre-weighing inspection function will be described with reference to FIG. The pre-inspection control process is a process that is executed before new prescription data is registered, for example, before a patient visit, and the pre-dispensed result is inspected based on past prescription data. It is a process to do. In addition, the pre-verification conforming process is a result of collating past prescription data and new prescription data without requiring weighing using the weighing unit 5N, and having been inspected in advance by the pre-inspection control process. Is a process for adopting as an inspection result of new prescription data.

<ステップS61>

 まず、ステップS61において、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理における鑑査対象となっていた処方データについて鑑査が完了したか否かを判断し、前記鑑査が完了した場合に(S61:Yes)、処理をステップS62に移行させる。即ち、前記処方データについての前記鑑査支援処理が終了するごとに前記ステップS62の処理が実行される。また、前記鑑査が完了していない場合は(S61:No)、処理をステップS63に移行させる。

<Step S61>

First, in step S61, the control unit 10 determines whether inspection has been completed for the prescription data that has been subject to inspection in the inspection support process, and when the inspection is completed (S61: Yes), The process proceeds to step S62. That is, the process of step S62 is performed every time the inspection support process for the prescription data is completed. If the inspection is not completed (S61: No), the process proceeds to step S63.

<ステップS62>

 ステップS62において、前記制御部10は、前記処方データにおける一部又は全部の情報を、前記秤量支援処理を実行するためのデータ(以下「事前照合用データ」と称する)として前記記憶部40に記憶する。即ち、前記事前照合用データは、前記処方データに基づいて生成される前記処方データの一部のデータ、又は前記処方データ自体である。例えば、前記事前照合用データには、前記処方データに対応する処方ID、患者ID(患者氏名)、薬品の種類、用法、用量(総量)などの情報が含まれる。

<Step S62>

In step S62, the control unit 10 stores a part or all of the information in the prescription data in the storage unit 40 as data for executing the weighing support process (hereinafter referred to as “pre-matching data”). To do. That is, the pre-collation data is a part of the prescription data generated based on the prescription data, or the prescription data itself. For example, the pre-collation data includes information such as a prescription ID, a patient ID (patient name), a medicine type, a usage, and a dose (total amount) corresponding to the prescription data.

 なお、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援処理における鑑査対象となった処方データのうち予め設定された条件を満たす処方データのみについて、前記事前照合用データの記憶の有無を判断することも考えられる。例えば、前記条件は、予め設定された患者であること、予め設定された薬品が含まれていないこと、前記処方データの種類が予め設定された種類(定期又は臨時など)であること、などが考えられる。なお、前記制御部10は、前記事前照合用データの記憶日時から予め設定された所定期間の経過後に前記事前照合用データを自動的に消去することが考えられる。これにより、前記記憶部40のデータ容量を有効利用することができると共に、古い前記事前照合用データの使用を禁止することが可能である。

The control unit 10 may determine whether or not the pre-verification data is stored for only prescription data satisfying a preset condition among the prescription data to be inspected in the inspection support process. It is done. For example, the condition is that the patient is preset, the preset medicine is not included, the type of the prescription data is a preset type (regular or temporary), and the like. Conceivable. Note that the control unit 10 may automatically delete the pre-collation data after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the storage date and time of the pre-collation data. This makes it possible to effectively use the data capacity of the storage unit 40 and prohibit the use of the old pre-verification data.

<ステップS63>

 ステップS63において、前記制御部10は、前記事前秤量鑑査機能を使用するためのユーザー操作が行われたか否かを判断する。例えば、前記処方鑑査画面D10に予め定められた事前秤量鑑査キーが表示されており、前記制御部10が、前記事前秤量鑑査キーが操作された場合に、前記事前秤量鑑査機能を使用するためのユーザー操作が行われたと判断する。ここで、前記ユーザー操作が行われたと判断されると(S63:Yes)、処理がステップS64に移行し、前記ユーザー操作が行われていないと判断されると(S63:No)、処理が前記ステップS61に戻る。

<Step S63>

In step S63, the control unit 10 determines whether a user operation for using the pre-weighing inspection function has been performed. For example, when a predetermined pre-weighing inspection key is displayed on the prescription inspection screen D10 and the control unit 10 is operated, the pre-weighing inspection key is used. It is determined that a user operation has been performed. If it is determined that the user operation has been performed (S63: Yes), the process proceeds to step S64. If it is determined that the user operation has not been performed (S63: No), the process is performed as described above. The process returns to step S61.

<ステップS64>

 ステップS64において、前記制御部10は、前記記憶部40に記憶されている前記事前照合用データの一覧を前記表示部20の前記処方鑑査画面D10上に表示させる。前記事前照合用データの一覧には、前記事前照合用データ各々に対応する患者ID、前記事前照合用データの元の前記処方データの処方IDなどが表示される。また、前記ステップS64において、前記制御部10は、前記事前照合用データの一覧から任意の前記事前照合用データを選択する操作を受け付ける。

<Step S64>

In step S <b> 64, the control unit 10 displays a list of the pre-verification data stored in the storage unit 40 on the prescription inspection screen D <b> 10 of the display unit 20. In the list of pre-collation data, a patient ID corresponding to each of the pre-collation data, a prescription ID of the prescription data that is the original of the pre-collation data, and the like are displayed. In step S64, the control unit 10 accepts an operation for selecting any of the pre-collation data from the pre-collation data list.

<ステップS65>

 ステップS65において、前記制御部10は、前記事前照合用データが選択されたか否かを判断する。ここで、前記事前照合用データが選択されたと判断すると(S65:Yes)、処理がステップS66に移行し、前記事前照合用データが選択されるまでの間は(S65:No)、処理がステップS65で待機する。

<Step S65>

In step S65, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the pre-collation data has been selected. If it is determined that the pre-collation data has been selected (S65: Yes), the process proceeds to step S66 until the pre-collation data is selected (S65: No). Waits in step S65.

<ステップS66>

 ステップS66において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS65で選択されたと判断された前記事前照合用データに基づく前記鑑査支援処理を開始する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記事前照合用データが鑑査対象として選択されたと判断し、前記鑑査支援処理(図7参照)における前記ステップS15から処理を開始する。

<Step S66>

In step S66, the control unit 10 starts the inspection support process based on the preliminary collation data determined to be selected in step S65. Specifically, the control unit 10 determines that the preliminary verification data has been selected as an inspection target, and starts the process from step S15 in the inspection support process (see FIG. 7).

<ステップS67>

 ステップS67において、前記制御部10は、前記事前照合用データについての前記鑑査支援処理が終了したか否かを判断し、前記鑑査支援処理が終了したと判断すると(S67:Yes)、処理をステップS68に移行させ、前記鑑査支援処理が終了するまでの間は(S67:No)、処理を前記ステップS67で待機させる。

<Step S67>

In step S67, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the inspection support process for the pre-verification data has been completed, and determines that the inspection support process has ended (S67: Yes), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S68 and waits for the process in step S67 until the inspection support process ends (S67: No).

<ステップS68>

 ステップS68において、前記制御部10は、前記事前照合用データについての前記鑑査支援処理の結果を事前鑑査結果として前記記憶部40に記憶させる。これにより、前記制御部10は、前記事前鑑査結果を後で参照することが可能である。例えば、前記事前鑑査結果には、前記事前照合用データにおける処方ID、患者ID(患者氏名)、薬品の種類、用法、用量(総量)、秤量値、秤量結果(数量)、照合結果(一致、不一致)などの情報が含まれる。

<Step S68>

In step S68, the control unit 10 causes the storage unit 40 to store the result of the inspection support process for the preliminary verification data as the preliminary inspection result. Thereby, the said control part 10 can refer the said preliminary inspection result later. For example, the pre-examination result includes the prescription ID, patient ID (patient name), medicine type, usage, dose (total amount), weighing value, weighing result (quantity), matching result ( Information such as match, mismatch).

<ステップS69>

 ステップS69において、前記制御部10は、前記事前鑑査結果を識別可能な情報を前記プリンターによって印刷する。ここに、図31は、前記ステップS69における印刷結果の一例を示す図である。例えば、図31に示されるように、前記制御部10は、前記事前鑑査結果の識別情報として、前記事前鑑査結果に連番で付される事前鑑査記録番号をバーコードB1として印刷する。また、図31に示されるように、前記ステップS69における印刷結果には、患者ID(患者名)、用法、日数、各薬品の総量などの情報も印刷される。

<Step S69>

In step S69, the control unit 10 prints information that can identify the preliminary inspection result by the printer. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the printing result in step S69. For example, as shown in FIG. 31, the control unit 10 prints, as the barcode B1, a pre-inspection record number assigned to the pre-inspection result by a serial number as identification information of the pre-inspection result. As shown in FIG. 31, information such as patient ID (patient name), usage, number of days, and total amount of each medicine is also printed in the print result in step S69.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理において、前記ステップS14の後段で前記事前照合適用処理を実行する。以下、図32を参照しつつ、前記事前照合適用処理の手順の一例について説明する。

And the said control part 10 performs the said prior collation application process in the back | latter stage of the said step S14 in the said inspection assistance process. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the pre-collation application process will be described with reference to FIG.

<ステップS71>

 ステップS71において、前記制御部10は、前記事前鑑査記録番号が読み取られたか否かを判断する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記情報読取部60によって前記バーコードB1が読み取られた場合に前記事前鑑査記録番号が読み取られたと判断する。前記事前鑑査記録番号が読み取られた場合(S71:Yes)、処理をステップS72に移行し、前記事前鑑査記録番号が読み取られていない場合は(S71:No)、当該事前鑑査処理が終了する。

<Step S71>

In step S71, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the preliminary inspection record number has been read. Specifically, the control unit 10 determines that the preliminary inspection record number has been read when the barcode B1 is read by the information reading unit 60. If the pre-inspection record number has been read (S71: Yes), the process proceeds to step S72. If the pre-inspection record number has not been read (S71: No), the pre-inspection process ends. To do.

<ステップS72>

 ステップS72において、前記制御部10は、前記事前鑑査記録番号に対応する前記事前鑑査結果を前記記憶部40から読み出す。なお、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS71~S72に代えて、前記事前鑑査結果の一覧を表示し、任意の前記事前鑑査結果の選択操作を受け付け、前記事前鑑査結果を読み出すことも他の実施形態として考えられる。

<Step S72>

In step S <b> 72, the control unit 10 reads out the preliminary inspection result corresponding to the preliminary inspection record number from the storage unit 40. The control unit 10 may display a list of the preliminary inspection results, accept an arbitrary selection operation of the preliminary inspection results, and read the preliminary inspection results instead of the steps S71 to S72. Other embodiments are possible.

<ステップS73>

 ステップS73において、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理の対象となっている前記処方データの内容と前記事前鑑査結果に含まれる前記事前照合用データの内容とが全て一致するか否かを照合する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記処方データ及び前記事前照合用データにおける患者ID(患者氏名)などの患者の情報と、薬品情報(YJコードなど)、用法、用量(総量)などの薬品の情報とが全て一致するか否かを判断する。なお、前記照合処理における照合項目は予め設定された一又は複数の項目であればよい。また、例えば、前記制御部10は、前記事前照合用データに対応する患者と前記処方データに対応する患者が一致するか否かを判断した後、前記患者が一致する場合にのみ薬品の情報が一致するか否かを判断し、前記患者が一致しない場合には薬品の情報の一致を判断することなく照合結果が不一致であると判断してもよい。

<Step S73>

In step S73, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the contents of the prescription data that are the targets of the inspection support process and the contents of the preliminary verification data included in the preliminary inspection results all match. Is matched. Specifically, the control unit 10 includes patient information such as patient ID (patient name) in the prescription data and the pre-verification data, drug information (YJ code, etc.), usage, dose (total amount), etc. It is determined whether or not all the drug information matches. In addition, the collation item in the said collation process should just be one or several preset items. In addition, for example, the control unit 10 determines whether or not the patient corresponding to the pre-verification data matches the patient corresponding to the prescription data, and then only when the patient matches If the patients do not match, it may be determined that the collation results do not match without determining whether the drug information matches.

<ステップS74>

 ステップS74において、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS73による前記処方データ及び前記事前照合用データの照合結果が一致であると判断すると(S74:Yes)、処理がステップS75に移行し、前記照合結果が不一致であると判断すると(S74:No)、処理がステップS76に移行する。

<Step S74>

In step S74, when the control unit 10 determines that the collation result of the prescription data and the pre-collation data in step S73 is the same (S74: Yes), the process proceeds to step S75, and the collation is performed. If it is determined that the results do not match (S74: No), the process proceeds to step S76.

<ステップS75>

 ステップS75において、前記制御部10は、前記事前鑑査制御処理で実行された前記事前鑑査結果を前記事前鑑査制御処理の実行後に前記鑑査支援処理の対象(照合対象)となる前記処方データの鑑査結果として前記記憶部40に記憶させ、処理を前記ステップS21に移行させる。即ち、前記処方データについての前記秤量鑑査処理などが省略され、前記事前照合用データに基づいて行われた前記事前鑑査制御処理における前記事前鑑査結果が前記処方データの鑑査結果として採用されることになる。

<Step S75>

In step S75, the control unit 10 uses the pre-inspection result executed in the pre-inspection control process as a target (verification target) of the inspection support process after the execution of the pre-inspection control process. Is stored in the storage unit 40, and the process proceeds to step S21. That is, the weighing inspection process for the prescription data is omitted, and the preliminary inspection result in the preliminary inspection control process performed based on the preliminary verification data is adopted as the inspection result of the prescription data. Will be.

<ステップS76>

 ステップS76において、前記制御部10は、前記事前鑑査結果と前記処方データとの照合結果が不一致である旨のワーニングを前記表示部20に表示させる。例えば、「患者違い」、「薬品違い」、「用法違い」、「用量違い」などのメッセージが表示される。この場合、前記事前照合処理が終了し、処理は前記ステップS15に移行する。即ち、この場合には、前記事前鑑査結果が採用されず、当該処方データを対象とする前記鑑査支援処理が通常通り実行され、前記秤量鑑査処理において前記秤量部5Nと前記処方データとが照合されることになる。

<Step S76>

In step S76, the control unit 10 causes the display unit 20 to display a warning that the collation result between the preliminary inspection result and the prescription data is inconsistent. For example, messages such as “patient difference”, “drug difference”, “use difference”, and “dose difference” are displayed. In this case, the pre-collation process ends, and the process proceeds to step S15. That is, in this case, the preliminary inspection result is not adopted, the inspection support process for the prescription data is performed as usual, and the weighing unit 5N is compared with the prescription data in the weighing inspection process. Will be.

 以上説明したように、前記事前秤量鑑査機能によれば、前記事前照合用データについて事前に前記鑑査支援処理が実行可能であり、予め前記処方データについての調剤作業及び鑑査作業などを行うことが可能であり、薬剤師などの作業者は時間を有効に利用することが可能になる。また、前記処方データと前記事前照合用データとにおける薬品の情報が一致する部分だけについて前記事前照合結果が採用されることも考えられるが、前述したように、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記処方データと前記事前照合用データとにおける薬品の情報が全て一致した場合にのみ前記事前照合結果が採用されるため安全性の高い鑑査が実現される。

As described above, according to the pre-weighing inspection function, the inspection support process can be executed in advance for the pre-check data, and the dispensing operation and the inspection operation for the prescription data are performed in advance. Therefore, an operator such as a pharmacist can use time effectively. In addition, although it is conceivable that the pre-collation result is adopted only for the portion where the drug information in the prescription data and the pre-collation data matches, as described above, in the inspection support device 100, Since the pre-collation result is adopted only when all the drug information in the prescription data and the pre-collation data match, a highly safe inspection is realized.

 特に、例えば前記事前照合用データにおける複数種類の薬品の総重量と前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果とだけを照合した後、前記事前照合用データと次の処方データとにおける複数種類の薬品の総重量が一致している場合に、前記事前秤量鑑査機能による鑑査結果が前記処方データについての鑑査結果として採用される手法も比較例として考えられる。しかしながら、薬品の総重量が同じであっても薬品の種類又は数が異なる場合があるため、このような手法では信頼性が低くなる。これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記事前照合用データにおける複数種類の薬品についての秤量鑑査処理が複数の前記秤量部5Nを用いて薬品ごとに個別に実行される。そして、前記事前照合用データと前記処方データとにおける全ての薬品の情報が一致している場合にのみ前記事前照合結果が採用される。従って、前記鑑査支援装置100では、信頼性の高い鑑査が実現される。

In particular, for example, after collating only the total weight of a plurality of types of medicines in the pre-collation data and the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N, A method in which the inspection result by the pre-weighing inspection function is adopted as the inspection result for the prescription data when the total weights match is also considered as a comparative example. However, even if the total weight of the medicines is the same, the kind or number of medicines may be different, so that such a method is less reliable. On the other hand, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the weighing inspection process for a plurality of types of medicines in the preliminary collation data is individually executed for each medicine using the plurality of weighing units 5N. And only when the information of all the medicines in the data for pre-collation and the prescription data are in agreement, the pre-collation result is adopted. Therefore, in the inspection support apparatus 100, highly reliable inspection is realized.

 なお、前記制御部10は、前記事前秤量鑑査機能により前記鑑査支援処理が実行される場合には、前記鑑査保留機能の利用を制限することが考えられる。例えば、前記制御部10は、前記処方鑑査画面D10における前記鑑査保留キーK41の表示をグレーアウト表示することが考えられる。

In addition, it is possible that the said control part 10 restrict | limits utilization of the said inspection pending | holding function, when the said inspection assistance process is performed by the said prior weighing inspection function. For example, the control unit 10 may display the inspection hold key K41 on the prescription inspection screen D10 in gray out.

[マザーマスター更新機能]

 前述したように、前記マザーマスターは、前記マスター更新機能において前記医薬品マスター及び前記バーコード情報の更新などに用いられる。ここで、前記マザーマスターが、前記サーバー装置400から前記鑑査支援装置100各々に配信される場合には、前記サーバー装置400で設定される前記マザーマスターの信頼性が高いものである必要がある。これに対し、前記医療システム1が、前記サーバー装置400と、前記サーバー装置400に前記通信網N1を介して接続される複数の前記鑑査支援装置100とを含む構成であって、前記鑑査支援装置100各々から収集される情報に基づいて前記マザーマスターを更新するマザーマスター更新機能を有することが考えられる。なお、前記医療システム1が本発明に係る鑑査支援システムの一例である。また、前記サーバー装置400は、前記調剤支援システム200又は前記レセプトシステム300であってもよい。

[Mother master update function]

As described above, the mother master is used for updating the drug master and the barcode information in the master update function. Here, when the mother master is distributed from the server device 400 to each of the inspection support devices 100, the mother master set in the server device 400 needs to have high reliability. On the other hand, the medical system 1 includes the server device 400 and a plurality of the inspection support devices 100 connected to the server device 400 via the communication network N1, and the inspection support device It is conceivable to have a mother master update function for updating the mother master based on information collected from each of 100. The medical system 1 is an example of an inspection support system according to the present invention. Further, the server device 400 may be the dispensing support system 200 or the reception system 300.

 前述したように、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記制御部10が、前記バーコード情報における前記単一重量及び前記包装重量のように、前記秤量部51~54を用いて実際に測定される実測値に基づいて算出可能な値を、その実測値に基づいて設定することが可能である。そして、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100の起動時又はシャットダウン時などの予め定められたタイミングで、各薬品の前記バーコード情報をCSV形式などの予め定められた形式のデータとして出力し、自己の前記鑑査支援装置100を識別可能なMACアドレスなどの識別情報と共に、前記通信網N1を介して前記サーバー装置400に送信する。なお、係る送信処理を実行するときの前記制御部10が送信処理部の一例である。これにより、前記サーバー装置400には、複数の前記鑑査支援装置100から各薬品に対応する複数の前記バーコード情報が自動的に収集されることになる。なお、前記バーコード情報を含む前記医薬品マスターが前記鑑査支援装置100各々から前記サーバー装置400に送信されること、又は前記単一重量又は前記包装重量の情報のみが前記鑑査支援装置100各々から前記サーバー装置400に送信されることも他の実施形態として考えられる。

As described above, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 performs actual measurement using the weighing units 51 to 54 such as the single weight and the package weight in the barcode information. A value that can be calculated based on the value can be set based on the actual measurement value. And the said control part 10 outputs the said barcode information of each chemical | medical agent as data of predetermined formats, such as a CSV format, at the predetermined timings, such as at the time of starting of the said inspection assistance apparatus 100 or a shutdown. The identification information such as a MAC address that can identify the inspection support device 100 is transmitted to the server device 400 via the communication network N1. In addition, the said control part 10 when performing the transmission process which concerns is an example of a transmission process part. Accordingly, the server device 400 automatically collects a plurality of pieces of bar code information corresponding to each medicine from the plurality of inspection support devices 100. In addition, the said pharmaceutical master containing the said barcode information is transmitted to the said server apparatus 400 from each said inspection support apparatus 100, or only the information of the said single weight or the said packaging weight is the said each from the said inspection support apparatus 100. Transmission to the server apparatus 400 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

 一方、前記サーバー装置400は、CPU、RAM、及びROMなどを含む制御部401と、ハードディスク又はSSDのような不揮発性の記憶部402とを備える。前記記憶部402には、前記マザーマスター、及び前記鑑査支援装置100各々から取得する前記バーコード情報などが記憶される。そして、前記制御部401は、複数の前記鑑査支援装置100から取得した複数の前記バーコード情報に基づいて、各薬品の前記単一重量及び前記包装重量を算出し、前記マザーマスターにおける各薬品の前記単一重量及び前記包装重量として設定する。ここに、係る設定処理を実行するときの前記制御部401が重量設定処理部の一例である。

On the other hand, the server device 400 includes a control unit 401 including a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, and the like, and a non-volatile storage unit 402 such as a hard disk or an SSD. The storage unit 402 stores the barcode information acquired from the mother master and the inspection support device 100, respectively. And the said control part 401 calculates the said single weight and the said package weight of each chemical | medical agent based on the several said barcode information acquired from the said some inspection assistance apparatus 100, Each chemical | medical agent in the said mother master is calculated. Set as the single weight and the packaging weight. The said control part 401 when performing the setting process which concerns here is an example of a weight setting process part.

 これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100各々は、前記サーバー装置400から更新後の前記マザーマスターを取得することにより、前記鑑査支援装置100各々から取得した情報に基づいて設定された前記単一重量及び前記包装重量の情報を取得可能である。具体的には、前記サーバー装置400が、予め設定されたタイミングで前記マザーマスターを前記鑑査支援装置100各々に自動配信し、又は、前記鑑査支援装置100各々が、予め設定されたタイミングで前記サーバー装置400から前記マザーマスターを自動的に取得することが考えられる。即ち、前記医療システム1では、前記鑑査支援装置100各々と前記サーバー装置400との間において、ユーザー操作を介することなく自動的に前記バーコード情報、及び前記マザーマスターの送受信が実行される所謂M2M(Machine to Machine)が実現されている。なお、前記鑑査支援装置100各々が取得する情報は、前記マザーマスターのうち前記バーコード情報に対応する情報のみ、又は前記マザーマスターのうち前記単一重量又は前記包装重量の情報のみであってもよい。

Accordingly, each of the inspection support devices 100 acquires the updated master master from the server device 400, and thereby sets the single weight set based on the information acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100 and the Package weight information can be acquired. Specifically, the server device 400 automatically distributes the mother master to each inspection support device 100 at a preset timing, or each of the inspection support devices 100 sets the server at a preset timing. It is conceivable to automatically obtain the mother master from the device 400. That is, in the medical system 1, the bar code information and the mother master are automatically transmitted and received between each of the inspection support devices 100 and the server device 400 without any user operation, so-called M2M. (Machine to Machine) is realized. The information acquired by each of the inspection support devices 100 may be only information corresponding to the barcode information in the mother master, or only information on the single weight or the packaging weight in the mother master. Good.

 ここで、前記制御部401による前記単一重量の算出手法の一例について説明する。なお、前記包装重量については、前記単一重量と同様に算出すればよいため、ここでは説明を省略する。

Here, an example of a method for calculating the single weight by the control unit 401 will be described. Note that the packaging weight may be calculated in the same manner as the single weight, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

 まず、前記制御部401は、薬品ごとに、前記鑑査支援装置100各々から取得した複数の単一重量と前記マザーマスターで現在登録されている単一重量とを合わせた複数の単一重量における中央値を基準単一重量として抽出する。なお、他の実施形態として、前記マザーマスターで現在登録されている単一重量が抽出されないことも考えられる。

First, the control unit 401, for each medicine, has a center in a plurality of single weights, which is a combination of a plurality of single weights acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100 and a single weight currently registered in the mother master. The value is extracted as a reference single weight. As another embodiment, a single weight currently registered in the mother master may not be extracted.

 ここで、前記単一重量の母数が奇数である場合、前記中央値は、前記単一重量を昇順に並べた場合に中央に位置する値であり、前記単一重量の数が偶数である場合、前記中央値は、前記単一重量を昇順に並べた場合に中央に位置する二つの値のうち小さい方の値である。なお、前記単一重量の数が偶数である場合の前記中央値は、前記単一重量を昇順に並べた場合に中央に位置する二つの値の平均値であってもよい。

Here, when the parameter of the single weight is an odd number, the median value is a value located in the center when the single weights are arranged in ascending order, and the number of the single weights is an even number. In this case, the median is the smaller of the two values located in the center when the single weights are arranged in ascending order. The median value when the number of single weights is an even number may be an average value of two values located at the center when the single weights are arranged in ascending order.

 次に、前記制御部401は、薬品ごとに、前記基準単一重量について予め定められた許容範囲を算出する。前記許容範囲は、前記マザーマスターにおいて前記単一重量が誤って大きく変動しないように制限するための値である。例えば、前記許容範囲は、前記中央値の±10%以内である。

Next, the control unit 401 calculates a predetermined allowable range for the reference single weight for each medicine. The allowable range is a value for limiting the single weight so as not to fluctuate greatly in the mother master. For example, the allowable range is within ± 10% of the median.

 そして、前記制御部401は、薬品ごとに、複数の前記鑑査支援装置100から取得した前記単一重量のうち前記許容範囲内に属する単一重量を抽出する。その後、前記制御部401は、前記許容範囲内の前記単一重量の合計をデータ数で除して平均化した平均単一重量を算出し、前記マザーマスターにおける前記単一重量として設定する。

And the said control part 401 extracts the single weight which belongs to the said tolerance | permissible_range among the said single weight acquired from the said some inspection assistance apparatus 100 for every chemical | medical agent. Thereafter, the control unit 401 calculates an average single weight obtained by dividing the total of the single weights within the allowable range by the number of data, and sets the average single weight as the single weight in the mother master.

 このように、前記マザーマスター更新機能によれば、前記マザーマスターにおける薬品各々の前記単一重量を、複数の前記鑑査支援装置100から収集された情報に応じて更新することが可能であり、前記単一重量の精度を高めることが可能である。

Thus, according to the mother master update function, it is possible to update the single weight of each medicine in the mother master according to information collected from a plurality of the inspection support devices 100, It is possible to increase the accuracy of a single weight.

 例えば、3つの前記鑑査支援装置100から、ある特定の薬品の単一重量として、2.43g、2.40g、2.80gの3つの値が取得され、前記マザーマスターに現在登録中の前記単一重量が2.42gである場合は、その4つの値のうち中央値である2.42gが基準単一重量として抽出される。この場合、前記許容範囲は、前記基準単一重量である2.42gの±10%の2.18g以上2.66g以内である。そして、2.43g、2.40g、2.42g、2.80gのうち、前記許容範囲外の2.80gが除外されて前記許容範囲内の2.43g、2.40g、2.42gが抽出され、その3つの値の合計をデータ数の3で除して平均化した値((2.43+2.40+2.42)/3≒2.42)である2.42gが算出され、前記マザーマスターにおける前記特定の薬品の単一重量(重量の基準値)として設定される。

For example, three values of 2.43 g, 2.40 g, and 2.80 g are acquired as a single weight of a specific medicine from the three inspection support devices 100, and the unit currently registered in the mother master is acquired. When one weight is 2.42 g, 2.42 g which is the median value among the four values is extracted as the reference single weight. In this case, the allowable range is not less than 2.18 g of 2.42 g which is the reference single weight and 2.66 g or more and 2.66 g or less. Then, out of 2.43 g, 2.40 g, 2.42 g, and 2.80 g, 2.80 g outside the allowable range is excluded, and 2.43 g, 2.40 g, and 2.42 g within the allowable range are extracted. Then, 2.42 g which is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the three values by 3 of the number of data ((2.43 + 2.40 + 2.42) /3≈2.42) is calculated, and the mother master Is set as a single weight (reference value of the weight) of the specific medicine.

 なお、前記医療システム1において、前記サーバー装置400に収集される薬品の前記単一重量の母数が少ない場合には、前記マザーマスターにおける前記単一重量の設定精度が低くなるおそれがある。そこで、前記制御部401は、前記鑑査支援装置100各々から取得した前記単一重量の母数が予め設定された閾値未満である場合には、それらの単一重量に基づく前記マザーマスターの更新を実行しないことが考えられる。

In the medical system 1, when the parameter of the single weight of the medicine collected in the server device 400 is small, the setting accuracy of the single weight in the mother master may be lowered. Therefore, when the parameter of the single weight acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100 is less than a preset threshold, the control unit 401 updates the mother master based on the single weight. It is possible not to execute.

 具体的に、前記制御部401は、前記鑑査支援装置100各々から取得される薬品の前記単一重量を前記鑑査支援装置100の前記識別情報及び取得日時と共に前記記憶部402に記憶する。なお、同一の前記鑑査支援装置100から取得された同一の薬品についての前記単一重量は上書き保存される。その後、前記制御部401は、前記鑑査支援装置100から前記単一重量を取得した場合に、例えば現在から過去の7日間のような予め設定された特定期間において同種の薬品について取得した前記単一重量の母数が前記閾値以上であるか否かを判断する。そして、前記単一重量の数が前記閾値以上である場合には、前述したようにそれらの単一重量に基づいて前記マザーマスターにおける前記単一重量を更新する。一方、前記単一重量の数が前記閾値未満である場合には、それらの単一重量に基づく前記マザーマスターの更新を実行しない。これにより、母数が少なく信頼性が低い状態で前記単一重量が更新されることが防止される。

Specifically, the control unit 401 stores the single weight of the medicine acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100 together with the identification information and the acquisition date and time of the inspection support device 100 in the storage unit 402. The single weight of the same medicine acquired from the same inspection support device 100 is overwritten and stored. Thereafter, when the control unit 401 acquires the single weight from the inspection support device 100, the single unit acquired for the same kind of medicine in a specific period set in advance such as the past seven days from the present, for example. It is determined whether the weight parameter is equal to or greater than the threshold value. And when the number of the said single weight is more than the said threshold value, the said single weight in the said mother master is updated based on those single weights as mentioned above. On the other hand, if the number of the single weights is less than the threshold value, the updating of the mother master based on the single weights is not performed. This prevents the single weight from being updated in a state where the parameter is small and the reliability is low.

 ところで、前記制御部401は、前記サーバー装置400に収集される薬品の前記単一重量及び前記包装重量を更新する際に、前記YJコード及び前記GS1コードなどの薬品識別情報が同一の前記バーコード情報ごとに平均化することが考えられる。しかしながら、メーカーから販売される薬品について、前記薬品識別情報が変更されることなく、当該薬品が収容されるPTPシート、ヒートシール、又は薬箱などの包装の仕様だけが変更され、薬品の単位重量又は包装重量などの個別情報が変化することがある。このように前記個別情報が変化すると、前記鑑査支援装置100から前記サーバー装置400に収集される前記バーコード情報の中に、前記鑑査支援装置100で包装の仕様の変更前の薬品についての鑑査結果に基づいて更新された前記バーコード情報と、前記鑑査支援装置100で包装の仕様の変更後の薬品についての鑑査結果に基づいて更新された前記バーコード情報とが含まれることになる。そのため、前記マザーマスターに設定される前記バーコード情報ごとの前記単一重量及び前記包装重量の信頼性が低くなるおそれがある。そこで、前記医療システム1では、前記マザーマスターに設定される前記バーコード情報ごとの前記単一重量及び前記包装重量の信頼性を高めることが望ましい。なお、以下では、前記単一重量及び前記包装重量を前記個別情報の一例として説明する。

By the way, when the control unit 401 updates the single weight and the packaging weight of the medicine collected in the server device 400, the barcode having the same medicine identification information such as the YJ code and the GS1 code. It is possible to average for each information. However, for the medicines sold by the manufacturer, the specifications of the packaging such as the PTP sheet, heat seal, or medicine box in which the medicine is accommodated are changed without changing the medicine identification information, and the unit weight of the medicine. Or individual information such as packaging weight may change. When the individual information changes in this way, the inspection result of the medicine before the change of the packaging specification in the inspection support device 100 in the barcode information collected from the inspection support device 100 to the server device 400. The barcode information updated based on the information and the barcode information updated based on the inspection result of the medicine after the change of the packaging specification by the inspection support device 100 are included. Therefore, the reliability of the single weight and the package weight for each barcode information set in the mother master may be lowered. Therefore, in the medical system 1, it is desirable to increase the reliability of the single weight and the package weight for each barcode information set in the mother master. Hereinafter, the single weight and the package weight will be described as an example of the individual information.

 まず、前記医薬品マスターでは、前記バーコード情報ごとに、当該バーコード情報に対応する薬品について、複数種類の包装材で包装された状態が撮影された外観撮影画像、又はその状態が描かれたイラスト画像などの包装状態画像が当該包装状態画像を識別するためのファイル名などの包装識別情報と共に登録可能である。前記包装状態画像及び前記包装識別情報は、例えば前記マザーマスターに予め登録されており、前記マザーマスターから前記医薬品マスターに取り込まれる。具体的に、前記鑑査支援装置100の前記制御部10は、予め設定されたタイミングで、前記マザーマスターに登録されている前記包装状態画像及び前記包装識別情報を前記医薬品マスターに自動的に登録することが考えられる。即ち、薬品の包装の仕様が変更され、前記マザーマスターに当該薬品の前記包装状態画像及び前記包装識別情報が新たに登録された場合には、その後に前記鑑査支援装置100で使用される前記マザーマスター及び前記医薬品マスターも最新の状態に更新されることになる。

First, in the medicine master, for each of the barcode information, an external appearance photographed image in which a state corresponding to the barcode information is packaged with a plurality of types of packaging materials or an illustration depicting the state is drawn. A packaging state image such as an image can be registered together with packaging identification information such as a file name for identifying the packaging state image. The packaging state image and the packaging identification information are registered in advance in the mother master, for example, and are taken into the pharmaceutical master from the mother master. Specifically, the control unit 10 of the inspection support device 100 automatically registers the packaging state image and the packaging identification information registered in the mother master in the medicine master at a preset timing. It is possible. That is, when the packaging specification of the medicine is changed and the packaging state image and the packaging identification information of the medicine are newly registered in the mother master, the mother used in the inspection support apparatus 100 thereafter The master and the pharmaceutical product master are also updated to the latest state.

 そして、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記制御部10が、前記鑑査支援装置100で表示される前記処方鑑査画面D10又は前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13などにおいて、前記バーコード情報各々に対応する前記包装状態画像及び前記包装識別情報を任意に選択するためのユーザー操作を受付可能である。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13(図14参照)の「バーコード」に対応する操作キーが操作されると、前記登録画面D14を表示させる。続いて、前記制御部10は、前記登録画面D14が表示された状態で、包装の仕様が新しくなった薬品の前記バーコード情報が前記情報読取部60で読み取られると、当該バーコード情報に対応する薬品情報を操作対象として登録処理を開始する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記登録画面D14において、読み取られた前記バーコード情報に対応する表示欄を予め設定された配色などの表示態様で識別可能に表示させる。

And in the said inspection assistance apparatus 100, the said control part 10 is the said packaging state image corresponding to each said barcode information in the said prescription inspection screen D10 displayed on the said inspection assistance apparatus 100, the said master maintenance screen D13, etc. A user operation for arbitrarily selecting the packaging identification information can be accepted. Specifically, when the operation key corresponding to the “bar code” on the master maintenance screen D13 (see FIG. 14) is operated, the control unit 10 displays the registration screen D14. Subsequently, the control unit 10 corresponds to the barcode information when the information reading unit 60 reads the barcode information of the medicine whose packaging specifications are new in a state where the registration screen D14 is displayed. The registration process is started with the drug information to be operated as the operation target. Specifically, the control unit 10 displays a display field corresponding to the read barcode information on the registration screen D14 so as to be identifiable in a display mode such as a preset color scheme.

 その後、読み取られた前記バーコード情報に対応する表示欄において、「画像」の欄が操作されると、前記制御部10は、当該バーコード情報に対応付けて登録されている前記包装状態画像の一覧を示す画像一覧画面D143を前記表示部20に表示させる。ここに、図33は、前記画像一覧画面D143の一例を示す図である。なお、操作対象の前記バーコード情報の選択は前記操作部30に対するユーザー操作に応じて行われてもよい。次に、前記制御部10は、前記表示部20に表示された画像の一覧から任意の画像が選択されて確定操作が行われると、その画像の選択状態を一時的に記憶したまま、前記画像一覧画面D143を閉じて前記登録画面D14を前記表示部20に表示させる。その後、前記登録画面D14において確定操作が行われると、前記制御部10は、前記バーコード情報について前記画像一覧画面D143で選択されていた前記包装状態画像に対応する前記包装識別情報を当該バーコード情報に記憶する。

Thereafter, when the “image” field is operated in the display field corresponding to the read barcode information, the control unit 10 displays the packaging state image registered in association with the barcode information. An image list screen D143 showing a list is displayed on the display unit 20. FIG. 33 shows an example of the image list screen D143. The selection of the barcode information to be operated may be performed according to a user operation on the operation unit 30. Next, when an arbitrary image is selected from the list of images displayed on the display unit 20 and a confirming operation is performed, the control unit 10 temporarily stores the selection state of the image and stores the image. The list screen D143 is closed and the registration screen D14 is displayed on the display unit 20. Thereafter, when a confirmation operation is performed on the registration screen D14, the control unit 10 displays the packaging identification information corresponding to the packaging state image selected on the image list screen D143 for the barcode information. Store in information.

 これにより、前記医療システム1では、前記サーバー装置400が前記鑑査支援装置100から収集する前記バーコード情報に、当該バーコード情報に対応付けて記憶された前記包装識別情報が含まれることになる。そのため、前記サーバー装置400では、前記制御部401が、前記YJコード及び前記GS1コードなどの薬品識別情報と前記包装識別情報とが同じ前記バーコード情報ごとに、前記単一重量及び前記包装重量各々の平均値を算出することが可能である。そして、前記制御部401は、前記単一重量及び前記包装重量の平均値を、前記マザーマスターの前記バーコード情報に対応する前記包装識別情報ごとの前記単一重量及び前記包装重量として設定する。即ち、前記制御部401は、前記鑑査支援装置100各々から取得される前記単一重量及び前記包装重量のうち前記包装識別情報が同一である前記単一重量及び前記包装重量に基づいて当該包装識別情報に対応する前記単一重量及び前記包装重量の基準値を設定する。なお、前記制御部401は、前記マザーマスターにおいて前記バーコード情報に対応付けられた前記包装識別情報のうち最新の包装識別情報を前記バーコード情報に対応する前記単一重量及び前記包装重量として設定することも考えられる。

Thereby, in the medical system 1, the packaging identification information stored in association with the barcode information is included in the barcode information collected by the server device 400 from the inspection support device 100. Therefore, in the server device 400, the control unit 401 determines that each of the single weight and the packaging weight for each barcode information in which the medicine identification information such as the YJ code and the GS1 code and the packaging identification information are the same. It is possible to calculate the average value of. And the said control part 401 sets the average value of the said single weight and the said package weight as the said single weight and the said package weight for every said package identification information corresponding to the said barcode information of the said mother master. That is, the control unit 401 identifies the packaging based on the single weight and the packaging weight that are the same in the packaging identification information among the single weight and the packaging weight acquired from each of the inspection support devices 100. A reference value of the single weight and the package weight corresponding to the information is set. The control unit 401 sets the latest package identification information among the package identification information associated with the barcode information in the mother master as the single weight and the package weight corresponding to the barcode information. It is also possible to do.

 このように構成された前記医療システム1では、前記マザーマスターにおける前記バーコード情報に対応する前記単一重量及び前記包装重量などの個別情報が、当該バーコード情報に対応する薬品の包装の仕様ごとに更新される。これにより、前記マザーマスターに設定される前記バーコード情報ごとの前記単一重量及び前記包装重量の信頼性が高まり、結果的に、当該バーコード情報が使用される前記鑑査支援装置100における鑑査精度を高めることが可能である。なお、前記マザーマスターにおいて、前記バーコード情報ごとに複数の前記包装識別情報に対応する複数の前記個別情報が記憶されている場合、前記鑑査支援装置100の前記制御部10が、前記バーコード情報に対応する前記包装識別情報を選択するユーザー操作に応じて、当該バーコード情報に対応する前記個別情報を切り替えることが考えられる。

In the medical system 1 configured as described above, individual information such as the single weight and the packaging weight corresponding to the barcode information in the mother master is included in each medicine packaging specification corresponding to the barcode information. Updated to Thereby, the reliability of the single weight and the packaging weight for each barcode information set in the mother master is increased, and as a result, the inspection accuracy in the inspection support device 100 in which the barcode information is used. It is possible to increase. In the mother master, when a plurality of pieces of individual information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of packaging identification information are stored for each piece of barcode information, the control unit 10 of the inspection support device 100 performs the barcode information. It is conceivable to switch the individual information corresponding to the barcode information in accordance with a user operation for selecting the packaging identification information corresponding to the barcode information.

[履歴保護機能]

 ところで、前記鑑査支援装置100において、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部51~54の秤量結果に基づく鑑査履歴を前記記憶部40に記憶する。ここで、前記制御部10は、前記記憶部40に記憶される前記鑑査履歴を予め設定された削除条件に従って自動的に古いものから順に削除することが考えられる。ここに、係る処理を実行するときの前記制御部10が記憶処理部の一例である。

[History protection function]

Incidentally, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 stores the inspection history based on the weighing results of the weighing units 51 to 54 in the storage unit 40. Here, it is conceivable that the control unit 10 automatically deletes the inspection history stored in the storage unit 40 in order from the oldest in accordance with preset deletion conditions. The said control part 10 when performing the process which concerns here is an example of a memory | storage process part.

 具体的に、前記削除条件は、前記鑑査履歴の記憶日時から予め設定された日時が経過したタイミングが到来したこと、又は、前記記憶部40の記憶可能容量が下限値以下に達したこと等である。但し、この場合には、ユーザーが重要と思っている鑑査履歴が存在する場合であっても古いものから順に削除されてしまうことになる。

Specifically, the deletion condition is that the timing when a preset date / time has elapsed from the storage date / time of the inspection history has arrived, or that the storage capacity of the storage unit 40 has reached a lower limit value or less. is there. However, in this case, even if there is an inspection history that the user thinks important, the oldest one is deleted in order.

 そこで、前記鑑査支援装置100において、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査履歴を保護することが可能な履歴保護機能を有することが考えられる。ここに、前記履歴保護機能を具現するための処理を実行するときの前記制御部10が保護処理部の一例である。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査履歴の一覧を表示させ、その一覧が表示された状態で任意のユーザーによる選択操作を受け付ける。例えば、前記制御部10は、ユーザー操作に応じて、前記鑑査履歴を、処方ごとに選択することも可能であるが、前記鑑査履歴を、患者ごと、日付ごと、薬品ごと、担当薬剤師ごとに一括して選択することも可能である。そして、前記鑑査履歴には、保護の有無を示す保護情報として保護フラグが含まれており、ユーザー操作に応じて選択された前記鑑査履歴では保護フラグがONに設定される。また、ユーザーによって患者、日付、薬品、担当薬剤師などの条件が事前に選択されている場合には、その後にその条件に該当する前記鑑査履歴が生じた場合にも当該鑑査履歴における前記保護フラグがONに設定される。

Therefore, in the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 may have a history protection function capable of protecting the inspection history. Here, the control unit 10 when executing the process for realizing the history protection function is an example of the protection processing unit. Specifically, the control unit 10 displays a list of the inspection history, and accepts a selection operation by an arbitrary user in a state where the list is displayed. For example, the control unit 10 can select the inspection history for each prescription according to a user operation, but the inspection history can be selected for each patient, for each date, for each drug, and for each pharmacist in charge. It is also possible to select. The inspection history includes a protection flag as protection information indicating the presence or absence of protection, and the protection flag is set to ON in the inspection history selected in accordance with a user operation. In addition, when conditions such as patient, date, medicine, and responsible pharmacist are selected in advance by the user, even if the inspection history corresponding to the conditions is subsequently generated, the protection flag in the inspection history is set. Set to ON.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記削除条件に従って前記鑑査履歴を削除する際、ユーザー操作に応じて予め選択されて前記保護フラグがONに設定されている前記鑑査履歴を消去対象から除外する。これにより、ユーザーは、前記鑑査支援装置100で前記履歴照会の操作を行うことにより、いつでも前記保護フラグがONに設定された前記鑑査履歴を参照することが可能である。なお、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査履歴の保護の設定と同様の処理で前記保護フラグがOFFに設定され、その後、前記鑑査履歴は前記削除タイミングで順に削除されることになる。

And when the said inspection part deletes the said inspection log | history according to the said deletion conditions, the said inspection log | history selected beforehand according to a user operation and the said protection flag is set to ON is excluded from deletion object. Thereby, the user can refer to the inspection history in which the protection flag is set to ON at any time by performing the history inquiry operation with the inspection support device 100. The control unit 10 sets the protection flag to OFF in the same process as the inspection history protection setting, and thereafter, the inspection history is sequentially deleted at the deletion timing.

 なお、多数の前記鑑査履歴について前記保護フラグがONに設定されると、前記記憶部40の記憶容量が飽和するおそれがある。そこで、前記制御部10は、前記保護フラグをONに設定可能な前記鑑査履歴の数が予め設定された上限数を超える場合には前記保護フラグをONに設定しないことが考えられる。そのため、ユーザーは、前記鑑査履歴の保護を設定する際に、前記上限数を意識しつつ前記保護フラグをONに設定する対象を選択することになる。また、前記制御部10は、前記保護フラグがONに設定された前記鑑査履歴についても、通常よりは長い期間経過後に消去することが考えられる。例えば、前記保護フラグがOFFの前記鑑査履歴が90日後に消去される場合、前記保護フラグがONの前記鑑査履歴は、1年経過後に自動的に消去すること、又は1年経過後にユーザーに報知して確認操作を受け付けた後に消去することが考えられる。

If the protection flag is set to ON for a large number of inspection histories, the storage capacity of the storage unit 40 may be saturated. Therefore, it is conceivable that the control unit 10 does not set the protection flag to ON when the number of inspection histories that can set the protection flag to ON exceeds a preset upper limit number. Therefore, when setting the protection of the inspection history, the user selects a target for setting the protection flag to ON while being aware of the upper limit number. The control unit 10 can also erase the inspection history in which the protection flag is set to ON after a longer period than usual. For example, when the inspection history with the protection flag OFF is deleted after 90 days, the inspection history with the protection flag ON is automatically deleted after one year has passed, or the user is notified after one year has passed. It is possible to delete the data after accepting the confirmation operation.

[連続秤量機能]

 ところで、前記鑑査支援装置100において4つの前記秤量部51~54を用いて5種類以上の薬品についての鑑査を実施する場合には、先に前記秤量部51~54のいずれか一つ又は複数に載置されている薬品を取り出して、新たに薬品を載置する必要がある。これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100において、前記制御部10が、4つの前記秤量部51~54を用いて5種類以上の薬品についての鑑査を実施する場合に、先に前記秤量部51~54に載置された薬品を取り出すことなく、次の鑑査対象の薬品を前記秤量部51~54に上乗せしても鑑査を実施することが可能な連続秤量機能を備えることが考えられる。

[Continuous weighing function]

By the way, in the inspection support apparatus 100, when inspection is performed on five or more kinds of medicines using the four weighing units 51 to 54, any one or a plurality of the weighing units 51 to 54 are previously provided. It is necessary to take out the placed medicine and place a new medicine. In contrast, in the inspection support apparatus 100, when the control unit 10 performs inspection on five or more kinds of medicines using the four weighing units 51 to 54, the weighing units 51 to 54 are first performed. It is conceivable to have a continuous weighing function capable of carrying out inspection even if the next medicine to be inspected is placed on the weighing units 51 to 54 without taking out the medicine placed on the weighing machine.

 具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記連続秤量機能が有効になる連続モードを有しており、ユーザー操作に応じて前記連続秤量機能が無効になる通常モードと前記連続モードとを切り替える。そして、前記制御部10は、前記連続モードである場合、前記秤量鑑査処理の前記ステップS42において撮影画像が記録されるタイミングなどの予め定められたタイミングで、前記秤量部51~54各々による現在の秤量値を0に調整する所謂風袋引きを行うための風袋引き設定処理を実行する。ここに、前記風袋引き設定処理を実行するときの前記制御部10が風袋引き設定処理部の一例である。

Specifically, the control unit 10 has a continuous mode in which the continuous weighing function is enabled, and switches between a normal mode in which the continuous weighing function is disabled and the continuous mode in accordance with a user operation. Then, when the control unit 10 is in the continuous mode, the control unit 10 performs the current measurement by each of the weighing units 51 to 54 at a predetermined timing such as the timing at which the photographed image is recorded in the step S42 of the weighing inspection process. A taring setting process for performing so-called taring to adjust the weighing value to 0 is executed. The said control part 10 when performing the said tare pulling setting process is an example of a tare pulling setting process part here.

 例えば、前記風袋引き設定処理において、前記制御部10は、現在の実際の秤量値を例外風袋引き値として設定する。そして、前記制御部10は、その後の秤量時には実際の秤量結果から前記例外風袋引き値を引いた値を秤量結果として出力する。これにより、前記秤量鑑査処理において、前記秤量部51~54に薬品が載せられた状態であっても、前記撮影画像が記録される際に秤量値が0に調整されるため、その後に前記秤量部51~54に新たに載置される薬品の重量に基づいて続けて鑑査を行うことが可能である。なお、前記制御部10は、前記Rpデータ又は前記処方データに含まれる薬品についての鑑査が完了し、次の前記Rpデータ又は前記処方データについての鑑査が開始されるタイミングで前記風袋引き設定処理を再実行する。

For example, in the tare setting process, the control unit 10 sets the current actual weighing value as the exceptional taring value. And the said control part 10 outputs the value which pulled the said exceptional tare subtraction value from the actual weighing result as a weighing result at the time of subsequent weighing. Thereby, in the weighing inspection process, even when the medicine is placed on the weighing units 51 to 54, the weighing value is adjusted to 0 when the photographed image is recorded. It is possible to continue the inspection based on the weight of the medicine newly placed on the parts 51 to 54. In addition, the said control part 10 complete | finishes the inspection about the chemical | medical agent contained in the said Rp data or the said prescription data, and performs the said tare subtraction setting process at the timing when the inspection about the said next Rp data or the said prescription data is started. Try again.

 従って、前記連続秤量機能によれば、5種類以上の薬品が鑑査の対象である場合であっても、前記秤量部51~54に載置された4種類の薬品を取り除くことなく次の薬品を載置することが可能であり、ユーザー作業の効率化が実現される。

Therefore, according to the continuous weighing function, even when five or more kinds of medicines are to be inspected, the next medicine is removed without removing the four kinds of medicines placed on the weighing parts 51 to 54. It can be placed, and the efficiency of user work is realized.

 なお、前記風袋引き設定処理は、前記ステップS42に限らず、例えば前記秤量部51~54の秤量値が確定したタイミング(ステップS351)、前記秤量部51~54の秤量値が照合されるタイミング(ステップS37)、前記秤量部51~54の秤量値の照合が正常であると判定されたタイミング(ステップS38:Yes)などの予め定められたタイミングで実行されてもよい。また、前記連続モードにおいて、前記制御部10は、前記ステップS42の実行後に、前記秤量部51~54のうち現在の秤量値が予め設定された上限値以上である場合、前記風袋引き設定処理を実行させずに、「薬品を取り出してください」などの予め設定されたメッセージを表示することも考えられる。

The tare setting setting process is not limited to step S42, but for example, timing when the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 are determined (step S351), timing when the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 are verified (step S351). Step S37) may be executed at a predetermined timing such as a timing at which the comparison of the weighing values of the weighing units 51 to 54 is determined to be normal (Step S38: Yes). In the continuous mode, after the execution of step S42, the control unit 10 performs the tare subtraction setting process when the current weighing value of the weighing units 51 to 54 is equal to or greater than a preset upper limit value. It is also conceivable to display a preset message such as “Please take out the medicine” without executing it.

[緩和鑑査機能]

 ところで、前記鑑査支援装置100で秤量される薬品には、1錠又は0.1シートなどの単位量当たりの重量に誤差が生じやすい薬品が存在することが考えられる。この場合、前記秤量部51~54による秤量結果に基づいて算出される薬品の量と処方データにおける当該薬品の目標値との照合結果が不一致である場合にその都度エラーが報知される構成では、エラーが頻繁に発生して鑑査作業の効率が低下するおそれがある。これに対し、前記鑑査支援装置100が、単位量当たりの重量に誤差が生じやすい薬品についての鑑査精度を緩和することで鑑査作業の効率を向上させることが可能な緩和鑑査機能を備えることが考えられる。以下、前記緩和鑑査機能について説明する。

[Relaxation inspection function]

By the way, it is conceivable that the medicine weighed by the inspection support device 100 includes a medicine that is likely to cause an error in the weight per unit quantity such as one tablet or 0.1 sheet. In this case, in the configuration in which an error is notified each time when the amount of medicine calculated based on the weighing results by the weighing units 51 to 54 and the target value of the medicine in the prescription data do not match, Errors may occur frequently and the efficiency of inspection work may be reduced. On the other hand, it is considered that the inspection support device 100 has a relaxed inspection function that can improve the efficiency of inspection work by relaxing the inspection accuracy of drugs that are likely to cause an error in weight per unit amount. It is done. Hereinafter, the relaxation inspection function will be described.

 まず、前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記医薬品マスターにおいて、前記緩和鑑査機能の有効及び無効を示す注意フラグ(ON:有効、OFF:無効)が薬品ごとに対応付けて記憶可能である。また、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100における薬品各々の鑑査履歴に基づいて前記薬品各々の前記注意フラグを自動的に設定することが考えられる。例えば、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援装置100において実行される前記鑑査支援処理における前記秤量鑑査処理(図13参照)のステップS381において、照合結果が一致しない旨のエラーメッセージが表示された後、ユーザーが鑑査を承認するための鑑査承認操作(OKキーの操作)が行われた場合に、当該薬品について条件付承認が行われた旨、及びそのときの誤差を鑑査履歴として記憶する。そして、前記制御部10は、予め設定された特定期間(例えば3ヶ月)に予め設定された特定回数以上、前記条件付承認が行われた場合に、前記注意フラグを自動的にONに設定することが考えられる。なお、前記制御部10は、前記特定期間内に前記特定回数以上の前記条件付承認が行われた時点でユーザーに前記注意フラグをONに設定するか否かを選択させるための操作画面を表示させ、ユーザー操作に応じて前記注意フラグをONに設定してもよい。また、前記制御部10は、ユーザー操作に応じて任意に前記注意フラグを設定することが可能であってもよい。

First, in the inspection support apparatus 100, in the medicine master, a caution flag (ON: valid, OFF: invalid) indicating validity and invalidity of the relaxation examination function can be stored in association with each medicine. In addition, the control unit 10 may automatically set the caution flag for each medicine based on the inspection history of each medicine in the inspection support apparatus 100. For example, the control unit 10 displays an error message indicating that the verification results do not match in step S381 of the weighing inspection process (see FIG. 13) in the inspection support process executed in the inspection support apparatus 100. When the inspection approval operation (OK key operation) for the user to approve the inspection is performed, the fact that the conditional approval has been performed for the medicine and the error at that time are stored as the inspection history. Then, the control unit 10 automatically sets the caution flag to ON when the conditional approval is performed more than a predetermined number of times set in a predetermined specific period (for example, three months). It is possible. The control unit 10 displays an operation screen for allowing the user to select whether or not to set the attention flag to ON when the conditional approval is performed more than the specific number of times within the specific period. The caution flag may be set to ON according to a user operation. Further, the control unit 10 may arbitrarily set the caution flag according to a user operation.

 さらに、前記医薬品マスターには、薬品ごとに対応付けて、目標値下限個数換算、目標値上限個数換算、目標値下限シート換算、及び目標値上限シート換算が記憶可能である。前記目標値下限個数換算及び前記目標値上限個数換算は、薬品の量を個数単位で照合する場合に誤差として許容する範囲を定める値である。前記目標値下限シート換算及び前記目標値上限シート換算は、薬品の量をシート単位で照合する場合に誤差として許容する範囲を定める値である。なお、前記目標値下限個数換算、前記目標値上限個数換算、前記目標値下限シート換算、前記目標値上限シート換算の初期値は例えば0であってもよい。

Further, the pharmaceutical master can store target value lower limit number conversion, target value upper limit number conversion, target value lower limit sheet conversion, and target value upper limit sheet conversion in association with each drug. The target value lower limit number conversion and the target value upper limit number conversion are values that define a range that is allowed as an error when the amount of medicine is collated in units of number. The target value lower limit sheet conversion and the target value upper limit sheet conversion are values that define a range that is allowed as an error when the amount of medicine is collated in sheet units. The initial value of the target value lower limit number conversion, the target value upper limit number conversion, the target value lower limit sheet conversion, and the target value upper limit sheet conversion may be 0, for example.

 前記鑑査支援装置100では、前記制御部10が、前記医薬品マスターにおける前記目標値下限個数換算、前記目標値上限個数換算、前記目標値下限シート換算、前記目標値上限シート換算をユーザー操作に応じて任意に設定可能である。但し、前記鑑査支援装置100では、全ての薬品に共通して、前記目標値下限個数換算及び前記目標値上限個数換算の設定可能最大個数が設定可能であり、前記制御部10は、各薬品の前記目標値下限個数換算及び前記目標値上限個数換算の値の設定を前記設定可能最大個数以下に制限することが考えられる。同様に、前記鑑査支援装置100では、全ての薬品に共通して、前記目標値下限シート換算及び前記目標値上限シート換算の設定可能最大シート数が設定されており、前記制御部10は、各薬品の前記目標値下限シート換算及び前記目標値上限シート換算の値の設定を前記設定可能最大シート数以下に制限することが考えられる。

In the inspection support apparatus 100, the control unit 10 performs the target value lower limit number conversion, the target value upper limit number conversion, the target value lower limit sheet conversion, and the target value upper limit sheet conversion in the pharmaceutical master according to a user operation. It can be set arbitrarily. However, in the inspection support device 100, it is possible to set the settable maximum number of the target value lower limit number conversion and the target value upper limit number conversion in common for all medicines, and the control unit 10 It is conceivable to limit the setting of the target value lower limit number conversion and the target value upper limit number conversion to the settable maximum number or less. Similarly, in the inspection support device 100, common to all medicines, the settable maximum number of sheets for the target value lower limit sheet conversion and the target value upper limit sheet conversion is set, and the control unit 10 It is conceivable to limit the setting of the target value lower limit sheet conversion and the target value upper limit sheet conversion of the medicine to the settable maximum number of sheets or less.

 ここに、図34は、前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13の表示例を示す図である。図34に示されるように、前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13では、前記目標値下限個数換算、前記目標値上限個数換算、前記目標値下限シート換算、前記目標値上限シート換算の各値を入力可能である。また、前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13には、前記マスターメンテナンス画面D13で選択されている薬品についての鑑査履歴を表示させるための操作キーK33~K36が表示されている。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記操作キーK33、K34が操作されると、鑑査単位が個数であって前記条件付承認が行われた場合に生じていた個数の誤差とその誤差の発生割合とを表示させる。また、前記制御部10は、前記操作キーK35、K36が操作されると、鑑査単位がシート数であって前記条件付承認が行われた場合に生じていたシート数の誤差とその誤差の発生割合とを表示させる。

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a display example of the master maintenance screen D13. As shown in FIG. 34, in the master maintenance screen D13, the target value lower limit number conversion, the target value upper limit number conversion, the target value lower limit sheet conversion, and the target value upper limit sheet conversion can be input. . The master maintenance screen D13 displays operation keys K33 to K36 for displaying an inspection history for the medicine selected on the master maintenance screen D13. Specifically, when the operation keys K33 and K34 are operated, the control unit 10 determines the number of errors that occurred when the inspection unit is the number and the conditional approval is performed, and the occurrence of the errors. Display percentages. In addition, when the operation keys K35 and K36 are operated, the control unit 10 generates an error in the number of sheets and the occurrence of the error when the inspection unit is the number of sheets and the conditional approval is performed. Display percentages.

 例えば、「A薬品」について、前記特定期間内に、前記条件付承認が行われた回数が15件であり、そのときの誤差の個数が-1錠である場合が80%、-2錠である場合が20%である場合には、これらの情報が、前記操作キーK33の操作に応じて、図34に示されるようなポップアップ画面D33で表示される。また、「A薬品」について、前記特定期間内に、前記条件付承認が行われた回数が15件であり、そのときの誤差の個数が+1錠である場合が80%、+2錠である場合が20%である場合には、これらの情報が、前記操作キーK34の操作に応じて表示される。同様に、「B薬品」について、前記特定期間内に、前記条件付承認が行われた回数が15件であり、そのときの誤差のシート数が-0.1シートである場合が100%である場合には、これらの情報が、前記操作キーK35の操作に応じて表示される。

For example, with regard to “A medicine”, the number of times that the conditional approval was made within the specific period is 15 cases, and the number of errors at that time is −1 tablet, 80%, −2 tablets In the case where there is 20%, such information is displayed on a pop-up screen D33 as shown in FIG. 34 in response to the operation of the operation key K33. In the case of “A medicine”, the number of times that the conditional approval is made within the specific period is 15 cases, and the number of errors at that time is +1 tablet, 80%, and +2 tablets Is 20%, these pieces of information are displayed according to the operation of the operation key K34. Similarly, for “B medicine”, the number of times that the conditional approval was made within the specific period was 15 cases, and the number of sheets with an error at that time was −0.1 sheets was 100%. In some cases, these pieces of information are displayed in response to the operation of the operation key K35.

 また、「B薬品」について、前記特定期間内に、前記条件付承認が行われた回数が15件であり、そのときの誤差のシート数が+0.1シートである場合が100%である場合には、これらの情報が、前記操作キーK36の操作に応じて表示される。なお、前記制御部10は、前記誤差の個数及び前記誤差のシート数の割合を不足及び超過を含む絶対値で算出して表示することも考えられる。例えば、上述の例の場合、前記操作キーK33又はK34が操作された場合には、前記条件付承認が行われた回数として30件が表示され、誤差の個数が1錠である場合が80%、2錠である場合20%である旨が表示される。同様に、前記操作キーK35又はK36が操作された場合には、前記条件付承認が行われた回数として30件が表示され、誤差のシート数が0.1シートである場合が100%である旨が表示される。

In the case of “B medicine”, the number of times that the conditional approval is made within the specific period is 15 cases, and the number of error sheets at that time is +0.1 sheets is 100% The information is displayed according to the operation of the operation key K36. Note that the control unit 10 may calculate and display the error number and the ratio of the error sheet number as absolute values including shortage and excess. For example, in the case of the above-described example, when the operation key K33 or K34 is operated, 30 cases are displayed as the number of times that the conditional approval is performed, and the number of errors is 1 tablet 80% If there are 2 tablets, 20% is displayed. Similarly, when the operation key K35 or K36 is operated, 30 cases are displayed as the number of times that the conditional approval has been performed, and the number of error sheets is 0.1%. Is displayed.

 なお、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査履歴に基づいて、前記条件付承認が行われた割合が最も高い薬品の個数又はシート数を、前記目標値下限個数換算、前記目標値上限個数換算、前記目標値下限シート換算、前記目標値上限シート換算の各値として自動的に設定することも考えられる。

In addition, the control unit 10 is based on the inspection history, the number of medicines or the number of sheets with the highest rate of conditional approval, the target value lower limit number conversion, the target value upper limit number conversion, It is also conceivable to automatically set each value for target value lower limit sheet conversion and target value upper limit sheet conversion.

 そして、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理における前記秤量鑑査処理(図13参照)のステップS37において、鑑査対象の薬品について前記医薬品マスターで前記注意フラグがONである場合には、秤量結果の誤差が予め設定された誤差範囲内である場合に照合結果が一致であると判断する。具体的に、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査対象の薬品の鑑査単位が個数である場合には、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果に基づいて算出される薬品の個数と前記処方データにおける目標値との差が、前記医薬品マスターで設定された前記目標値下限個数換算以上であり前記目標値上限個数換算以下である場合に、照合結果が一致であると判断する。また、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査対象の薬品の鑑査単位がシート数である場合には、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果に基づいて算出される薬品のシート数と前記処方データにおける目標値との差が、前記医薬品マスターで設定された前記目標値下限シート換算以上であり前記目標値上限シート換算以下である場合に、照合結果が一致であると判断する。即ち、前記制御部10は、前記秤量部5Nによる秤量結果に基づいて算出された前記薬品の量と前記処方データにおける当該薬品の目標値の差が前記薬品ごとに予め設定された誤差範囲内である場合に(S38:Yes)、前記エラーを報知せず、前記誤差範囲を超える場合に(S38:No)、前記エラーを報知する(S381)。

Then, in step S37 of the weighing inspection process (see FIG. 13) in the inspection support process, the control unit 10 determines the weighing result when the caution flag is ON in the medicine master for the medicine to be inspected. When the error is within a preset error range, it is determined that the matching result is coincident. Specifically, when the inspection unit of the medicine to be inspected is the number, the control unit 10 calculates the number of medicines calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing part 5N and the target value in the prescription data. When the difference is equal to or greater than the target value lower limit number conversion set by the pharmaceutical master and equal to or less than the target value upper limit number conversion, it is determined that the matching results are the same. In addition, when the inspection unit of the medicine to be inspected is the number of sheets, the control unit 10 calculates the number of medicine sheets calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing unit 5N and the target value in the prescription data. When the difference is equal to or greater than the target value lower limit sheet conversion set by the pharmaceutical master and equal to or less than the target value upper limit sheet conversion, it is determined that the matching results are the same. That is, the controller 10 determines that the difference between the amount of the medicine calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing section 5N and the target value of the medicine in the prescription data is within an error range set in advance for each medicine. In some cases (S38: Yes), the error is not notified, and when the error range is exceeded (S38: No), the error is notified (S381).

 これにより、前記鑑査支援装置100では、単位量当たりの重量に誤差が生じやすい薬品についての鑑査誤差が許容され、エラーの報知頻度が少なくなるため、鑑査作業の効率を向上させることが可能である。なお、ここでは、前記秤量結果と前記目標値との誤差が前記誤差範囲内である場合に照合結果が一致であると判断される場合を例に挙げて説明した。一方、前記秤量結果と前記目標値との誤差が前記誤差範囲内である場合に前記照合結果が不一致と判断されるが、前記ステップS371におけるエラーの報知のみが実行されずに処理が前記ステップS40に移行することも他の実施形態として考えられる。

As a result, the inspection support apparatus 100 allows inspection errors for medicines that are likely to have an error in weight per unit amount, and reduces the frequency of notification of errors, so that the efficiency of inspection work can be improved. . Here, a case has been described by way of example in which it is determined that the matching result is the same when the error between the weighing result and the target value is within the error range. On the other hand, if the error between the weighing result and the target value is within the error range, the collation result is determined to be inconsistent, but only the error notification in step S371 is not executed, and the process is performed in step S40. It is also conceivable as another embodiment to shift to.

 また、前記制御部10は、前記処方鑑査画面D10において、前記注意フラグがオンの薬品については、誤差が生じやすい薬品である旨を認識するために予め定められた注意表示態様で表示することが考えられる。例えば、前記注意表示態様は、予め設定された文字色で表示すること、予め設定された背景色で表示すること、予め設定された「!」、「*」、「注意」などの記号又は文字を薬品名などに付して表示すること等が考えられる。これにより、ユーザーは、前記注意表示態様で表示された薬品について注意して鑑査を行うことが可能となる。

In addition, the control unit 10 may display a precaution check mode that is set in advance in order to recognize that the medicine with the caution flag turned on is an easy-to-error medicine on the prescription inspection screen D10. Conceivable. For example, the caution display mode may be displayed in a preset character color, displayed in a preset background color, or a symbol or character such as a preset “!”, “*”, Or “caution” It may be possible to display the name with a chemical name. Thereby, the user can perform inspection while paying attention to the medicine displayed in the caution display mode.

[撮影画像の他の表示例]

 ところで、前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12等において、前記秤量部51~54が同時に撮影された撮影画像が鑑査履歴として表示される場合には、前記撮影画像に含まれる薬品各々の種類を把握することが困難である。例えば、ユーザーは、前記撮影画像内に含まれる薬品各々の包装材で薬品の種別を判断する必要がある。これに対し、前記撮影画像に含まれる薬品各々を容易に識別可能な前記撮影画像の表示例について説明する。

[Other display examples of captured images]

By the way, in the inspection history inquiry screen D12 or the like, when a photographed image taken simultaneously with the weighing units 51 to 54 is displayed as an inspection history, it is possible to grasp the type of each medicine contained in the photographed image. Have difficulty. For example, the user needs to determine the type of medicine from the packaging material of each medicine contained in the photographed image. On the other hand, the display example of the said picked-up image which can identify each chemical | medical agent contained in the said picked-up image easily is demonstrated.

 まず、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査支援処理において、鑑査対象の薬品ごとに、前記撮影部70による撮影画像を識別するためのファイル名などの画像識別情報と、当該薬品が載置された前記秤量部5Nを識別するための秤量部番号などの秤量部識別情報とを対応付けて鑑査履歴として前記記憶部40に記憶する。その後、前記制御部10は、前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12等(図12参照)で前記鑑査履歴を表示する際、前記履歴内容表示領域A53における任意の薬品の表示欄の選択操作に応じて、少なくとも当該薬品に対応する前記画像識別情報の撮影画像が表示される画像表示画面D121を前記表示部20に表示させる。ここに、図35は、前記画像表示画面D121の一例を示す図である。図35に示されるように、前記画像表示画面D121では、選択された薬品の撮影画像が前記操作キーK19のサムネイル画像よりも拡大して表示される。なお、前記鑑査履歴照会画面D12に前記操作キーK19が表示されておらず、前記制御部10が、前記履歴内容表示領域A53における任意の薬品の表示欄の選択操作に応じて前記画像表示画面D121を表示させる場合も考えられる。また、前記操作キーK19が操作された場合に、前記画像表示画面D121によって前記撮影画像が拡大して表示されてもよい。

First, in the inspection support process, the control unit 10 includes, for each medicine to be inspected, image identification information such as a file name for identifying a photographed image by the photographing unit 70, and the medicine on which the medicine is placed. Weighing unit identification information such as a weighing unit number for identifying the weighing unit 5N is associated with and stored in the storage unit 40 as an inspection history. Thereafter, when the control unit 10 displays the inspection history on the inspection history inquiry screen D12 or the like (see FIG. 12), at least according to the selection operation of the display column of any medicine in the history content display area A53. An image display screen D121 on which a captured image of the image identification information corresponding to the medicine is displayed is displayed on the display unit 20. FIG. 35 shows an example of the image display screen D121. As shown in FIG. 35, on the image display screen D121, the photographed image of the selected medicine is displayed in an enlarged manner than the thumbnail image of the operation key K19. Note that the operation key K19 is not displayed on the inspection history inquiry screen D12, and the control unit 10 performs the image display screen D121 in response to a selection operation of an arbitrary medicine display field in the history content display area A53. It is also possible to display. Further, when the operation key K19 is operated, the captured image may be enlarged and displayed on the image display screen D121.

 なお、前述したように、図12で表示される前記履歴内容表示領域A53には、前記抽出条件表示領域A51で入力される薬品名などの情報に基づいて抽出されて前記一覧表示領域A52に表示された患者一覧のうち、任意に選択された患者の鑑査履歴の内容が表示される。即ち、前記制御部10は、任意に入力される薬品名をキーワードとして、当該薬品が撮影された撮影画像を検索することが可能である。

As described above, the history content display area A53 displayed in FIG. 12 is extracted on the basis of information such as the medicine name input in the extraction condition display area A51 and displayed in the list display area A52. The contents of the inspection history of a patient arbitrarily selected from the selected patient list are displayed. That is, the control unit 10 can search for a photographed image in which the medicine is photographed using an arbitrarily input medicine name as a keyword.

 また、前記制御部10は、前記画像表示画面D121において、図35に示す一点鎖線で区切られた操作領域A121~A124各々の操作を受け付けることが可能である。前記操作領域A121~A124各々は、前記秤量部51~54各々に位置対応する領域である。そして、前記制御部10は、前記操作領域A121~A124のいずれかの操作に応じて、前記秤量部51~54のうち操作された前記操作領域A121~A124のいずれかに対応する秤量部で秤量された薬品を識別可能な薬品名などの情報と、前記秤量結果に基づいて算出された薬品の量(錠数、シート数など)を示す情報とを含む薬品の個別情報を、前記鑑査履歴に基づいて表示させる。なお、係る表示処理は前記制御部10の表示処理部17によって実行される。また、前記制御部10は、前記操作領域A121~A124が再度操作されると、前記薬品の個別情報の表示を終了する。なお、図35では、前記操作領域A121が操作され、前記秤量部51で秤量された薬品の名称及び錠数(シート数)がポップアップ画面D122で表示されている。また、前記操作領域A121が操作された場合に、前記秤量部51の撮影画像の拡大画像と前記薬品の個別情報とがポップアップ画面D123で表示されてもよい。なお、前記秤量部51で秤量された薬品の名称及び錠数(シート数)が前記画像表示画面D121から別画面に遷移して表示されてもよい。

In addition, the control unit 10 can accept operations on the operation areas A121 to A124, which are separated by a dashed line shown in FIG. 35, on the image display screen D121. Each of the operation areas A121 to A124 is an area corresponding to each position of the weighing units 51 to 54. Then, the control unit 10 performs weighing with a weighing unit corresponding to one of the operation regions A121 to A124 operated among the weighing units 51 to 54 in response to any operation of the operation regions A121 to A124. Individual information on medicines including information such as medicine names that can identify the medicines that have been identified, and information indicating the amount of medicines (number of tablets, number of sheets, etc.) calculated based on the weighing results, is stored in the inspection history. Display based on. Such display processing is executed by the display processing unit 17 of the control unit 10. In addition, when the operation areas A121 to A124 are operated again, the control unit 10 ends the display of the individual drug information. In FIG. 35, the operation area A121 is operated, and the name and the number of tablets (number of sheets) weighed by the weighing unit 51 are displayed on the pop-up screen D122. Further, when the operation area A121 is operated, an enlarged image of the photographed image of the weighing unit 51 and the individual information on the medicine may be displayed on the pop-up screen D123. Note that the name of the medicine and the number of tablets (number of sheets) weighed by the weighing unit 51 may be transferred from the image display screen D121 to another screen and displayed.

10  制御部

20  表示部

30  操作部

40  記憶部

50  秤量装置

51~54 秤量部

55  秤量皿

56  ロードセル

60  情報読取部

70  撮影部

80  タブレット端末

90  カバー部材

100 鑑査支援装置

10 Control unit

20 Display section

30 Operation unit

40 storage unit

50 Weighing device

51-54 Weighing section

55 Weighing pan

56 load cell

60 Information reader

70 Shooting Department

80 tablet devices

90 Cover member

100 Inspection support device

Claims (24)


  1.  秤量部と、

     前記秤量部による秤量対象の薬品を選択する選択処理部と、

     前記選択処理部で選択された前記薬品が複数収容されている第1包装材が複数収容されている第2包装材における前記薬品の数と前記複数の第1包装材が収容されている前記第2包装材の総重量とを取得する取得処理部と、

     前記秤量部による秤量結果と処方データとを照合する照合処理部と、

     を備え、

     前記照合処理部が、前記取得処理部によって取得された前記薬品の数と前記第2包装材の総重量とに基づいて、前記第2包装材の総重量の整数倍の重量のうち前記秤量部の秤量値に最も近い近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が予め設定された許容範囲内である場合に前記整数倍に対応する数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数を秤量結果として前記処方データと照合可能である鑑査支援装置。

    A weighing unit;

    A selection processing unit for selecting medicines to be weighed by the weighing unit;

    The number of the medicines in the second packaging material containing a plurality of first packaging materials containing a plurality of the medicines selected by the selection processing unit and the first packaging materials contained in the second packaging materials. 2 acquisition processing unit for acquiring the total weight of the packaging material;

    A collation processing unit that collates the weighing result with the prescription data by the weighing unit;

    With

    Based on the number of the medicines acquired by the acquisition processing unit and the total weight of the second packaging material, the weighing processing unit is a weighing unit out of a weight that is an integral multiple of the total weight of the second packaging material. When the difference between the approximate weight closest to the weighed value and the weighed value of the weighed portion is within a preset allowable range, the medicine contained in the second packaging material in a number corresponding to the integer multiple An inspection support apparatus capable of collating the total number of the above data with the prescription data as a weighing result.

  2.  前記照合処理部が、前記秤量部の秤量値が前記近似重量より小さく、前記近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が前記許容範囲外である場合は、前記整数倍に対応する数よりも一つ少ない数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数を前記秤量結果として前記処方データと照合する請求項1に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    When the weighing value of the weighing unit is smaller than the approximate weight and the difference between the approximate weight and the measured value of the weighing unit is out of the allowable range, the collation processing unit has a number corresponding to the integer multiple. The inspection support device according to claim 1, wherein the total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material that is smaller by one is collated with the prescription data as the weighing result.

  3.  前記照合処理部が、前記秤量部の秤量値が前記近似重量より大きく、前記近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が前記許容範囲外である場合は、前記整数倍に対応する数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数を前記秤量結果として前記処方データと照合する請求項1又は2に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    When the weighing value of the weighing unit is larger than the approximate weight and the difference between the approximate weight and the weighing value of the weighing unit is out of the allowable range, the verification processing unit has a number corresponding to the integer multiple. The inspection support device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material is collated with the prescription data as the weighing result.

  4.  前記照合処理部が、前記近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が前記許容範囲外であって前記照合の結果が一致である場合に予め設定された警告を報知する請求項2又は3に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    The said collation process part alert | reports the warning set beforehand, when the difference of the said approximate weight and the weighing value of the said weighing part is outside the said tolerance | permissible_value, and the said collation result is in agreement. Inspection support device described in 1.

  5.  前記秤量結果を表示可能な表示処理部を備える請求項1~4のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    5. The inspection support device according to claim 1, further comprising a display processing unit capable of displaying the weighing result.

  6.  ユーザー操作に応じて前記許容範囲を設定可能な設定処理部を更に備える請求項1~5のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    6. The inspection support apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a setting processing unit capable of setting the allowable range in accordance with a user operation.

  7.  複数の前記秤量部を備え、

     前記照合処理部が、一又は複数の前記秤量部による秤量結果と前記処方データとを照合する請求項1~6のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    A plurality of the weighing units;

    The inspection support device according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the collation processing unit collates a weighing result obtained by one or a plurality of the weighing units and the prescription data.

  8.  前記照合処理部は、ユーザー操作で選択される薬品に対応する薬品識別情報が複数登録されている場合に、複数の前記薬品識別情報のいずれかをユーザー操作に応じて選択可能である請求項1~7のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    The collation processing unit can select any one of the plurality of medicine identification information according to a user operation when a plurality of medicine identification information corresponding to a medicine selected by a user operation is registered. The inspection support device according to any one of 1 to 7.

  9.  薬品の種類ごとに予め定められた単位量当たりの重量を取得する単位重量取得部と、

     前記秤量部による秤量結果を前記単位重量取得部によって取得された前記単位量当たりの重量に基づいて予め定められた単位に換算する単位換算処理部と、

     前記薬品の種類と前記単位量当たりの重量との対応関係が予め設定される第1マスター情報を予め設定される第2マスター情報に基づいて更新可能な更新処理部と、

     前記単位換算処理部によって換算された前記秤量結果を前記秤量表示領域に表示させる表示処理部と、

     を備える請求項1~8のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    A unit weight acquisition unit for acquiring a weight per unit amount predetermined for each type of medicine;

    A unit conversion processing unit that converts a weighing result by the weighing unit into a predetermined unit based on the weight per unit amount obtained by the unit weight obtaining unit;

    An update processing unit capable of updating the first master information in which the correspondence relationship between the type of the medicine and the weight per unit amount is preset based on the second master information set in advance;

    A display processing unit for displaying the weighing result converted by the unit conversion processing unit in the weighing display area;

    The inspection support device according to any one of claims 1 to 8, further comprising:

  10.  前記更新処理部は、前記第1マスターと前記第2マスターとを比較して差分を抽出し、前記第1マスターと前記第2マスターとの間で前記薬品に対応付けて登録された個別情報の数が異なる場合は、前記第1マスターに不足する前記個別情報を前記第2マスターから読み出して前記第1マスターの情報に登録し、前記個別情報が前記第1マスターに登録されておらず前記第2マスターに登録されている薬品については、前記第2マスターから前記薬品識別情報を読み出して前記第1マスターに登録する請求項9に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    The update processing unit compares the first master with the second master to extract a difference, and registers the individual information registered in association with the medicine between the first master and the second master. If the numbers are different, the individual information that is lacking in the first master is read from the second master and registered in the information of the first master, and the individual information is not registered in the first master and the first master 10. The inspection support device according to claim 9, wherein the medicine registered in the second master is read out from the second master and registered in the first master.

  11.  前記照合処理部は、前記処方データに同一用法単位の処方データであるRpデータが複数含まれる場合に、前記Rpデータ各々に含まれる薬品を前記処方データ単位で一覧表示可能である請求項1~10のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    The collation processing unit can display a list of medicines included in each Rp data in the prescription data unit when the prescription data includes a plurality of Rp data that are prescription data in the same usage unit. The inspection support device according to any one of 10.

  12.  複数の前記秤量部と、全ての前記秤量部を同時に撮影可能な撮影部と、を備え、

     前記照合処理部は、全ての前記秤量部による秤量値が確定した場合、及び前記処方データに含まれる全ての薬品について前記照合処理部による照合が終了した場合に前記撮影部で前記秤量部を撮影する請求項11に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    A plurality of the weighing units, and a photographing unit capable of simultaneously photographing all the weighing units,

    The collation processing unit photographs the weighing unit with the photographing unit when the weighing values by all the weighing units are confirmed and when collation by the collation processing unit is completed for all medicines included in the prescription data. The inspection support device according to claim 11.

  13.  前記撮影部により撮影された撮影画像を表示すると共に、前記撮影画像のうちいずれかの前記秤量部に対応する操作領域の操作が行われた場合に、当該撮影領域に対応する前記秤量部で秤量された薬品を識別可能な情報を少なくとも含む個別情報を当該撮影画像と共に表示部に表示可能な表示処理部を備える請求項12に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    The photographed image photographed by the photographing unit is displayed, and when an operation region corresponding to any one of the weighing units is operated in the photographed image, the weighing unit corresponding to the photographing region is weighed. The inspection support device according to claim 12, further comprising a display processing unit capable of displaying individual information including at least information capable of identifying the performed medicine on the display unit together with the captured image.

  14.  前記照合処理部は、前記秤量部による複数回の秤量結果と前記処方データとを照合可能である請求項1~13のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    The inspection support device according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the collation processing unit is capable of collating a plurality of weighing results obtained by the weighing unit with the prescription data.

  15.  複数の前記秤量部と、複数の前記秤量部に亘って載置可能な拡張載置部と、を備え、

     前記照合処理部は、前記各調査一部が載置された複数の前記秤量部による複数回の秤量結果と前記処方データとを照合可能である請求項14に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    A plurality of the weighing units, and an extended placement unit that can be placed across the plurality of weighing units,

    The inspection support device according to claim 14, wherein the verification processing unit is capable of verifying a plurality of weighing results obtained by a plurality of the weighing units on which the respective survey parts are placed and the prescription data.

  16.  前記照合処理部が、前記秤量部の秤量値が確定するごとに、前記処方データにおける前記薬品の目標値から前記秤量値に対応する薬品量を累積して引いた残りの薬品量を表示可能である請求項14又は15に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    Whenever the weighing value of the weighing unit is determined, the verification processing unit can display the remaining drug amount obtained by accumulating the drug amount corresponding to the weighing value from the target value of the drug in the prescription data. The inspection support device according to claim 14 or 15.

  17.  前記照合処理部が、過去の前記処方データの一部を含む事前照合用データ又は過去の前記処方データ自体と前記秤量部による秤量結果とを照合する事前鑑査制御処理を実行可能であり、前記事前鑑査制御処理における照合結果を、前記事前鑑査制御処理の実行後に前記照合処理部による照合対象となり前記事前照合用データと同一の患者に対応する処方データの照合結果として採用可能である請求項1~16のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    The collation processing unit can execute a pre-inspection control process for collating pre-collation data including a part of the past prescription data or the past prescription data itself and a weighing result by the weighing unit, The collation result in the pre-inspection control process can be adopted as a collation result of prescription data corresponding to the same patient as the pre-collation data as a collation target by the collation processing unit after execution of the preliminary inspection control process. Item 17. The inspection support device according to any one of Items 1 to 16.

  18.  前記照合処理部が、前記事前鑑査制御処理の実行後に前記照合処理部による照合対象となり前記事前照合用データと同一の患者に対応する処方データに含まれる全ての薬品の情報が前記事前照合用データと一致する場合にのみ前記事前照合用データに基づく前記事前鑑査制御処理における照合結果を当該処方データの照合結果として採用し、全ての薬品の情報が一致しない場合には、前記事前鑑査制御処理における照合結果を採用せず前記秤量部による秤量結果と当該処方データとを照合する照合処理を実行する請求項17に記載の鑑査支援装置。

    The collation processing unit is subject to collation by the collation processing unit after execution of the pre-inspection control process, and information on all medicines included in prescription data corresponding to the same patient as the pre-collation data is stored in advance. The matching result in the pre-inspection control process based on the pre-matching data is adopted as the matching result of the prescription data only when matching with the matching data. The inspection support apparatus according to claim 17, wherein a verification process for verifying a weighing result obtained by the weighing unit and the prescription data is performed without employing a matching result in the pre-article inspection control process.

  19.  前記秤量部による秤量結果を含む鑑査履歴を記憶部に記憶すると共に、前記記憶部に記憶される前記鑑査履歴を予め定められた条件に従って順次消去する記憶処理部と、

     ユーザー操作に応じて選択された前記鑑査履歴を前記記憶処理部による消去対象から除外する保護処理部と、

     を備える請求項1~18のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    A storage processing unit that stores an inspection history including a weighing result by the weighing unit in a storage unit, and sequentially deletes the inspection history stored in the storage unit according to a predetermined condition;

    A protection processing unit that excludes the inspection history selected in response to a user operation from being erased by the storage processing unit;

    The inspection support device according to any one of claims 1 to 18, further comprising:

  20.  一又は複数の前記秤量部と、

     前記照合処理部による照合開始後の予め定められたタイミングで前記秤量部による秤量値を0に調整する風袋引き設定処理を実行可能な風袋引き設定処理部と、

     を備える請求項1~19のいずれかに記載の鑑査支援装置。

    One or more weighing units;

    A tare setting setting processing unit capable of executing a tare setting setting process for adjusting the weighing value by the weighing unit to 0 at a predetermined timing after the collation start by the collation processing unit;

    The inspection support device according to any one of claims 1 to 19, further comprising:

  21.  請求項1~20のいずれかに記載の複数の鑑査支援装置と前記鑑査支援装置各々と通信可能な情報処理装置とを備える鑑査支援システムであって、

     前記鑑査支援装置各々が、前記照合処理部による照合で用いられる前記第1包装材又は前記第2包装材の重量の情報を予め定められたタイミングで前記情報処理装置に送信する送信処理部を備え、

     前記情報処理装置が、前記鑑査支援装置各々から取得される前記重量の情報に基づいて前記薬品ごとの前記重量の基準値を設定する重量設定処理部を備え、

     前記鑑査支援装置各々が、前記情報処理装置から前記重量の基準値を取得可能である鑑査支援システム。

    An inspection support system comprising a plurality of inspection support devices according to any one of claims 1 to 20 and an information processing device capable of communicating with each of the inspection support devices,

    Each of the inspection support devices includes a transmission processing unit that transmits information on the weight of the first packaging material or the second packaging material used for collation by the collation processing unit to the information processing apparatus at a predetermined timing. ,

    The information processing device includes a weight setting processing unit that sets a reference value of the weight for each medicine based on the weight information acquired from each of the inspection support devices,

    An inspection support system in which each of the inspection support devices can acquire the reference value of the weight from the information processing device.

  22.  前記送信処理部が、前記第1包装材又は前記第2包装材の重量の情報を前記第1包装材又は前記第2包装材の包装の仕様を識別可能な包装識別情報と共に前記情報処理装置に送信し、

     前記重量設定処理部が、前記鑑査支援装置各々から取得される前記重量情報のうち前記包装識別情報が同一である前記重量の情報に基づいて当該包装識別情報に対応する前記重量の基準値を設定する、

     請求項21に記載の鑑査支援システム。

    The transmission processing unit transmits information on the weight of the first packaging material or the second packaging material to the information processing apparatus together with packaging identification information capable of identifying the specification of the packaging of the first packaging material or the second packaging material. Send

    The weight setting processing unit sets the reference value of the weight corresponding to the packaging identification information based on the weight information of which the packaging identification information is the same among the weight information acquired from each of the inspection support devices. To

    The inspection support system according to claim 21.

  23.  秤量部を備える鑑査支援装置における鑑査支援方法であって、

     前記秤量部による秤量対象の薬品を選択する選択ステップと、

     前記選択ステップで選択された前記薬品が複数収容されている第1包装材が複数収容されている第2包装材における前記薬品の数と前記複数の第1包装材が収容されている前記第2包装材の総重量とを取得する取得ステップと、

     前記秤量部による秤量結果と処方データとを照合する照合ステップと、

     を含み、

     前記照合ステップでは、前記取得ステップによって取得された前記薬品の数と前記第2包装材の総重量とに基づいて、前記第2包装材の総重量の整数倍の重量のうち前記秤量部の秤量値に最も近い近似重量と前記秤量部の秤量値との差が予め設定された許容範囲内である場合に前記整数倍に対応する数の前記第2包装材に収容されている前記薬品の総数が秤量結果として前記処方データと照合される鑑査支援方法。

    An inspection support method in an inspection support apparatus including a weighing unit,

    A selection step of selecting a drug to be weighed by the weighing unit;

    The number of the medicines in the second packaging material in which a plurality of first packaging materials containing a plurality of the medicines selected in the selection step are accommodated and the second in which the plurality of first packaging materials are accommodated. An obtaining step for obtaining the total weight of the packaging material;

    A collation step of collating the weighing result by the weighing unit with the prescription data;

    Including

    In the collating step, the weighing unit measures the weight out of an integer multiple of the total weight of the second packaging material based on the number of the medicines obtained in the obtaining step and the total weight of the second packaging material. When the difference between the approximate weight closest to the value and the weighing value of the weighing unit is within a preset allowable range, the total number of the medicines contained in the second packaging material corresponding to the integer multiple Is an inspection support method in which the weighing result is compared with the prescription data.

  24.  秤量部と、

     前記秤量部による秤量結果に基づいて算出される薬品の量と処方データにおける当該薬品の目標値とを照合する照合処理部と、

     前記照合処理部による照合結果が不一致である場合にエラーを報知する報知処理部と、

     を備え、

     前記報知処理部は、前記照合処理部による照合結果が予め設定された条件を満たす場合は、前記秤量部による秤量結果に基づいて算出される薬品の量と処方データにおける当該薬品の目標値との差が前記薬品ごとに予め設定された誤差範囲内である場合に前記エラーを報知せず、前記誤差範囲を超える場合にエラーを報知する、鑑査支援装置。

    A weighing unit;

    A collation processing unit for collating the amount of the medicine calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing section and the target value of the medicine in the prescription data;

    A notification processing unit for reporting an error when the verification result by the verification processing unit is inconsistent;

    With

    When the collation result by the collation processing unit satisfies a preset condition, the notification processing unit calculates the amount of the medicine calculated based on the weighing result by the weighing unit and the target value of the medicine in the prescription data. An inspection support apparatus that does not notify the error when the difference is within an error range set in advance for each medicine but notifies the error when the difference exceeds the error range.
PCT/JP2016/079870 2015-10-08 2016-10-06 Screening assistance device, screening assistance method, and screening assistance system WO2017061579A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017544235A JP6809475B2 (en) 2015-10-08 2016-10-06 Inspection support device, inspection support method, inspection support system

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015200149 2015-10-08
JP2015-200149 2015-10-08
JP2016038846 2016-03-01
JP2016-038846 2016-03-01
JP2016-197366 2016-10-05
JP2016197366 2016-10-05

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017061579A1 true WO2017061579A1 (en) 2017-04-13

Family

ID=58487786

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2016/079870 WO2017061579A1 (en) 2015-10-08 2016-10-06 Screening assistance device, screening assistance method, and screening assistance system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (3) JP6809475B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2017061579A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113670427A (en) * 2021-08-26 2021-11-19 深圳诺博医疗科技有限公司 Weighing self-correcting method, processing module, weighing device and storage medium

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7444031B2 (en) 2020-11-13 2024-03-06 トヨタ紡織株式会社 rotating seat

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004216144A (en) * 2002-12-27 2004-08-05 Tadanori Munemoto Method and device for inspection of quantity of dispensed medicine
JP2006280916A (en) * 2005-03-11 2006-10-19 Yuyama Manufacturing Co Ltd Medicine-weighing apparatus
JP2013042795A (en) * 2011-08-22 2013-03-04 Daifuku Co Ltd Dispensing inspection system

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH109938A (en) * 1996-06-26 1998-01-16 Yuyama Seisakusho:Kk Digital display type weighing instrument
JP5743331B2 (en) 2012-06-14 2015-07-01 株式会社トーショー Dispensing support system
JP5743332B2 (en) 2012-07-02 2015-07-01 株式会社トーショー Dispensing support system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004216144A (en) * 2002-12-27 2004-08-05 Tadanori Munemoto Method and device for inspection of quantity of dispensed medicine
JP2006280916A (en) * 2005-03-11 2006-10-19 Yuyama Manufacturing Co Ltd Medicine-weighing apparatus
JP2013042795A (en) * 2011-08-22 2013-03-04 Daifuku Co Ltd Dispensing inspection system

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113670427A (en) * 2021-08-26 2021-11-19 深圳诺博医疗科技有限公司 Weighing self-correcting method, processing module, weighing device and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP6809475B2 (en) 2021-01-06
JP2020189216A (en) 2020-11-26
JPWO2017061579A1 (en) 2018-08-02
JP7120278B2 (en) 2022-08-17
JP2022116317A (en) 2022-08-09
JP7260040B2 (en) 2023-04-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6432549B2 (en) Inspection support device, inspection support method
JP7260040B2 (en) Inspection support device, inspection support method, inspection support system
JP7036178B2 (en) Chemical weighing device, chemical weighing system, chemical weighing program, recording medium
JP6988976B2 (en) Inspection support device and inspection support program
JP6776943B2 (en) Inspection support device and inspection support program
JP7211474B2 (en) Inspection support device and inspection support program
US11740952B2 (en) Interconnected framework for distributed data realization
JP2020093089A (en) Dispensing audit method, dispensing audit system, and dispensing audit program
JP6558678B2 (en) Prescription drug management device, prescription drug management method, and prescription drug management program
JP2023118135A (en) Medicine identification system
JP2005222176A (en) Receipt inspection support method and receipt inspection support program
JP7348557B2 (en) Pharmaceutical service support system, pharmaceutical service support program, and pharmaceutical service support method
GB2597043A (en) Electronic pharmacy platform
US20200342010A1 (en) Computerized method and apparatus for automated distributed ingest and presentation of multi-domain metrics
JP6261377B2 (en) Drug inspection device and program
JP2022067762A (en) Attached document management device, terminal device, attached document management system, attached document management method, attached document confirmation method of terminal device, and computer program
JP2022067763A (en) Package insert display device, user terminal, confirmation system, package insert display method, confirmation method and computer program
JP6312905B2 (en) Drug inspection device and program
JP6627613B2 (en) Inspection support system, inspection support program
JP6155205B2 (en) Drug inspection device and program
JP2013196072A (en) Screen processing system and screen processing method for receipt
Barlas The FDA May Change Pharmacists’ Access to Prescribing Information: A Website Would Replace Paper Package Inserts

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16853730

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017544235

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16853730

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1